Home
"user manual"
Contents
1. MSB D10 LSB 52 Before shift 010 43690 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 M8003 4 Shift to the left MN Y MSB D10 LSB After first shift D10 21844 1 011101110111011101101110110 0 0 M8003 MN Y MSB D10 LSB After second shift D10 43688 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 M8003 e N B 32bits M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV W A 5i 0 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instructions set M8120 0 0 and 65535 to data registers D10 and 011 respectively MOV W S1 D1 REP Each time input IO is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 65535 011 and D11 is shifted to the left by 2 bits as assigned by device Bits D10 is the low word and D11 is the high word The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Ones are set to the LSBs 10 Bits to shift 2 Before shift MSB D11 D10 LSB S2 11111 111111111 11111111111111 111
2. Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes NOP 4 HSCRF 8 MOV MOVN 12 to 16 DI 8 IMOV IMOVN 16 EI 8 IBMV IBMVN 16 to 24 XYFS 20 to 268 BMOV 12 to 16 CVXTY CVYTX 16 to 20 NSET 12 to 1540 AVRG 16 to 24 NRS 12 to 20 PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 PULSA 24 XCHG 12 to 16 PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 PWM4 24 TCCST 12 to 16 RAMP1 RAMP2 28 CMP lt gt lt gt lt gt 16 to 24 ZRN1 ZRN2 20 ICMP gt 16 to 28 ARAMP1 ARAMP2 36 to 240 LC lt gt lt gt lt gt 12 to 20 DTML DTIM DTMH DTMS 16 to 20 ADD SUB MUL DIV 16 to 24 TTIM 8 to 12 INC DEC 8 RAD 12 to 16 ROOT 12 to 20 DEG 12 to 16 SUM 16 to 20 SIN 12 to 16 ANDW ORW XORW 16 to 24 COS 12 to 16 SFTL SFTR 12 TAN 12 to 16 BCDLS 12 to 16 ASIN 12 to 16 WSFT 12 to 20 ACOS 12 to 16 ROTL ROTR 12 ATAN 12 to 16 HTOB BTOH 12 to 16 LOGE 12 to 16 HTOA 12 to 20 LOG10 12 to 16 ATOH 12 to 20 EXP 12 to 16 BTOA 12 to 20 POW 12 to 24 ATOB 12 to 20 FIFOF 20 to 24 ENCO 12 to 16 FIEX 12 DECO 12 to 16 FOEX 12 BCNT 12 to 20 NDSRC 16 to 24 ALT 8 TADD 16 to 20 CVDT 12 to 20 TSUB 16 to 20 DTDV 12 to 16 HOUR 16 to 24 DTCB 12 to 16 HTOS 12 to 16 SWAP 12 to 16 STOH 12 to 16 WEEK 20 to 532 TXD 16 to 820 YEAR 24 to 216 RXD 16 to 820 MSG 12 or more ETXD 16 to 820 LABEL 8 ERXD 16 to 820 LJMP 8to 12 DLOG 24 to 276 LCAL 8to 12 TRACE
3. MSB 51 LSB Before rotation 110 10 1110 1 1110 Rotate to right M8003 MSB S1 LSB cY After rotation 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 00 1 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate lt 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB cy gt 140101110101111010 11101100111101011110 0110 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation MSB S1 LSB 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 00 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X E 1 1 bits Quantity of bits to rotate i For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The number of bits that can be rotated is 1 through 15 for word data or 1 through 31 for double word data Since the ROTR instruction is execute
4. MUL W Si S2 REP 500 600 300000 H D10 D20 030 D10 corran P20 258 D30D3l 00049 4 When input I1 is on data of 010 is multiplied by data of 020 and the result is set to D30 and 031 D30 0004h 37856 D31 93E0h Data Type Integer MUL T Si S2 REP 500 600 300000 Et Di0 020 D30 D10 F FEocn 220 0258h D30 D31 EFFB6C20h 65531 030 FFFBh 27680 D31 c20h e Data Type Double Word MUL D S1 S2 Di REP 11 Di0 D30 D10 D11 100000 x 020 021 5000 030 031 500000000 Note In multiplication of double word data the lower 32 bit data of the result is set to destination device 01 01 1 e Data Type Long E MUL L S1 52 Di D10 D20 D30 D10 D11 100000 020 021 5000 D30 D31 500000000 Note In multiplication of long data the lower 32 bit data of the result is set to destination device 01 01 1 Data Type Float MUL F S1 52 Di REP D10 D20 D30 D10 D11 4 554 020 021 1 414 D30 D31 6 439356 Note Since the destination uses two word devices in the multiplication operation data regis
5. Z Delimiter Skip HEX ASCII Digits REP 1 or FF Delimiter Cancel Receive Digits The received data is divided into blocks of specified receive digits before conversion as described below Example Received data of 6 bytes are divided in different receive digits Repeat is also designated 1 Receive digits 2 2 Receive digits 3 T v T Ton T T T T 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits 3 digits 3 digits 1st block 2nd block 3rd block ist block 2nd block Conversion Type The data block of the specified receive digits is then converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example Received data has been divided into a 2 digit block 1 ASCII to Binary conversion Tv gt 31h 32h ASCII to Binary conversion 0012h 2 ASCII to BCD conversion EA gt 00012 000Ch 31h 32h ASCII to BCD conversion Hexadecimal value 3 No conversion Tv 3132h 31h 32h No conversion E DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 9 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Cycles When a data register is assigned to repeat the received data is divided and converted in the same way as specified
6. BCD BTOH W S1 Di 0 D10 D20 Ii D10 0000h D20 4660 D10 1234h D20 39321 D10 9999h D20 Data Type Double Word BCD BTOH D S1 Di 0 D10 D20 I2 D10 0000h D20 0 Dil 0000h D21 4660 D10 1234h D20 22136 Dil 5678h D21 39321 D10 9999h D20 39321 Dil 9999h D21 11 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Binary 0 0000h 1234 04D2h 9999 270Fh Binary 0 0000h 0 0000h 188 00BCh 24910 614Eh 1525 05F5h 57599 EOFFh IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS HTOA Hex to ASCII H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 gt D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 HTOA W S1 S2 D1 When input is on the 16 bit binary data assigned by S1 is read from the lowest digit as many times as the quantity of digits assigned by S2 converted into ASCII data and stored to the destination starting with the device assigned by D1 The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1 4 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion resu
7. iania aniani 24 10 HOUR Hour Meter 24 11 User Communication Instructions EE EE 25 1 RAD RECCIVE REEL 25 7 ETXD User Communication Transmit over 25 21 ERXD User Communication Receive over Ethernet eene ener nnns 25 21 Data Log Instructions DLOG Data OQ E 26 1 TRACE e S 26 8 Script SCRPT nitsaaie 27 1 PID Instruction PID PID IMStHUCtlOM UT 28 1 PID MONItOF 28 16 Execution Times Tor INStUCHOMS RE ERU noteechudnanastdauveccadedseeudseveateaviecsanteereestenss 1 Breakdown of END Processing TMG 25 3 5 C A 5 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 1 OPERATION BASICS Introduction This chapter describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR software required for programming and maintenance of the SmartAXIS series Note SmartAXIS Touch series use WindO I NV3 for programming See the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual for instructions for programming and
8. 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Si S2 Di CMP I S1 S2 Di REP D30 D40 Q1 D30 12 lt gt 040 3 x Qi turned on D30 4 lt gt 040 3 Qi turned off Data Type Double Word CMP gt D S1 52 Di 50 D60 Q2 Si S2 Di 050 051 23456789 lt gt D60 D61 12345678 02 turned 050 051 23456789 60 061 34567890 02 turned off e Data Type Long CMP gt L 51 52 Di 13 D70 D80 Q3 51 52 Di 070 071 12345678 lt gt 080 081 12345678 Q3 turned on D70 D71 12345678 lt gt 080 081 34567890 03 turned off Data Type Float CMP gt F S1 52 Di 14 D90 D95 Q4 51 52 Di 090 091 12 4 lt gt D95 D96 12 345 04 on 090 091 1 lt gt D95 D96 0 99 04 turned off IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 7 3 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the Data Comparison Instructions The following examples use the gt instruction of word and double word data Repeat operation for all other data comparison instructions and other data types is the same as the following examples When the repeat operation is enabled repeated compa
9. Source 1 Destination 1 S1 Dos nic S141 as 01 1 S142 dus Diez db id Ela Source 2 pes SET uos 52 esas pit ui 51 5 Bio S2 1 Mos E D1 5 Mies S146 ras S2 2 ium D1 6 pan Note Device 51 3 in source 1 is not used for execution and need not be designated TADD instruction supports leap years For source 1 Year data can be 0 through 99 Month data 1 through 12 Day data 1 through 31 Hour data 0 through 23 Minute and second data 0 through 59 Year data 0 through 99 is processed as year 2000 through 2099 For source 2 Hour data can be 0 through 65535 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 Destination 1 The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to device D1 3 Day of week data represent 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday and 6 Saturday When source 1 contains invalid day time data a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When the execution result exceeds 99 year 12 month 31 day 23 59 59 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors
10. MSB S1 LSB Before rotation F 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 4 M8003 Rotate to the left MSB S1 LSB After rotation 1 00111010111111010111110 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate lt 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB 1101011110110 11111111010 11110 1110101111110 1110 1111111010111 10 i4 M8003 7 Rotate to the left After rotation MSB 51 LSB 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 1 15 1 31 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for word data or 1 through 31 for double word data Since the ROTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction shoul
11. Pulse A is used as pulse output Pulse B on A off is used as reversible control Pulse A i f d pulse CW Reversible control ulse A is used as forward pulse CW Dual pulse output output A JI p Pulse B is used as reverse pulse CCW mode output The ports used on the SmartAXIS vary based on the instruction used the combination of the pulse output mode and reversible control and the model used Port used Instruction Operating condition 40 1 type 48 1 type Pulse output Reversible Pulse output Reversible port control port port control port Reversible control disabled 014 014 RAMP1 Reversible control single pulse output 014 016 Note 014 012 Reversible control dual pulse output 014 015 014 015 Reversible control disabled Q15 Q15 RAMP2 Reversible control single pulse output Q15 Q17 Note Q15 Q13 Dual pulse output mode cannot be used Note When using single pulse mode on the 40 I O type 016 017 are used Therefore PULS3 PWM3 or PULS4 PWM4 cannot be used 10 Control direction When reversible control is enabled store 0 in this data register for forward operation and store 1 in this data register for reverse operation 11 Preset value This setting configures the total number of output pulses from 1 to 100 000
12. 21 6 ACOS Are COSING sais 21 7 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Il TABLE OF CONTENTS Carrer 22 Carrer 23 Carrer 24 Carrer 25 Cures 26 Carrer 27 Carrer 28 IL NDEX IV ATAN Are Tangent EET 21 8 Logarithm Power Instructions LOGE Natural Logarithm LOG10 Common Logarithm EXP a a cese Deeds File Data Processing Instructions FFIFOM cess irat ener cra dra 23 1 FIEX First InEX Cute H 23 3 a9 2d rp aslan cot HS 23 3 NDSRC N Data Search it bruta parasiai atta a Reno ax XE ERR ien 23 5 Clock Instructions Time m HM 24 1 UU 24 5 HMS 1050 24 9 Sec to tussi tita sank
13. Data Type Word D10 gt 02 MOV W S1 Di REP When input I1 is on data in data register D10 assigned DO 11 D10 D2 by source device S1 is moved to data register D2 Di assigned by destination device D1 02 930 l 4 Zu 0101 930 Data Type Double Word D10 D11 02 03 MOV D S1 When input 11 is on data in data registers 010 011 n D10 D2 assigned by source device S1 is moved to data registers D1 D2 and D3 assigned by destination device D1 D2 lt D3 Zu D10 Double word Dii Data Double word Data Move in Data Registers When a data register timer or counter is selected as a double word device the upper word data is loaded from or stored to the first device selected The lower word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent device Double word Destination Device Data Register Data Move to Data Registers Double word MOV D S1 D1 REP Source Data A560 ET 305419896 igh Wor 8 305419896 1234h 12345678h 22136 5678h Low Word D1 6 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the Move Instructions Repeat Source Device When the S1 source is set to repeat as many devices as the repea
14. MSG Message 4 E377 Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert E The Insert Bar Graph dialog box opens 15 Set Device to D0002 Data Type to Integer I Max to 50 Min to 20 and Origin to 0 Disable the blinking settings Insert Bar Graph 9 Device D0002 D0002 Data Type Integer I Maximum Minimum 20 Origin Occupied Area RowxColumn 1 24 Min Origin O Blinking Settings Upper Limit Lower Limit 16 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message i 8 Options Priority o Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert 13 14 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Configuring the special data 17 Select the left edge of the fourth line and click Special Data ence a M Options Priority 0 Ackno
15. x x D1 Destination 1 Receive completion output D2 Destination 2 Receive status X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Receive format designated by device S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When data receive is complete an output or internal relay designated by device D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the device designated by D2 The receive status data register D0 D1998 stores the status of data receive and error code The next data register stores the byte count of received data The same data registers can not be used as transmit status registers for TXD2 through TXD3 instructions and receive status registers for RXD2 through RXD3 instructions The RXD instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Precautions for Programming the RXD Instruction The SmartAXIS can execute a maximum of five instructions each of 2 through RXD3 that have a start delimiter at the same time If a start delimiter is not programmed in RXD2 through RXD3 instructions the SmartAXIS can exe
16. Upload pjw WINDLDR elaks d Status custom Power Line I Aa Error jesse 5 Batch d Port Monitor Download Upload Run Time Device lt Configure Monitor SetUp Dial Up Master Slaves Shutdown Program Datalist 08 Cance f Initialize Forced 1 0 D Monitor 10000 10001 90000 Rung 1 When both inputs IO and I1 are on Rung 2 output QO is turned off 2 10000 10001 0001 Rung 2 When both inputs IO and 11 are on Rug 3 output Q1 is turned off 3 011 8 10000 10001 010 Rung 3 When both inputs IO and I1 are on internal relay M10 is turned on 4 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special M0010 M8121 internal relay While M10 is on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Quit WindLDR When you have completed monitoring you can quit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen In both cases from the WindLDR application button click Exit WindLDR 1 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS Introduction SmartAXIS Pro and Touch are equipped with an LCD and capable of monitoring the ladder program in the SmartAXIS This chapter describes how to use the ladder program monitoring Notes e For other SmartAXIS Pro functions refer to the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e For other SmartAXIS Touch functions refer to th
17. e nO Ga Apc E eR eR RR EE Qn 7 8 Less Than e E 7 8 LC Load Compare Greater 2 RE Esau 7 8 lt Less Than Or Equal E EAOa 7 8 LC gt Load Compare Greater Than or Equal 7 8 Binary Arithmetic Instructions C ppEQppIEMT M U 8 1 SUB SUBUraCHON I EBDM 8 1 lS BET ez ERR 8 1 DIE IER 8 1 ING HERR desbexexiagvudacedtecsnidaegisepdedessaaacecqaceepeneedisusbiapceczene 8 13 DEG Decrerrelht ieu oui Eo sa Ezra paradida naiai iasa bada 8 13 eec P A RB 8 14 SENIUM HQ 8 15 Boolean Computation Instructions ANDW CAND Wr cnscsshisieeitazectecccaatsetveiiahetasuceeddeiveshatnasccacsa dine
18. 2 34 7 89 3 33 10 0 6 13 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS NRS N Data Repeat Set H S1 gt D1 D2 D3 Dn 1 NRS N W Si Di When input is 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 is set to N blocks of destinations starting with device assigned by D1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data D1 First 16 32 bit data N Data Repeat Set 1 1 D1 2 Second 16 32 bit data 51 16 32 bit data D1 2 or D1 4 Third 16 32 bit data Source data for repeat set n 1 1 or Di 2N 2 Nth 16 32 bit data Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat N W N blocks Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First device address to move to X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 For the N W 1 word 16 bits is always used without regard to the data type Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as N W or S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be desi
19. jr Cancel 1 Data register settings This setting determines whether to configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with data registers To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings clear this check box Unselected check box The day of the week and the time are fixed settings The day of the week and the time are configured on the parameter tabs The day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For the settings see Parameter tab on page 12 3 Note When this check box is selected the settings for the day of the week and the time are indirectly specified with data registers Configure the day of the week and the time by using data registers The day of the week and the time can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For directions specific to data registers see To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers on page 12 5 2 S1 source 1 Starting data register This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings 12 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs This setting configures the number of parameter tabs W
20. 02 Destination 2 FIFO status output For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2 Since the FIFOF instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When an M internal relay is assigned as the D2 three internal relays starting with the device assigned by D2 I integer are used D double word When a D data register is assigned as the D1 51 52 2 data registers starting with the device assigned by D1 L long are used F float 23 1 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 23 DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS Destination Device D1 FIFO Data File FIFO data files are initialized when corresponding FIFOF instructions are executed FIFO data file is placed in the area starting with the device designated by D1 and occupies as many as 51 52 2 data registers The size of each record is equal to S1 S1 1 records of data can be stored in an FIFO data file using FIEX instructions The stored data can be retrieved from the FIFO data file using FOEX instructions Device 01 0 Function FI pointer Description The FI pointer indicates the position to store new data into the FIFO data file When an FIEX instruction is executed the new data in data registers starting with the device designated by S1 of the FIEX instruction
21. 030 7 031 1 Quotient Remainder DIV I Si 52 Di REP D10 D20 D30 Data Type Double Word E D10 D11 100000 020 021 70000 030 031 1 D32 D33 30000 Quotient Remainder DIV D Si S2 Di REP D10 D20 D30 Note Since the destination uses four word devices in the division operation of double word data data registers D997 through D999 or D1997 through D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so M1201 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1 Data Type Long E D10 D11 100000 020 021 70000 030 031 1 D32 D33 30000 Quotient Remainder DIV L 51 52 Di REP D10 D20 D30 Note Since the destination uses four word devices in the division operation of long data data registers D997 through D999 or D1997 through D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so M1201 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1 e Data Type Float E 010 011 4 43996 020 021 3 14 030 031 1 414 Quotient DIV F Sl 52 Di RE
22. ON settings OFF settings Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Day of the week setting ON 0000010 Day of the week setting OFF 0100000 The value of the data register is 1000100000 binary 544 decimal To configure the output to turn on Monday and Thursday and to turn off Tuesday and Saturday Monday and Thursday are enabled in the ON settings Tuesday and Saturday are enabled in the OFF settings ON settings OFF settings Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fo Ms 1 Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Day of the week setting ON 0010010 Day of the week setting OFF 1000100 The value of the data register is 1001001000100 binary 4676 decimal The ON time and the OFF time are stored in the data register as follows 12 34 23 45 v v For 12 34 1234 Decimal For 23 45 2345 Decimal Data register 1 word Data register 1 word Fi DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 7 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Examples WEEK To turn on output QO Monday to Friday each week from 8 30 to 17 15 Parameter tab
23. Triggered at 2012 02 06 08 30 23 Scan D0010 Old 12345 12345 New 12345 Header row 1 Header row 2 Data 2 scans before Data 1 scan before Latest data When a CSV file for the same date already exists in the folder designated S1 the header and trace data are appended to the CSV file Output example Triggered at 2012 02 06 08 30 23 Scan D0010 Old 12345 12345 New 12345 Triggered at 2012 02 06 17 16 15 Scan D0010 Old 1212 1212 New 1212 _ Appended header row 1 Appended header row 2 Appended data 2 scans before Appended data 1 scan before Appended latest data When the execution of the TRACE instruction finishes the device designated by D1 is turned on and the status code is stored to the device designated by D2 according to the execution result For status codes see 3 D2 destination 2 Execution status on page 26 10 Notes The TRACE instruction accumulates data while SmartAXIS is running but does not accumulate data when SmartAXIS is stopped e Data is accumulated while SmartAXIS is running even when the input to the TRACE instruction is off e When the input to the TRACE instruction is turned on the accumulated data is output to the CSV file e The time required to create a new CSV file create a file and output header is 870 ps e Trace data is accumulated even whe
24. 0 100 96 9 Jutput MV Rate of Change o Eis Eis Rie 0 to 100 s 10 Band Offset 7100 to 100 11 Control Period 3 gt 0 1 to 50 0 s Device Allocation lt E 1 Output Manipulated Variable analog value 51 19 Set the output for the PID control The value can be specified as Analog Output or Data Register The manipulated variable calculated with the PID instruction according to the output manipulated variable limit 5 setting is stored When Analog Output is specified An analog output to AQ5 can be set The output is output from the set analog output AQO to AQ5 For auto mode the value that is output is the value stored in the output manipulated variable analog value 51 19 having undergone linear conversion in the range of the maximum value and the minimum value of the analog output AQO to AQ5 For manual mode the value that is output is the value stored in the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 17 having undergone linear conversion in the range of the maximum value and the minimum value of the analog output AQO to AQ5 The value of the output manipulated variable is automatically stored in the special data register that corresponds to the analog output AQO to AQ5 For the allocation of special data registers see Chapter 27 Internal Devices 2 2 Control Device Addresses in the S
25. Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 January to December 1st to 31st e Month Week Day of the week Data register 1 word Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NENNEN 12 18 January to December SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1st to 5th or the last Sunday to Saturday Week setting assignments Binary Decimal 001000 8 ist 010000 16 2nd 011000 24 3rd 100000 32 4th 101000 40 5th 110000 48 Last Day of the week assignments Binary Decimal 000 0 Sunday 001 1 Monday 010 2 Tuesday 011 3 Wednesday 100 4 Thursday 101 5 Friday 110 6 Saturday 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS e Month End of month Reserved Month setting Reserved bit bit bit bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EHNA January to December DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 19 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Example day of the week settings When configured to turn on the output on January 1st January 1st Day setting Reserved Month setting Reserved Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Month setting 0001 1 Day
26. SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 51 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Step 4 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ea Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 Steady pulse frequency D0020 500 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz as Frequency change time 00021 8000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms T Preset value D0022 D0023 1000000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0024 ipe Acceleration deceleration contral 00024 Acceleration deceleration later pes Next step number D0025 5 0 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D20 500 5 kHz Frequency change time D21 8000 8 000 ms Preset value D22 D23 1000000 Preset value 1 000 000 Control direction D24 Timing of change D24 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D25 5 Step 5 Step 5 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0026 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz T Frequency change time D0027 8000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms ep 3 Preset value D0028 D0029 100000 1 to 100 000 000 Step 4 Control direction D0030 Acceleration deceleration cont
27. 1 D DEC D CC CP D DEC L D DEC F D HEX W TC TP CC CP D HEX D CC CP D BIN B I Q M R T 5 Tag Name Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices whose values are output to the CSV files 6 Device Address When the devices are specified as tag names the corresponding device addresses are shown 7 Display Type Select the display type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file Display type Range Maximum characters DEC W 0 to 65 535 5 DEC T 32 768 to 32 767 6 DEC D 0 to 4 294 967 295 10 DEC L 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 11 DEC F 3 402823E 38 to 3 402823E 38 13 HEX W 0000 to FFFF 4 HEX D 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8 BIN B Oori 1 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 3 IDEC 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS 8 Repeat The data in as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat starting from the specified device address are output to the SD memory card For example when the display type of D10 is DEC W and the repeat is set to 5 the data is output to SD memory card as follows Time D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 D0014 2011 09 07 15 40 00 12345 1 5 12 111 2011 09 07 15 41 00 1212 3 7 35 222 2011 09 07 15 42 00 345 4 99 79 333 9 Logging data size Header Log data 1 Log data 2 4 Log data 3 The amount of memory that the DLO
28. CNTD C2 100000 LC D c2 99997 ce LC gt D c2 99996 Timing Chart Reset Input IO Pulse Input I1 C2 Output QO Output Q1 Ladder Diagram 2 ADD I D LC lt I D10 2 LC lt I 3 D10 LC lt I LC lt I 3 D10 D10 Timing Chart ON Input I2 OFF D10 Value ON Output Q2 OFF ON Output Q3 OFF IDEC 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used Program List LOD LOD CNTD LC D OUT LC gt D OUT 99996 99997 99998 99999 51 010 5 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 n C2 100000 C2 99997 00 C2 Q1 100000 Output QO is on when counter C2 current value is 99997 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current value reaches 99996 and remains on until counter C2 is reset Program List Instruction LOD SOTU ADD I LC lt I LC lt I ORLOD OUT LC lt I LC lt I ANDLOD OUT Output Q2 is on when data register D10 is less than or equal to 2 and greater than or equal to 3 Output Q3 is on while data register D10 is
29. IMOV Indirect IMOVN Indirect Move Block Move IBMV Indirect Bit IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not NSET N Data seen NRS N Data Repeat 5 XCHG Exchange erar en enin TCCST Timer Counter Current Value Store Data Comparison Instructions CMP Compare Equal MINE HRS 7 1 lt gt Compare Unequal TO 2 5 33 6 aoa true 7 1 CMP Compare 557 7 1 gt Greater Tig ccs eanne e Eaa EE a 7 1 CMP lt Compare Less Thanor Equal eb EE EEE 7 1 gt Compare Greater Than Equal TO nnne ner 7 1 ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal 7 6 C Load Compare EqulallT0 5 55522 55 55 ouo enne dpa aot eus neu ceno season uto cus dx uda av Re e Rede ER RES 7 8 LE lt gt Load Compare Unequal TQ tue anao eese
30. LC Load Compare Greater Than or Equal Data type W or I 51 gt 52 Data type D 51 51 1 gt 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 and 52 When 51 data is greater than or equal to S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC gt Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated When F float data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS The output to the following instructions is turned off For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 7 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DEC Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long F float Xx Examples LC Ladder Diagram 1 Reset
31. Set a value that satisfies process variable minimum value lt low alarm value high alarm value Set a value between 1 and 10 000 0 01 to 100 00 seconds 51 5 Sampling period Sampling period of 0 operates as 0 01 seconds and 10 001 or higher operates R W as 100 00 seconds Select the control mode 0 PID control 51 4 Low alarm value R W 51 6 Control mode 1 Proportional control R W 2 PI control 3 PD control S147 Set point Seta vale tiat satisfies process variable minimum value lt set point lt R W process variable maximum value Set a value between 1 and 10 000 0 01 to 100 00 51 8 Proportional band Proportional band of 0 operates as 0 01 and 10 001 or higher operates as R W 100 00 Set a value between 1 and 65 535 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds S149 Integral time R W When integral time is 0 integral time is disabled Set lue between 1 and 65 535 0 1 t 53 5 seconds 51410 Derivative time Value Wee and 63335 01 tO Gene R W When derivative time is 0 derivative time is disabled DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 9 28 PID INSTRUCTION Eod Function Setting details R W T Set a value between 0 100 0 to 100 Derivative gain Derivative gain of 0 operates as 0 and 101 or higher operates as 100 R W Set a value between 0 and 100 0 to 100 DETUR ARW ARW of 101 or higher op
32. Si Di REP 50 DO MOV D Sie 1 60000 2 RI EP 5 Turn initialization input MO Store 50 500 Hz in frequency DO Store 60 000 in the preset value Turn on M1 to output next pulse When PULS1 instruction input IO turns on start output of pulses with a frequency of 200 Hz Pulse output complete M101 turns off pulse output not complete PULS Pulse Output Devices Settings PULS 1 Q0014 gt S1 Control Register S2 Initialization Input Tag Name 00000 0000 Device Address 00000 000 Comment D1 OperationStatus M0100 M0100 PULS Pulse Output EN Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Output pulse frequency D0000 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Pulse counting Enable pulse counting PULS 1 and PULS 2 instructions only Preset value D0002 D0003 5000 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0004 D0005 1 to 100 000 000 Error status D0006 OK Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Output pulse frequency DO 20 200 Hz Pulse counting Enable pulse counting Preset value D2 D3 5000 Preset value 5 000 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 7 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS PWM
33. 14 0 5 sec SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CNT CDP and CUD Counter Three types of counters are available adding up counter CNT dual pulse reversible counter CDP and up down selection reversible counter CUD A total of 100 FT1A 12 or 200 other SmartAXIS counters can be programmed in a user program Each counter must be allocated to a unique number CO through C199 Counter Device Address Preset Value CNT adding counter to C199 Constant 0 to 65535 CDP dual pulse reversible counter to C199 Data registers DO to D1999 CUD up down selection reversible counter to C199 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 The preset value can be 0 through 65535 and designated using a decimal constant or data register CNT Adding Counter When counter instructions are programmed two addresses are required The circuit for an adding UP counter must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input the CNT instruction and a counter number CO through C199 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value e Asingle counter number cannot be programmed more than once Ladder Diagram Program List e W
34. CMP AND OR S1 R S2 R Di R REP CMP 51 S2 R Di R REP CMP gt Compare Greater Than Equal CMP gt 51 AND OR 52 H ZIDEC Data type W or I 51 52 gt Di on Data type D L 5151 1 52 52 1 Di on When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When Si data is equal to S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Data type W or I Si 52 D1 Data type D L or F 5151 1 52 52 1 D1 on When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is not equal to S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Data type W or I 51 lt 52 gt Dion Data type D L 51 51 1 lt 52 52 1 D1 on When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Data type W or I 51 gt 52 D1 on Data type D L or F 51 51 1 gt 52 52 1 D1 on When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When
35. D1 Destination 1 First device address to store results X D2 Destination 2 Sampling completion output X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S3 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When F float data is selected only data registers can be designated as S1 and D1 While input is on the AVRG instruction is executed in each scan When the quantity of sampling cycles scan times designated by device S3 is 1 through 65535 sampling data designated by device S1 is processed in each scan When the designated sampling cycles have been completed the average value of the sampling data is set to the device designated by D1 data type W or I or 01 01 1 data type D L F The maximum value of the sampling data is set to the next device D1 1 data type W or I or 01 2 01 3 data type D L The minimum value of the sampling data is set to the next device D1 2 data type W or I or 01 4 01 5 data type D L The sampling completion output designated by device D2 is turned on When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by device S3 is 0 sampling is started when the input to the AVRG instruction is turned on and stopped when the sampling end input designated by device S2 is turned on Then the
36. Device tab ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table Eam Devices Settings Ramp Table ARAMP 1 00014 51 Register 52 InitializationInput S3 Interrupt Input D1 MonitorRegister D2 OperationStatus Tag Name lt wl e re Device Address Comment OK 1 Select instruction This item selects which ARAMP instruction to use ARAMP1 or ARAMP2 The reversible control mode that can be selected varies based on the instruction For limitations based on the combination of instruction reversible control mode and the pulse output mode see 8 Reversible control enable on page 19 37 2 S1 source 1 Control register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the ARAMP1 or ARAMP2 instruction Starting from the specified data register 2 6 x N N number of steps consecutive 16 bit data registers are used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D992 dependent on the number of steps The steps operate with the settings that are configured when the steps start If the settings for a step are changed after it starts running those changes are not reflected while the step is running Storage destination Function Setting Reference Starting number 0 Interrupt number 1to 18 11 Interrupt number on Starting number 1 Reserved page 19 37 Step 1 6 words Mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of
37. Preset value 5 000 Preset value 5 000 100 kHz MOWW S1 5000 Di D2 REP 51 5000 014 Di MOV W SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 When I2 turns on the initialization input MO is turned on and the ARAMP instruction control register values are initialized When the ARAMP instruction input IO turns on pulse output starts When the MOV instruction input 11 turns on the steady pulse frequencies for step 2 and step 4 D2 and D15 are changed to 5 kHz 19 45 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Basic settings Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table 1 00014 e S1 Control Register 52 Initialization Input 53 Interrupt Input 01 Monitor Register D2 OperationStatus Tag Name D0000 e 0000 Mooso Device Address D0000 woo oo Comment ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Reversible control enable Single pulse output Number of steps 4 1 to 18 steps Start step number 1 1104 step Interrupt step number D0000 1
38. 4 712389 rad x 180 7 270 0 DEG F Si Di D10 D20 51 Di 010 011 4 712389 p20 D21 270 0 21 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 f DEC 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS SIN Sine H Applicable SmartAXIS sin 1 S1 1 gt 0101 1 SIN F 51 D1 When input is on the sine of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Radian value to convert into sine value X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the SIN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W wod S Since the floating point data type is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word
39. Data Type Double Word Binary HTOB D S1 Di D10 D20 I2 D10 0000h D20 0 Dil 0000h D21 188 D10 00BCh D20 24910 Dil 614Eh D21 1525 D10 05F5h D20 57599 Dil EOFFh D21 11 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 BCD 0 0000h 4660 1234h 39321 9999h BCD 0 0000h 0 0000h 4660 1234h 22136 5678h 39321 9999h 39321 9999h IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOH BCD to Hex H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 BTOH Si Di When input is on the BCD data assigned by S1 is converted into 16 or 32 bit binary data and stored to destination assigned by device D1 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 BCD for word data and 0 through 9999 9999 BCD for double word data FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 BCD data to convert X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed Wh
40. Gi oe 1 Ci 010 SET RST Reset The SET and RST reset instructions are used to set on or reset off outputs internal relays and shift register bits The same output can be set and reset many times within a program SET and RST instructions operate in every scan while the input is on Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON S 10 10 Qo ug ON OFF n Q0 ON Q0 Valid Devices Instruction D 0 21 SET 40 61 0 1277 0 0 1999 15 RST 80 101 8000 8177 8000 0 8199 15 120 141 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Note For restrictions on ladder programming of SET and RST instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 3 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS AND and ANDN And Not The AND instruction is used for programming a NO contact in a series The ANDN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in a series The AND or ANDN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart F Instruction Data 10 10 n 00 ON 4 ON 4 Q0 I0 11 Qi ON 01 When both inputs 10 and 11 are on output 90 is on When either input IO or 11 is off output 0 is off When input IO is on and input I1 is off output Q1 is on When either input IO is off or input I1 is on output Q1 is off Va
41. Note For restrictions on ladder programming of SOTU and SOTD instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 Timing Chart ON Input IO OFF Output 00 OFF Output Q1 OFF Note T equals one scan time one shot pulse There is a special case when the SOTU and SOTD instructions are used between the MCS and MCR instructions see MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset on page 5 27 If input I2 to the SOTU instruction turns on while input I1 to the MCS instruction is on then the SOTU output turns on If input I2 to the SOTD instruction turns off while input I1 is on then the SOTD output turns on If input I1 turns on while input I2 is on then the SOTU output turns on However if input I1 turns off while input I2 is on then the SOTD output does not turn on as shown below Ladder Diagram Timing Chart ON Input I1 OFF ON Input I2 OFF ON SOTU Output M1 ON SOTD Output 2 off No Output No Output 5 26 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset The MCS master control set instruction is usually used in combination with the MCR master control reset instruction The MCS instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the MCR instruction When the input preceding the MCS instruction is off the MCS is executed so that all inputs to the portion between the MCS and the MCR are fo
42. Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on pulses are output from 014 according to the settings configured by the data registers When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses increase according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output ends If the ARAMP instruction input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the ARAMP instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the ARAMP instruction input 19 40 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP1 instruction single pulse output reversible control enabled timing chart 1 instruction S1 is specified as data register D200 S2 is specified as
43. When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed data receiving ends when the specified bytes of data in the receive format such as data registers and skips have been received In addition data receiving also ends when the interval between incoming data characters exceeds the receive timeout value specified in the Communication Parameters dialog box whether the RXD has an end delimiter or not The character interval timer is started when the first character of incoming communication is received and restarted each time the next character is received When a character is not received within a predetermined period of time timeout occurs and the RXD ends data receive operation Example 1 When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 h SA Mam as the first data register A NEAR NC NS D101 eh 30h 31h 32h 33h Total of received characters 0100 The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to receive format Receive operation is completed when the total characters programmed in RXD are received 2 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and without BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 h as the first data register 2 3 ETX D101 h 3
44. x X x lt For data types see Data Types for Advanced Instructions on page 4 10 3 Maximum Enter the maximum value for the bar graph If the device value is larger than the maximum value the bar graph is displayed as the maximum value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data Types for Advanced Instructions on page 4 10 4 Minimum Enter the minimum value for the bar graph If the device value is smaller than the minimum value the bar graph is displayed as the minimum value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data Types for Advanced Instructions on page 4 10 5 Origin Enter the value to be the origin of the bar graph If the device value is larger than the origin value the bar graph is displayed on the right side of the origin value If the device value is smaller than the origin value the bar graph is displayed on the left side of the origin value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data Types for Advanced Instructions on page 4 10 The origin value must satisfy the condition of Minimum lt Origin lt Maximum Line A monitor _ _ larget countl 30000 Min lt Origin lt Max Prod count 14500 mm 6 Occupied Area The occupied area is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used Lines 1 colum
45. 1234567890 499602D2h BCD Binary 123456 0001E240h BCD Binary 123 0000007Bh IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ENCO Encode When input is on a search begins for the first bit that is set to on The search begins at S1 until the first set on point is located The number of points from S1 to the first set point offset is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 51 Di If no point is on in the searched area 65535 is stored to D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First bit to start search X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store search results X X X Bits Quantity of bits searched 1 256 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Valid values for Bits to designate the quantity of bits searched are 1 through 256 Make sure that the search area designated by S1 plus Bits is within the valid value range If the source data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error
46. 65535 CY 8001 65535 BW 8001 4294967295 FFFFFFFF 0 00000000 0 00000000 Double Word 4294967295 FFFFFFFF 1 BW FFFFFFFF 8589934591 CY FFFFFFFF 4294967295 BW 00000001 4294967296 BW 00000000 4294967294 CY 7FFFFFFE 4294967294 BW 7FFFFFFE 2147483648 CY 00000000 2147483648 BW 00000000 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 0 00000000 0 00000000 Long 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF 2147483647 80000001 2147483647 80000001 2147483648 80000000 2147483648 80000000 2147483649 CY FFFFFFFF 2147483649 BW FFFFFFFF 4294967295 CY 80000001 4294967295 BW 80000001 4 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 TIDEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Floating Point Data Format The SmartAXIS can specify floating point data F for advanced instructions Like double word D and long integer L data floating point data also uses two consecutive data registers to execute advanced instructions The SmartAXIS supports the floating point data based on the single storage format of the IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Standard 754 Single Storage Format The IEEE single storage format consists of three fields a 23 bit fraction f an 8 bit biased exponent e and 1 bit sign s These fields are stored contiguously in one 32 bit word as shown in the figure below Bits 0 22 contain the 23 bit fraction f with bit 0 being the least significant bit of the fraction and bit 22 bei
47. Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note PID instruction can be used with FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA only Valid Devices Device Fucton I QM T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Control registers S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X S3 Source 3 Control relays A S4 Source 4 Set point Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 and S4 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S3 IDE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 1 28 PID INSTRUCTION Settings The PID instruction dialog box has 4 tabs Devices Input Control and Output tab The Devices tab configures the devices used with the PID instruction The Input Control and Output tabs configure the initial values of the parameters for the PID instruction m Devices tab PID PID Control Lo Input _ lt lt _ Control Output PV ATO 0 to 0 Control Mode PID PID Control MV AQO 0 to 10V DC 0 to 1000 SP 200 Devices Input Control Output 1 2 3 4 S1 Control Register S2 InitializationInput S3 Control Relay 54 Set Point Tag Name mo Moo E3 Device Address D0000 10000 000 Comment DeWceAlloon 5 ok Cae Advanced Settings Content Tag Name Specifies the tag name for the device or the device address De
48. Bit Device i TE May UMSETT Configuring the text with effect 6 Select the six column area from the start of the second line and click Text with Effect MSG Message 2 e Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert Word Device M0000 BitDevice Note The text can also be entered directly the LCD screen area In the sample above move cursor to the start of the second line and enter Now with the keyboard When you directly enter the text proceed to Configuring the word device on page 13 12 step 9 The Insert Text with Effect dialog box opens 7 In Text enter Now with the keyboard Under Display Options disable all of the options Insert Text with Effect ER Display Option Scroll Blinking Invert Occupied Area Row x Column 1x6 8 Input Text Directly Special Character Insert Now n DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 11 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS 8 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area Msc Mes
49. D210 05h ceive data byte coun jy Start D200 32 Delimiter M20 OFF Communication port Port 2 Di D2 n M30 D300 Receive completion output M30 Receive status register D300 Const DR Const p i Receive data byte count D301 Receive Format S1 05h D310 0Ah data byte coun Start D300 5 Delimiter OFF 25 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Note If you execute two or more RXD instructions with multi byte start delimiters simultaneously the start delimiters of those RXD instructions must be unique from the others When the length of the multi byte start delimiters of the RXD instructions is different the length of the shortest one is applied to check the duplicated start delimiters The start delimiter of any of two RXD instructions in the following RXD instructions are considered the same RXD 51 01 02 2 16 M20 D400 Const Receive Format S1 01h NL Start Delimiter RXD S1 2 2 16 21 402 Const Const Skip m Receive Format S1 01h 02h G E M Start Delimiter RXD S1 Di D2 2 16 M22 D404 x Const Const Const Const Const Receive Format S1 01h 02h 03h 04h old Start Delimiter Example Using Multi byte Start Delimiter The following example shows the advantages of using a multi byte start delimiter rather than a single byte start delimiter A RXD instruction processes incomin
50. Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data Reset Structural Diagram Forward Shifting Reset First Bit R22 of Bits 6 Reset D Last Bit R22 of Bits 6 I5 Reverse Shifting Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 25 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SOTU and SOTD Single Output Up and Down The SOTU instruction looks for the transition of a given input from off to on The SOTD instruction looks for the transition of a given input from on to off When this transition occurs the desired output will turn on for the length of one scan The SOTU or SOTD instruction converts an input signal to a one shot pulse signal A total of 1024 SOTU and SOTD instructions can be used in a user program If operation is started while the given input is already on the SOTU output will not turn on The transition from off to on is what triggers the SOTU instruction The SOTU or SOTD instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 When a CPU relay is defined as the SOTU or SOTD output it may not operate if the scan time is not compatible with relay requirements Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data
51. W word X When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word or integer data or 2 I integer X points double word long or float data are used D double word X L long X F float X Quantity of Source and Destination Devices Depending on the data type source devices S1 and S2 use a different quantity of devices Source device S3 and destination device D1 always use 1 word without regards to the data type Device W word I integer D double word L long F float S1 52 1 word device 2 word devices S3 D1 1 word device 1 word device I TI DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 23 5 23 FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS Examples NDSRC The following examples demonstrate the NDSRC instruction that searches the data of three different data types Data Word E NDSRC W Si 52 53 Di D10 D100 D10 1234 Search D99 Offset D100 0 D101 1 match Result D200 1 Offset of first match D102 2 D201 2 Quantity of matches D103 3 match D104 4 D105 Data Type Double Word 010 011 12345678 NDSRC D 51 52 53 Di D10 D100 D98 D99 12345678 Offset Search D100 D101 1459997 0 D102 D103 12345678 2 match Result 0200 2 Offset of first match D1
52. WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 ON settings Day of the week E Sunday W Monday F Tuesday ON time hh mm B OFF settings Day of the week E Sunday 1 7 Tuesday V Wednesday time hh mm 2 Bos 8 Preview Week Day V Wednesday V Thursdey V Friday Saturday Z Thursday V Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday C Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program To turn on output QO Tuesday Wednesday and Saturday each week from 20 30 to 1 15 the next day Parameter tab WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 ON settings Day of the week E Sunday Monday 8 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 7 Thursday time hh mm El OFF settings Day of the week Sunday Monday F Tuesday V Wednesday V Thursday OFF time hh mm 8 8 8 Preview Week Day Friday V Saturday E Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program 12 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on output Q0 Monday Wednesday and Friday each week from 6 00 to 9 00 15 00 to 18 00 and 22 00 to 0 00 the next day
53. sao REESE Ie LE Dub c san RR 11 18 CVDT Convert Data iaaiiai gua Sae TERR FANS RR aiaa 11 19 DIDV Data DIVIGG 6a Eee a e ute a ES a Irae 11 21 DTCB Data COMDING EEUU 11 22 SWAP Data SWap 11 23 Week Programmer Instructions WEEK We ekly 12 1 YEAR Yearly Timer Display Instructions MSG MESSAGE 13 1 Program Branching Instructions LABEL Label pm 14 1 mI 14 1 LCAL Label 14 3 LRET Label Return 14 3 DINZ Decrement JUMP 2 5 525 caa a ord a ani hie 14 5 Refresh Instructions TOREF VO Refresh ER 15 1 HSCRF High speed Counter Refresh ra etia n eid nl e ra e c a a 15 3 Interrupt Control Instructions IE or clo S acqnge 16 1 Enable Interrupt E i aaia 16 1 Coordinate C
54. 020 021 032 033 014 015 020 021 034 035 Repeat Source and Destination Devices Data Type Word and Integer When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 ADD W SiR S2R DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 020 25 p30 35 D11 15 021 35 31 50 012 20 022 45 p32 65 e Data Type Double Word Long and Float When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 ADD D Si R S2 R DIR REP 11 D10 D20 030 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 022 023 gt 032 033 014 015 024 025 034 035 Note Special internal relay M8003 carry borrow is turned on when a carry or borrow occurs in the last repeat operation When user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERR LED are turned on and maintained while operations for other instructions continues DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 7 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the MUL Instruction Since the MUL multiplication instruction uses two destination devices the result is store
55. 123456 D2 D3 0001 240 9876543 D4 D5 FreoaBCih 1 0607 00990001h Data Type Float E SUM F Si S2 Di 00 01 12 345 1000101 18 3926 ADD DO 02 03 1 56 04 05 0 9876 06 07 3 5 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 17 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS 8 18 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DEC 9 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Boolean computations use the AND OR and exclusive OR statements as carried out by the ANDW ORW and XORW instructions in the word or double word data respectively ANDW AND Word 1 52 D1 ANDW 51 8 S2 R D1 R REP When input is 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices 51 and S2 are ANDed bit by bit The result is set to destination device D1 51 1110 0 1 52 1000 111 1 1 0 00 01 ORW OR Word 51 52 D1 ORW S1 R S2 R D1 R REP When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and 52 are ORed bit by bit The result is set to destination device D1 5151110 52 0151110 e e e AOT LI Wu
56. 20 021 7 389056 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 22 3 22 LOGARITHM POWER INSTRUCTIONS POW Power H S1 S1 152752 1 gt D1 D1 1 POW F 51 52 D1 When input is on data assigned by source device S1 is raised to the power 52 52 1 assigned by source device S2 and operation result is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data of base X X S2 Source 2 Binary data of exponent X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the operation result is not within the range between 3 402823 1028 and 1 175495 10 or between 1 175495 1038 to 3 402823 x 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the result is 0 For details see Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing on page 4 11 When the operation result is between 1 175495 1038 and 1 175495 1038 the destination device designated by D1 stores 0 When the operation result is less than 3 402823 x 1038 or greater than 3 402823 x 1038 causing an overflow the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus infinity When one
57. 3 010 011 020 021 012 013 022 023 014 015 024 025 8 6 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 _ gt gt 01 Repeat 0 D30 35 D30 40 D30 45 D1 Repeat 0 030 031 030 031 030 031 01 Repeat 3 030 35 031 35 032 35 01 Repeat 3 030 031 032 033 034 035 01 Repeat 0 D30 35 D30 50 D30 65 D1 Repeat 0 D30 D31 030 031 030 031 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Devices Data Type Word and Integer When S1 source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 ADD W SiR 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 D30 35 Dii 15 020 25 31 40 012 20 020 25 D32 45 Data Type Double Word Long and Float When Si source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 ADD D SiR 52 DiR REP 11 D10 D20 030 3 010 011 020 021 gt 030 031 012 013
58. 4 S1 Control Register 52 Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus Tag Name 00000 M0000 C Mmo100 EJ Device Address D0000 0000 M0100 Comment PWM Pulse Width Modulation L9 miS Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Output pulse frequency D0000 50 1 to 1 000 in increments of 1 Hz Pulse width ratio D0001 30 1 to 100 in increments of 1 Pulse counting Disable pulse counting PWM 1 and PWM 2 instructions only Preset value D0002 D0003 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0004 D0005 1to 100 000 000 Error status D0006 OK Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Output pulse frequency 00 50 50 Hz Pulse width ratio D1 30 30 Pulse counting Disable pulse counting Preset value D2 D3 x 19 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS RAMP Trapezoidal Control The RAMP instruction outputs pulses with a frequency change function 51 52 Di When the input is on pulses of the initial pulse frequency specified by S1 are output and then the pulse frequency is increased by a fixed ratio until it reaches the steady pulse frequency After steady pulse output at the steady pulse frequency the pulse frequency is decreased before the pulse count reaches the preset value specified by S1 and then pulse output stops when the preset value is reached 52 Di
59. CMP D SIR 52 Di REP AND D20 D30 M50 3 D20 D21 lt gt D30 D31 Y D22 D23 lt gt 030 031 gt AND M50 D24 D25 030 031 e Data Type Word Repeat Logical Operation AND E Data Type Word Repeat Logical Operation OR E e Data Type Double Word Repeat Logical Operation AND E S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt W SIR S2R Di REP AND D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 lt gt D20 0 now D11 20 lt gt 021 20 AND M10 012 30 lt gt 022 100 eu S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt W SIR S2R Di REP OR D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 lt gt 020 0 3 Dii 20 lt gt 021 20 OR M10 012 30 lt gt 022 100 ET S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt D SIR S2R Di REP AND D20 D30 M50 3 020 0211 gt 030 031 y D22D23 gt D32 D33 gt AND gt M50 D24 D25 gt 34 035 8 7 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Devices When S1 S2 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat source devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the device
60. D of W Source 2 D of W 10 5 5 D8012 quoi D100 uou D204 our 20 15 5 08013 minute 0101 Minute gt 0205 minute 30 25 5 D8014 Second D102 Second D206 Second Note D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to D203 of destination 1 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 7 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS 24 8 When the result is less than 00 00 00 24 is added to the result and the day data is decremented D8008 D8009 D8010 D8011 D8012 D8013 D8014 Source 1 7 Year 8 Month 23 Day 4 D of W 20 Hour 30 Minute 40 Second Note D100 0101 0102 Source 2 30 Hour 40 Minute 50 Second Destination 1 D200 D201 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 7 Year 8 Month 22 Day 3 D of W 13 Hour 49 Minute 50 Second Note D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to D203 of destination 1 SMARTAXIS
61. Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Step 2 Function DR Setting Description Steady pulse frequency D0014 1 1to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Frequency change time D0015 4000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0016 D0017 4000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0018 Acceleration deceleration control 00018 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0019 0 0 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency 014 1 1 Hz Frequency change time D15 4000 4 000 ms Preset value D16 D17 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D18 Timing of change D18 Acceleration deceleration later After Next step number D19 0 O End output This section describes an example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function single pulse output reversible control enabled using the following settings The pulses are output from Q14 100 kHz Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Preset value 5 000 Preset value 5 000 qpessEemeeete 49e Frequency Frequency change time change time 3 000 ms 3 000 ms 200 Hz pese te peme tEDRRBI secs Frequency Frequency 1 change time change time 3 000 ms 3 000 ms i dkHz a a a
62. End of month Specify the end of month to turn on the output on the last day of the month 4 OFF settings This section configures the date to turn off the output The output is turned off at 0 00 on the configured date Setting Description Range Year Specifies the year to turn off the output 2000 to 2099 Month Specifies the month to turn off the output 1to12 Day Specifies the day to turn off the output 1to31 oe Specifies the day as the day of the week to turn on the output Specify the week in Setting Day of the week 1to6 the range of the 1st to the 5th or the last week and set the day of the week End of month Specify the end of month to turn off the output on the last day of the month This item specifies whether or not to turn off the output after the number of Specify ON duration specified days from when it was turned on 1 to 30 If this setting is enabled the OFF settings are disabled This setting can be set in a range from 1 day to 30 days Note When the date is duplicated in the settings on other tabs the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid For example if the ON date is the 8th of every month and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 16th of every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 2 tab the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the two tabs and the ON settings for the P 2 tab are valid In this situation the output is
63. POWER INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes logarithm and power instructions which are used to calculate logarithm or powered values of source devices LOGE Natural Logarithm H Applicable SmartAXIS log 5151 1 gt 0101 1 LOGE F Si Di When input is on the natural logarithm of the binary data assigned by source device S1 is stored to destination assigned by device D1 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert into natural logarithm X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the operation result is not within the range between 3 402823 1028 and 1 175495 10 9 or between 1 175495 10738 and 3 402823 x 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the result is 0 For details see Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing on page 4 11 When the value of S1 source 1 is 0 a user program execution error occurs When the value of S1 source 1 is less than 0 a user program execution error occurs When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error occurs and the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of
64. PWM pulse width modulation RAMP ramp control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions so that they do not share the same pulse output port However the ZRN zero return instruction can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP ramp control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions Note The ARAMP instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A H40RC and FT1A B40RC Valid Devices Device Function L QM T D Constant Repeat Si Soucel Controlregistr S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X S3 Source 3 Interrupt input X X D1 Destination 1 Monitor register A D2 Destination 2 Operation status Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 19 32 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Settings
65. Parameter tab Configure the settings using three tabs On P 1 tab configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 6 00 to 9 00 WEEK Weekly Timer aw Devices P1 P2 _ ON settings Day of the week time hh mm LE b EB OFF settings Day of the week OFF time hh mm CE Preview Week Day Ji E Sunday V Monday F Tuesday V Wednesday F Thursday E Sunday P Monday Tuesday V Wednesday F Thursday Friday Saturday Friday Saturday Ui Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday WEEK Weekly Timer EN Dewes ei es ON settings Day of the week E Sunday V Mondey F Tuesday ON time hh mm LHe OFF settings Day of the week El Sunday Monday F Tuesday OFF time hh mm H p Preview Week Day Ai Wednesday F Thursday 7 Friday Saturday V Wednesday Thursday g Friday Saturday OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Cancel On P 2 tab configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 15 00 to 18 00 On P 3 tab configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 22 00 to 0 00 the next day WEEK Weekly Timer ENT Devices Pi
66. Steady pulse frequency Steady pulse Step 12 Frequency Interrupt input ON change time An external input IO to 135 or internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified as the interrupt input An interrupt is used to read the interrupt input The interrupt input can be read without being affected by the user program scan I1 14 I10 to 135 The information updated in the END processing is read as the interrupt input to M1277 It is affected by the user program scan High speed 10 I2 13 15 16 17 Normal Notes e Do not use the same input or internal relay as the interrupt input signal for the ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 instructions e use the high speed interrupt input signal set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Input on Function Area Settings Do not use the input as interrupt input catch input high speed counter or frequency measurement e When using the high speed interrupt input ensure that no chatter noise occurs in the interrupt input e When the interrupt input is turned on the control direction forward or reverse is unchanged regardless of the control direction of the interrupted step 19 34 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 5 D1 destination 1 Monitor register D1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with ARAMP1 2 Starting from the specified number 9 consecutive 16 bit data registers are
67. Teaching Timer 4 4 Valid Data Type Symbol Name See Page W I D HTOB Hex to BCD X X 11 1 BTOH BCD to Hex X X 11 3 HTOA Hex to ASCII X 11 5 ATOH ASCII to Hex X 11 7 BTOA BCD to ASCII X X 11 9 ATOB ASCII to BCD X X 11 12 ENCO Encode 11 15 DECO Decode 11 16 BCNT Bit Count 11 17 ALT Alternate Output 11 18 CVDT Convert Data Type 11 19 DTDV Data Divide X 11 21 DTCB Data Combine X 11 22 SWAP Data Swap X X 11 23 WEEK Weekly Timer 12 1 YEAR Yearly Timer 12 11 MSG Message 13 1 TXD2 Transmit 2 25 1 TXD3 Transmit 3 25 1 RXD2 Receive 2 25 7 RXD3 Receive 3 25 7 LABEL Label 14 1 LJMP Label Jump 14 1 LCAL Label Call 14 3 LRET Label Return 14 3 DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero 14 5 DI Disable Interrupt 16 1 EI Enable Interrupt 16 1 IOREF I O Refresh 15 1 HSCRF High speed Counter Refresh 15 3 XYFS XY Format Set X X 17 1 CVXTY Convert X to Y XX 17 2 CVYTX Convert Y to X XIX 17 3 AVRG Average 18 1 PULS1 Pulse Output 1 19 1 PULS2 Pulse Output 2 19 1 PULS3 Pulse Output 3 19 1 PULSA Pulse Output 4 19 1 PWM1 Pulse Width Modulation 1 19 8 PWM2 Pulse Width Modulation 2 19 8 PWM3 Pulse Width Modulation 3 19 8 PWM4 Pulse Width Modulation 4 19 8 RAMP1 Ramp Pulse Output 1 19 15 RAMP2 Ramp Pulse Output 2 19 15 ZRN1 Zero Return 1 19 26 ZRN2 Zero Return 2 19 26 ARAMP
68. The NOP instruction does not require an input and device Details of the other advanced instructions are described in the following chapters 4 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes programming of the basic instructions available devices and sample programs All basic instructions are available on all SmartAXIS LOD Load and LODN Load Not The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with a NO normally open contact The LODN instruction starts the logical operation with a NC normally closed contact A total of eight LOD and or LODN instructions can be programmed consecutively Ladder Diagram Valid Devices Instruction I Q M T R D m 0 35 0 21 LOD 40 75 40 61 0 1277 0 0 1999 15 0 199 0 199 0 127 LODN 80 115 80 101 8000 8177 8000 0 8199 15 120 155 120 141 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Data registers can be used as bit devices with the data register number and the bit position separated by a period OUT Output and OUTN Output Not The OUT instruction outputs the result of bit logical operation to the specified device The OUTN instruction outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation to the specified device Ladder Diagram Devices Instruction I Q M T R D 0 21 OUT 40 61 0 1277 0 0 1999 15 OUTN 80 101 8
69. destination 1 is unchanged For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Examples TTIM When input IO is turned on TTIM resets data register D100 to zero and starts to store the ON duration of H TTIM Di input 10 to data register D100 measured in units of 100 ms D100 n When input IO is turned off TTIM stops the measurement and data register D100 maintains the measured value of the ON duration ON w LT 1500 ms D100 Value 0 15 The following example demonstrates a program to measure the ON duration of input 10 and to use the ON duration as a preset value for 100 ms timer instruction TIM When input I1 is turned on 100 ms timer TO starts to operate with a preset value stored in data register DO While input IO is on TTIM measures the ON duration of input IO and stores the measured value in units of 100 ms to data register D100 When input IO is turned off MOV W stores the D100 value to data register MOV W 51 Di REP DO as a preset value for timer TO D100 DO IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 20 3 20 DUAL TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS 20 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Trigonometric function instructions are used for conversion between radian and degree values conversion from radian value to sine cosin
70. gt 032 033 014 015 020 021 034 035 Repeat Source and Destination Devices When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 MUL W Si R S2 R DIR REP I D10 D20 D30 3 D10 020 3 030 031 D11 021 gt D32 D33 012 022 3 034 035 Data Type Double Word Long and Float H MULD IR IR BER REP S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 11 D10 D20 030 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 022 023 2 032 033 014 015 024 025 gt 034 035 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 9 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the DIV Instruction Since the DIV division instruction except float data uses two destination devices the quotient and remainder are stored as described below Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination When destination device D1 is not assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 quotient and 01 1 remainder When repeat is assigned assigned as many consecutive devices as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used Division instructions in float data do not generate remainders and use two consecutive data registers to store quotients When repeat is assigned for destination of float
71. on page 7 6 M8152 Comparison Result 3 When the CMP instruction is used M8152 is turned on when the value of device designated by S1 is less than that of device designated by S2 S1 S2 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in CMP on page 7 2 When the ICMP gt instruction is used M8152 is turned on when the value of device designated by S2 is less than that of device designated by S1 and greater than that of device designated by S3 S1 S2 S3 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in ICMP gt on page 7 6 M8154 Write Data Register values to ROM This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup When M8154 is on at the end of scan the values of all data registers are written to ROM After writing values the execution status is stored in D8133 and M8154 turns off For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8155 Read Data Register values from ROM This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup When M8155 turns on at the end of scan the values in the corresponding ROM are read and stored in the data registers specified by D8184 start address to read and D8185 number of DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 7 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES registers to read After reading values the execution status is stored in D8133 and M8155 turns off For details see Chapter 5 Spe
72. 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 8 Preset value on page 19 4 Starting number 3 value 9 low word Note Current value Starting number 4 high word Note 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 9 Current value on page 19 4 Starting number 5 Current value g low word Note Starting number 6 Error status 0104 10 Error status on page 19 4 Note The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32 bit data storage method specified For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 19 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input S2 specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR PULS instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers An external input 10 to 135 Note or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To only initialize the values one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU single output up instruction or the SOTD single output down instruction Note For the 40 I O type external inputs IO to I27 can be used 4 D1 destination 1 Operation status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with PULS instructions Starting from the
73. 1234h Quantity of Digits 3 Binary HTOA W S1 4660 n D10 D10 134p Quantity of Digits 2 Binary HTOA W S1 4660 12 D10 1234h e Quantity of Digits 1 Binary HTOA W S1 5 4660 B D10 1234h 11 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D20 ASCIT 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCIT 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCIT 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCIT 52 0034h IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ATOH ASCII to Hex H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 gt D1 ATOHW S1 S2 Di When input is on the ASCII data assigned by 51 is converted into 16 bit binary data The number of times is determined by the quantity of digits assigned by S2 The data is then stored to the destination assigned by device D1 Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 ASCII data to convert
74. 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Linear Conversion The following example demonstrates setting up two coordinate points to define the linear relationship between X and Y The two points are YO 0 0 and X1 Y1 8000 4000 Once these are set there is an X to Y conversion as well as a Y to X conversion M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay XYFS I 51 YO X1 Yi 0 0 8000 4000 At startup XYFS specifies two points When input IO is on CVXTY converts the value in D10 and stores CVXTY T Si 52 D1 the result in D20 0 D10 D20 When input I1 is on CVYTX converts the value in D11 and stores CVYTX T S1 the result in D21 0 The graph shows the linear relationship that is defined by the two points X X1 Y1 1 Y X 2 D11 2500 If the value in data register D10 is 2000 the value assigned to D20 is 1000 D20 1000 For Y to X conversion the following equation is used 0 X 2Y X0 YO D10 D21 8000 X If the value in data register D11 is 2500 the value assigned to D21 2000 5000 is 5000 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 17 5 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Overlapping Coordinates In this example the XYFS instruction sets up three coordinate points which define two different linear relationships between X and Y The three points are YO 0 100 X1 Y1 100 0 and X2 Y2 300 100 The two line segment
75. 17 4 instructions 11 1 divide 11 21 input 5 22 movement timer counter preset value 5 77 swap 411 23 type 4 9 types for advanced instructions 4 10 data register comparison instructions 5 20 double word data move 6 2 DC and DC gt instructions 5 20 DEC 8 13 decimal values and hexadecimal storage 4 10 DECO 11 16 decode 11 16 decrement 8 13 jump non zero 14 5 default gateway D8092 D8095 3 13 DEG 21 2 degree 21 2 delimiter 25 10 destination device 4 9 device addresses 3 1 areas discontinuity 4 14 DI 16 1 disable interrupt 16 1 discontinuity of device areas 4 14 INDEX DIV 8 1 division 8 1 DINZ 14 5 double word adding counter CNTD 5 14 counter 5 14 data move in data registers 6 2 dual pulse reversible counter CDPD 5 15 up down selection reversible counter CUDD 5 16 download program 1 7 DSR input control signal option 3 14 DTCB 11 22 DTDV 11 21 DTIM 20 1 DTMH 20 1 DTML 20 1 DTMS 20 1 DTR output control signal option 3 14 dual teaching timer instructions 20 1 dual pulse reversible counter 5 12 edit user program 1 4 EI 16 1 enable interrupt 16 1 ENCO 11 15 encode 11 15 END instruction 5 30 processing time breakdown 4 5 end delimiter 25 14 exchange 6 15 exclusive OR word 9 7 execution times for instructions A Z EXP 22 3 expansion data register data writing flag M8027 3 6 status M8026 3 6 exponent 22 3 FIEX 23 3 FIFO format 23 1 FIFOF 23 1 file data processing instructions 23 1
76. Cartridges Enable ladder program editing monitoring on FTIA Device Settings Program Protection Message Settings Self Diagnostic Character Set 1 European 150 8859 1 Latin 1 Calendar amp Clock Scroll Unit 2 character Network Settings Scroll Speed 3 soo ms Connection Settings Blink Speed 4 500 Default Cancel 1 Character Set The character set used for the messages can be configured from the following Selection Character Set Languages usable in the MSG instruction European ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Italian English Dutch Spanish German French Japanese Shift JIS Japanese Chinese GB2312 Chinese simplified Cyrillic ANSI 1251 Russian 2 Scroll Unit The unit to scroll the texts can be configured 1 character Scrolls the text in 1 character units 1 dot Scrolls the text in 1 dot units 3 Scroll Speed The speed to scroll the texts can be configured The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms 4 Blinking Speed The speed to blink the texts can be configured The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms Note The MSG instruction character set can be configured irrespective of the SmartAXIS system menu language 13 8 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE e 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS MSG Instruction Configuration Example Display the room temperature when M0000 is and the outdoor temperature when M0000 is off
77. Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then Online gt Custom gt New Custom Monitor To change a counter preset value select DEC D in the pull down list box When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately When power is off the changed preset values are cleared and the original preset values are loaded For data movement when changing confirming and clearing preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices The CNPD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 15 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CUDD Double Word Up Down Selection Reversible Counter The double word up down selection reversible counter CUDD
78. Errors on page 4 13 Since the RAD instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example RAD When input I1 is turned on the degree value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by H source device S1 is converted into a radian value and stored to data registers D20 and 11 D21 assigned by destination device D1 270 x 1 180 4 712389 rad RAD F Si Di D10 D20 S1 Di 010 011 270 0 20 021 4 712389 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 21 1 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS DEG Radian to Degree H 51 51 1 rad 180 1 gt 01 01 1 DEG F 51 Di When input is on the radian value assigned by source device S1 is converted into a degree value and stored to destination assigned by device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Radian value to convert into degree X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device
79. Every scan 3 16 D8156 Analog Input AI17 Every scan 3 16 D8157 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 16 D8158 Analog Input AI20 Every scan 3 16 D8159 Analog Input AI21 Every scan 3 16 D8160 Analog Input AI22 Every scan 3 16 4 Remote 1 0 D8161 Slave 2 Analog Input AI23 Every scan 3 16 D8162 Analog Input AI24 Every scan 3 16 D8163 Analog Input AI25 Every scan 3 16 D8164 Analog Input AI26 Every scan 3 16 D8165 Analog Input AI27 Every scan 3 16 D8166 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 16 D8167 Analog Input AI30 Every scan 3 16 D8168 Analog Input AI31 Every scan 3 16 D8169 Analog Input AI32 Every scan 3 16 2 Remote I O D8170 Slave 3 Analog Input AI33 Every scan 3 16 D8171 Analog Input AI34 Every scan 3 16 D8172 Analog Input AI35 Every scan 3 16 D8173 Analog Input AI36 Every scan 3 16 D8174 Analog Input AI37 Every scan 3 16 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 11 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device Address Description Updated See Page D8175 D8183 Reserved D8184 Data Register Start Address to Read 3 16 D8185 ROM Backup Number of Registers to Read 3 16 D8186 D8199 Reserved D8000 Quantity of Inputs The total of input points provided on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8000 D8001 Quantity of Outputs The total of output points provided on the SmartAXIS
80. FT1A H12RA FT1A B12RA FT1A H12RC FT1A B12RC FT1A 24 FT1A H24RA FT1A B24RA FT1A H24RC FT1A B24RC Ladder FBD FT1A 40 FT1A H40RKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A H40RC FT1A B40RC If the Use as Default button is pressed then the same PLC will be selected as default when WindLDR is started next time FT1A 48 FT1A Touch 2 Select a PLC type in the selection box select Ladder as the programming language 3 Click OK 1 2 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A M12RA W FT1A M12RA B FT1A M12RA S FT1A C12RA W FT1A C12RA B FT1A C12RA S FT1A M14KA W FT1A M14KA B FT1A M14KA S FT1A C14KA W FT1A C14KA B FT1A C14KA S FT1A M14SA W FT1A M14SA B FT1A M14SA S FT1A C14SA W FT1A C14SA B FT1A C14SA S Nipec Create Ladder Program This section describes the procedure for creating a simple ladder program in WindLDR Note See Instructions Reference on page 4 1 for details on basic and advanced instructions Sample User Program Create a sample program using WindLDR that performs the following operation When only input IO is turned on output 0 is turned on When only input I1 is turned on output Q1 is turned on When both inputs IO and I1 are turned on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments 1 OPERATION BASICS Rung No Input IO
81. Frequency Increase ratio Frequency increase and decrease ratios are the same Steady pulse frequency i Initial pulse ___ frequency i 1 Frequency increase time area Preset value Frequency increase and decrease times are the same Note Configure multiple PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP trapezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions so that they do not share the same pulse output port However the ZRN zero return instruction can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP trapezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions Note The RAMP instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A BAORC Valid Devices Device fFuncton L Q T C D Constant Repet 61 Commirgser A S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X D1 Destination 1 Operation status A Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 Internal relays thr
82. Long and Float S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 MUL D Si 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 010 011 020 021 D32 D33 010 011 020 021 034 035 Repeat Two Source Devices When S1 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device 01 01 1 e Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 MUL W Si R S2 R Di REP H D10 D20 D30 3 D10 x D20 gt 030 031 Dii 021 030 031 012 022 030 031 Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 MUL D SIR S2R Di REP 11 D10 D20 030 3 010 011 020 021 lt gt 030 031 012 013 022 023 gt 030 031 014 015 024 025 LI 030 031 8 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Devices When Si source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 D1 1 e Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 MUL W Si R 52 DIR REP H D10 D20 D30 3 D10 020 35 030 031 Dii 020 gt 032 033 012 020 034 035 Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 MUL D Si R 52 DiR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 020 021
83. Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data or D1 2N 2 double word long or float data is within the valid device range If the derived destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X or destination 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long X 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used F float X Example NSET F E Five constants 0 51 2 34 7 89 3 33 and 10 0 D20 through D29 NSET F 51 52 53 54 55 Di 0 51 2 34 7 89 3 33 10 0 D20 When input IO is turned on 5 constants assigned by source devices S1 through S5 are moved to 10 data registers starting with D20 assigned by destination device D1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 0 51 2 34 7 89 3 33 gt 10 0 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 0 51
84. SET RST TML TIM TMH TMS TMLO TIMO TMHO TMSO CNT CDP CUD CNTD CDPD CUDD SFR SFRN SOTU SOTD When converting the ladder program an error message is shown such as TIM follows an invalid device Conversion fails to create mnemonics and the program is not downloaded to the SmartAXIS Prohibited Instructions Error Detection Modifying Prohibited Ladder Programs Intended operation can be performed by modifying the prohibited ladder program as shown in the examples below Prohibited Ladder Program 1 Modified Ladder Program 1 TIM TO O TIM TO MO Mi 100 Qo MO Mi 100 Q M2 MO TO QO M2 Prohibited Ladder Program 2 Modified Ladder Program 2 MO DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 31 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 5 32 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data can be moved using the MOV move MOVN move not IMOV indirect move or IMOVN indirect move not instruction The moved data is 16 or 32 bit data and the repeat operation can also be used to increase the quantity of data moved In the MOV or MOVN instruction the source and destination device are designated by S1 and D1 directly In the IMOV or IMOVN instruction the source and destination device are determined by the offset values designated by S2 and D2 added to source device S1 and destination device D1 The BMOV block move instruction is useful t
85. Select the display type for the specified device The size of the area used on the LCD screen varies based on the specified data type and conversion type Data Type Conversion Type Occupied Area Example on LCD Decimal 5 65535 W word Hexadecimal 4 FFFF I integer Decimal 6 32768 Decimal 10 4294967295 D double word Hexadecimal 8 FFFFFFFF L long Decimal 11 2147483648 F float Decimal 13 3 402823 38 3 Display Options Configure the options to blink or invert the value of the specified device For the blinking speed see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 Display Options Description Blinking Blinks the value of the specified device Invert Inverts the display of the specified value 4 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 4 to 13 The area is determined by the selected data type and conversion type 13 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Insert Bit Device Two different items of text can be switched between and displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD according to the value of the specified bit device when on when off Insert Bit Device 9 1 Device 2 Display Option Blinking E Invert 3 Occupied Area Row x Column 1 x 24 6 7 Special Character Insert 4 ONTex
86. The ON OFF statuses of the 16 internal relays M10 through M17 LSB ang M20 through M27 are inverted and moved to 16 internal Before inversion Ololilillolololollolo 1 1 1 0 0 1 M27 M10 MSB relays M50 through M57 and M60 through M67 M50 is the LSB LSB least significant bit and M67 is the MSB most significant bit After inversion ililolol aT Si 810 Di D2 MOVN W REP M67 M50 E 810 NOT gt D2 When input I1 is on decimal constant 810 assigned by source device S1 is converted into 16 bit binary data and the ON OFF statuses of the 16 bits are inverted and moved to data register D2 assigned by destination device D1 Before inversion 810 0 0 0 0 0 After inversion 64725 1111111 MSB 51 LSB 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DO MSB Di LSB pr 110 1 1 10 1 1 1011 D2 64725 810 030 gt 020 D20 64605 Si D30 Di D20 REP MOVN W SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 When input I2 is on the data in data register D30 pcm assigned by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to data T 1 register D20 assigned by D1 0301 930 6 5 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOV Indirect Move H
87. The room temperature outdoor temperature value is stored in D0002 IDEC room temp is Bar graph is used to Show the rise and fall in temperature visually Displays the current date uSettings Configure the following items 1 Bit Device 2 Text with Effects 3 Word Device IDEC outdoor temp is Now 5 T SS e 4 Special Character 2 5 Bar Graph 6 Special Data Setting items Setting details Device M0000 Display Options All disabled scroll blink invert 1 Bit Device ON Text IDEC room temp is OFF Text IDEC outdoor temp is Text Now 2 Text with Effects Display Options All disabled scroll blink invert Device D0002 3 Word Device Data Type I integer Conversion Type Decimal 4 Special Character Device D0002 Data Type I integer Max 50 5 Bar Graph Min 20 Origin 0 Blinking Settings Disabled 6 Special Data Current date IDE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 9 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Operation Procedure 1 On WindLDR right click menu click Advanced Instructions gt Display gt MSG Message 2 The MSG Message dialog box opens Configuring the bit device 3 Select the area to insert the parameter and click Bit Device MSG Message 9 Options m Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display S
88. This setting specifies the frequency at the steady output state before or after changing the frequency For mode 0 set this value in the range of 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz For mode 1 set this value in the range of 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 14 Frequency change time This setting specifies the time to change the pulses Set this value in the range of 10 to 10 000 increments of 10 ms The first digit of the setting is discarded 15 Preset value This setting configures the number of pulses to output from 1 to 100 000 000 16 Step options This setting configures the step direction and the execution timing of the change in the pulses Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LLLLLLLLLLLLIL Sg Timing of change Step direction 0 Before 0 Forward 1 After 1 Reverse The frequency changes as shown in the following diagram according to the setting for the execution timing of the change In the Before column the frequency changes and then becomes steady When the number of pulses in the preset value is output the instruction transitions to the next step In the After column the steady pulse frequency is maintained then the frequency changes and the instruction transitions to the next step um 17 Next step number Increase Decrease This setting specifies the number of the next step to be executed after the output for the currently executed step is completed 19 38 SMARTAXIS LADDER P
89. WINDLDR 8 Power Line s Port Monitor US Cance f Initialize Forced 1 0 Set Up Rung 2 2 10000 10001 Q0001 Rung 3 3 10000 10001 M0010 4 M0010 M8121 Q0002 To change an input status place the mouse pointer on the input and right click the mouse In the pop up menu select Set or Reset to set or reset the input To quit simulation from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Simulation Download Program You can download the user program from WindLDR running on a computer to the SmartAXIS User programs can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS from WindLDR using USB or Ethernet This section describes the procedure from configuring communication settings to downloading a user program to the SmartAXIS via USB To use USB the SmartAXIS USB port must be connected to a computer using a USB cable Windows computer USB cable USB port HG9Z XCM42 USB maintenance cable q jl asta Type A plug Mini B plug USB 2 0 Mini B connector Note In order for WindLDR to communicate with the SmartAXIS via USB a dedicated USB driver must be installed on the computer See the Appendix of the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual for driver installation procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Set Up 2 The Communication Settings dialog box appears Click the USB tab and then click OK
90. and the converted data is stored to as many consecutive data registers as repeat cycles Example Received data of 6 bytes is divided into 2 digit blocks converted in ASCII to Binary and stored to data registers starting at D20 1 Repeat cycles 2 v 31h 32h 33h 34h 2 digits 2 digits 1st block 2nd block ASCII to Binary conversion gt 0201 0012h Repeat 1 gt 0211 0034h Repeat 2 2 Repeat cycles 3 1 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits 1st block 2nd block 3rd block ASCII to Binary conversion gt 0201 0012h Repeat 1 gt 0211 0034h Repeat 2 gt 022 0056h Repeat 3 Delimiter A delimiter for the data register in the receive format can be assigned Using a delimiter incoming data of variable length can be received and stored to data registers How the incoming data is stored to data registers The incoming data is stored to data registers until all the data specified with receive digits conversion type and repeat is processed or the specified delimiter is received The incoming data is stored to data registers until all the data specified with receive digits conversion type and repeat is processed Delimiter Designated No delimiter
91. configure monitor circuits outside the SmartAXIS The SmartAXIS self diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors stop programs and turn outputs off Configure circuits so that the system containing the SmartAXIS is not jeopardized when outputs turn off Turn off power to the SmartAXIS before installation removal wiring maintenance and inspection of the SmartAXIS Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the SmartAXIS People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS e Install the SmartAXIS according to the instructions described in SmartAXIS Pro Lite user s manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the SmartAXIS The SmartAXIS is designed for installation in a cabinet Do not install the SmartAXIS outside a cabinet e Install the SmartAXIS in environments described in SmartAXIS Pro Lite user s manual If the SmartAXIS is used in places where the SmartAXIS is subjected to high temperature high humidity condensation corrosive gases excessive vibrations and excessive shocks then electrical shocks fire hazard or malfunction will result The environment for using the SmartAXIS is Pollution degree 2 Use the SmartAXIS in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 e While moving or transporting prevent the SmartAXIS from falling othe
92. is displayed this button displays the device with 1 subtracted from the currently Press displayed device number J This operates until the repeat count displayed in REP is 01 If there is no repeat designation is displayed nothing happens Press and hold Repeats the press operation Press If there is a displayed item above the current screen the screen moves up once Press and hold Repeats the press operation Press If there is a displayed item below the current screen the screen moves down once Press and hold Repeats the press operation 2 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDE 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS Ladder Program Monitor This function displays the ladder program on the LCD along with execution states This enables you to visually understand the states of the ladder program Displayed Contents Display example Note The LCD resolution number of pixels differs between the SmartAXIS Pro and the SmartAXIS Touch but the content of the ladder program display screen is the same excluding the display area for the SmartAXIS Touch operation buttons This chapter describes the operations using the LCD display on the SmartAXIS Pro When using the SmartAXIS Touch read this manual taking into consideration that the operation Button display area is omitted Five symbols horizontally and two symbols vertically are
93. see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 24 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC Examples TADD 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS The following examples demonstrate the TADD instruction that will add time data in two different modes ModeO E 52 D10 Di D20 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 BB Te ote BI ance Dil finis Dai ee D2 Diz ich D22 When the result exceeds 23 59 59 the resultant hour data is subtracted by 24 turning on special internal relay M8003 carry Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 po ieu D19 did Tm Di Minus Dat ms D2 T Die Tem D22 m 1 D8008 52 0100 Di D200 Source 1 Destination 1 D8008 TE D200 hs D8009 D201 D8010 D202 oa D8011 4 Note p203 4 D of W Source 2 D of W D8012 Houn D100 S D204 D8013 OS D205 Mae D8014 0102 D206 Send Note D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does no
94. 0 01 increments When the output manipulated variable limit is Output manipulated variable upper limit lower limit the manual mode output manipulated variable must be set between output manipulated variable lower limit value and output manipulated variable upper limit value 9 Output MV Rate of Change 51 16 Set the output manipulated variable to change in a second When the output manipulated variable rate of change is 0 second this function is disabled When the difference between the set point and process variable is large the normal output switches from off to on as shown in the diagram on the next page but by setting the output manipulated variable rate of change the rate of change for the output manipulated variable can be changed as shown in the diagram on the next page The output manipulated variable rate of change can be set from 0 to 100 second in 1 increments 28 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ET IDEC 28 PID INSTRUCTION Normal output Output when the output manipulated variable rate of change is set 100 5 2096 s E Lex OFF 1 sec 5 sec 10 sec This function is suitable for the control of high temperature heaters elements composed of molybdenum tungsten platinum used at approximately 1500 to 1800 C that burn out when rapidly energized 10 Proportional Band Offset S1 20 The proportional band can be shifted by the value set as the proportional band offset For exampl
95. 1 F 4 F 4 E IEH I EL MAN I Esc ESO M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 M0005 0006 M0007 M0010 00001 If you select Last Monitored Line the 008 2 moia moois pom ladder logic program monitor can be amp restarted from the previously monitored OK 00005 10001 90004 line onol 00007 Last Monitored Line Go To x a Go To 0000f 65535 Md mc Esc Esd If you select Go To and specify a ladder logic program monitor line the ladder logic program is displayed with the specified line at the beginning Notes The previously monitored line default setting is the ist line e The previously monitored line is reset to the default setting at the times listed below e The SmartAXIS Pro power is turned on again user program is downloading to the SmartAXIS Pro 2 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS Moving the Cursor 1 Press the right button once The cursor moves column to the right 10000 1 SOTU 1 Q0000 I IA 1 1 1 M0003 M0004 0005 0006 M0007 0010 M0011 00001 M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 001 0014 0015 90002 00004 C0000 Q0003 00005 100
96. 1 point word data or 2 I integer points double word or float data are used D double word X L long F float X Examples ROOT Before Execution After Execution ROOT W 51 Di 10 m D10 020 010 55 9 020 741 J55 7 4161 ROOT D S1 D1 D11 D12 4294967295 21 22 6553599 D11 D21 44294967295 65535 99999 013 014 20 738916 23 024 4 554 ROOT F Si Di D13 D23 20 738916 4 554 8 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS SUM Sum H Calculates the total of assigned data depending on the calculation option ADD When input is on N blocks of 16 or 32 bit data starting at device assigned by S1 are added together and the result is stored to the device assigned by D1 S2 specifies the quantity of data blocks XOR When input is on N blocks of 16 bit data starting at the device assigned by S1 are XORed and the result is stored to the device assigned by D1 S2 specifies the quantity of SUM S1 52 Di ADD XOR 0 data blocks Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to calculate c
97. 1 tab is disabled In this situation the output is on from 8 00 to 10 00 Time P 1 tab settings ON P 2 tab settings ON time EN 10 00 11 00 ON Output 01 OFF peg If ON time is 9 00 and OFF time is 10 00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 8 00 and OFF time is 9 00 on the P 2 tab the 9 00 setting is duplicated on the two tabs and ON time for the P 1 tab is disabled In this situation the output is on from 8 00 to 9 00 Preview WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 settings Day of the week ON time hh mm OFF settings Day of the week Sunday Monday OFF time hh mm i BB Pp H Preview Week Day Sunday V Monday Tuesday y Tuesday b 4 40 Wednesday F Thursday Friday Saturday Wednesday F Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday The preview can be shown as a week or a day The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart Setting Description Week Select this radio button when showing the preview as a week Day Select this radio button when showing the preview as a day 12 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings
98. 1 to 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Reversible control enable Single pulse output The number of steps 4 Start number 1 Step 1 Interrupt number DO Step 1 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table epi Function DR Setting Description Steady pulse frequency D0002 100 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0003 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00004 D0005 5000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00006 Forward Acceleration deceleration contral D0006 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0007 2 0 to 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D2 100 1 kHz Frequency change time D3 3000 3 000 ms Preset value D4 D5 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D6 Forward Forward 0 Timing of change D6 Acceleration deceleration later After 2 Next step number D7 2 Step 2 19 46 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Step 2 settings 19 PuLsE OuTPUT INSTRUCTIONS f ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table eax Devices Settings Ramp Table n 1 Function DR Setting Description ISteady pulse frequency 00008 20 20 to 10 000 in increments
99. 10 kHz increments of 1 Hz Note PULS1 PULS2 1 Hz to 5 kHz increments of 1 Hz Note PULS3 PULS4 Supported instruction 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz increments of 10 Hz Note Note The output frequency error is within 5 6 Output pulse frequency PULS1 PULS2 Mode 0 Set between 1 Hz and 10 kHz in increments of 1 Hz The output frequency error is 3 596 Mode 1 Set between 200 Hz and 100 kHz in increments of 10 Hz The output frequency error is 5 PULS3 PULS4 Set between 1 Hz and 5 kHz in increments of 1 Hz The output frequency error is 5 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 3 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 7 Pulse counting This setting enables or disables pulse counting Supported instruction Pulse counting Pulses are continuously output while the input is on The number of pulses specified by the X X preset value are output 0 Disable pulse counting 1 Enable pulse counting 8 Preset value When counting pulses this setting specifies the number of pulses to output 9 Current value The number of pulses that were output is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the PULS instruction is executed at each scan 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the PULS instruction input changes from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and this register is set to the error code Error code Sta
100. 2 ON settings Day of the week Sunday V Mondey F Tuesday ON time hh mm 2 OFF settings Day of the week E Sunday Monday Tuesday OFF time hh mm 4 pb Preview Week Day V Wednesday 7 Thursday g Wednesday 7 Thursday Friday Saturday Friday Saturday OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Configure the tabs as shown above and set to 00 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 9 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Ladder program M8125 To indirectly specify the settings with data registers This example describes turning on output M100 Monday to Friday each week from 8 30 to 17 15 as an example Select the Data register settings check box and set S1 to DO and S2 to MO WEEK Weekly Timer WEEK Weekly Timer Devices p1 Devices P1 ON settings V Data register settings Day of the week 51 First DR 52 Initialization Input D1 Output Sunday Monday 9 Tuesday 9 Wednesday 7 Thursday 2 Friday Saturday Tag Name poooo E gt Device Address 3 008 voi00 D0000 D0002 E E Comment OFF settings Day of the week Sunday V Monday 7 Tuesday 2 Wednesday V Thursday J Friday E Saturday OFF time hh mm 7 El amp H Pulse Output Preview
101. 2 or 01 4 First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data ee ee S1 S2 53 Sn gt D1 D2 D3 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Third 16 32 bit data eS eee N blocks of 16 32 bit data First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32 bit data Sn Nth 16 32 bit data 1 1 or D1 2N 2 Nth 16 32 bit data Applicable SmartAXIS When input is on N blocks of 16 or 32 bit data in devices assigned by S1 S2 S3 Sn are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with device FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X X 01 Destination 1 First device address to move to X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and only data register can be designated as D1 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS
102. 23 TADD 24 1 TAN 21 5 TCCST 6 16 TSUB 24 5 TTIM 20 3 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 INDEX TXD 25 1 WSFT 10 7 XCHG 6 15 XORW 29 1 XYFS 17 1 Advanced instructions ARAMP 19 32 DLOG 26 1 ERXD 25 21 ETXD 25 21 PULS 19 1 PWM 19 8 RAMP 19 15 WEEK 12 1 YEAR 12 11 ZRN 19 26 all outputs OFF M8002 3 5 ALT 11 18 alternate output 11 18 AND and ANDN instructions 5 4 AND LOD instruction 5 5 AND word 9 1 ANDW 9 1 arc cosine 21 7 sine 21 6 tangent 21 8 ASCII to BCD 171 12 to hex 11 7 ASIN 21 6 ATAN 21 8 ATOB 11 12 ATOH 11 7 average 18 1 AVRG 181 B basic instructions 4 1 5 7 BCC block check character 25 5 25 17 BCD left shift 10 5 to ASCII 11 9 to hex 11 3 BCDLS 10 5 BCNT 11 17 bidirectional shift register 5 25 binary arithmetic instructions 98 1 bit count 11 17 block move 6 9 BMOV 6 9 BMOV WSFT executing flag M8024 3 6 6 9 10 7 Boolean computation instructions 9 7 Borrow 4 13 BPS BRD and BPP instructions 5 6 breakdown of END processing time A 5 BTOA 11 9 BTOH 11 3 bytes A 5 A 6 calendar data write flag M8016 3 5 calendar clock data read error flag M8014 3 5 write flag M8020 3 5 write adjust error flag M8013 3 5 Carry 4 13 carry Cy and borrow Bw M8003 3 5 and borrow 8 16 or borrow signals 8 2 catch input ON OFF status M8090 M8095 3 6 CC and CC gt instructions 5 18 change counter preset and current values 5 11 timer preset and current values 5 8 changing preset
103. 24 to 276 LRET 8 SCRPT 12 to 14 DJNZ 12 to 16 PID 112 IOREF 12 A 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC INDEX 100 ms clock M8122 3 7 dual timer 20 1 10 ms clock M8123 3 7 dual timer 20 1 1 ms dual timer 20 1 1 sec clock M8121 3 7 reset M8001 3 5 dual timer 20 1 32 bit Data Storage 4 12 ACOS 21 7 ADD 8 1 adding counter CNT 5 11 addition 8 1 advanced instruction ACOS 21 7 ADD 8 1 ALT 11 18 ANDW 9 1 applicable SmartAXIS 4 6 ASIN 21 6 21 8 11 12 11 7 AVRG 18 1 BCDLS 10 5 BCNT 11 17 BMOV 6 9 BTOA 11 9 BTOH 11 3 CMP 7 1 CMP lt 7 1 CMP lt gt 7 1 CMP 7 1 CMP gt 7 1 CMP gt 7 1 COS 21 4 CVDT 11 19 CVXTY 17 2 CVYTX 17 3 data types 4 10 DEC 8 13 DECO 11 16 DEG 21 2 DI 16 1 DIV 6 1 DJNZ 14 5 DTCB 11 22 DTDV 11 21 DTIM 20 1 DTMH 20 1 DTML 20 1 DTMS 20 1 16 1 ENCO 11 15 EXP 22 3 FIEX 23 3 FIFOF 23 1 FOEX 23 3 HOUR 24 11 HSCRF 45 3 HTOA 11 5 HTOB 11 1 HTOS 24 9 IBMV 6 10 IBMVN 6 12 ICMP gt 76 IMOV 6 6 IMOVN 6 8 INC 8 13 input condition 4 9 IOREF 15 1 LABEL 14 1 LC lt 78 LC lt 78 LC lt gt 78 LC 78 LC gt 78 LC gt 78 LCAL 14 3 list 4 3 LIMP 14 1 10610 22 2 LOGE 22 1 LRET 14 3 MOV 6 1 MOVN 6 5 MUL 8 1 NDSRC 23 5 NOP 4 14 NRS 6 14 NSET 6 13 ORW 9 1 POW 22 4 RAD 21 1 ROOT 8 14 ROTL 10 8 ROTR 10 10 RXD 25 7 SFTL 10 1 SFTR 10 3 SIN 21 3 STOH 24 10 structure 4 9 SUB 8 1 SUM 8 15 SWAP 11
104. 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Data Register Allocation Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 25 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on output Q000 the last day of every month between 2013 and 2020 January February March April ON date 2013 end of month qT seeps eee ees eee Trapene OFF date 2020 end of month OFF 1 fos fos eS dU Yearly ON 31th ist 28th 29th ist 31th ist 30th 15 Monthly ON Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer E377 Devices P1 ON settings Monthly Year 2013 Month and Day Settings Month Day 18 D Day of the week 6 End of month OFF settings ve El pem Wo E Specify ON duration ii Preview Year Jaway gt s 2013 Februay 2013 March 2013 2 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 1 A 2 3 4 5 1 2 4 6 7 8 9 0 14 12 3 45 6 789 3 45 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 ANN 24 25 26 27 HN 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program 12 26 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 u DEC To configure the dates by
105. 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat Mode Selection of S1 data range 0 1 S1 Source 1 Date time data to add to X S2 Source 2 Time data to add X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When Mode 0 is selected source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as these devices When Mode 1 is selected source device S1 and destination device D1 occupy 7 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D993 and D1000 D1993 can be designated as these devices Source device S2 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as source device S2 Since the TADD instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 1 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS Mode 0 When mode 0 is selected time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 are added to the time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S1 The results are stored to 3 data re
106. 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat N File Number File number 0 9 S1 Source 1 First data register to store data to FIFO data file X m For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Make sure that FIEX instructions are executed after the corresponding FIFOF instruction has initialized the FIFO data file If FIEX instructions are executed without executing the corresponding FIFOF instruction a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the FIEX instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types x When a D data register is assigned as the source as many data registers as the value stored in device S1 of I integer the corresponding FIFOF instruction are used D double word L long F float FOEX First Out Execute H When input is on the data is retrieved from the corresponding FIFO data file and stored to the data registers starting with the device assigned by D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A
107. D L DoD 19 36 84 5 MOV F 19 36 84 5 M D gt M D 15 86 84 4 IMOV IMOVN W 8 16 7 70 IMOV IMOVN D D D gt D D 22 66 87 9 IMOV F 22 66 87 9 M D5M D 15 76 47 5 IBMV IBMVN 15 76 47 5 BMOV DoD 21 36 4 1 3n 90 3 1 4 NSET I DoD 2 86 1 6n 1 8 2 5n NSET D L DoD 2 86 1 6n 1 8 83 0 NSET DoD 2 86 1 6n 1 8 83 0 NRS W I DDoD 11 68 16 5 NRS D L D DoD 88 96 732 5 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 A 1 IDEC APPENDIX m Execution Time ps Instruction Device and Condition SmartAXIS Pro Lite SmartAXIS Touch NRS F D D gt D 88 96 732 5 XCHG W DoD 4 86 5 10 XCHG D DoD 33 76 166 5 TCCST W DoT 4 49 4 81 TCCST D DoT 12 3 85 5 CMP lt gt lt gt lt gt W I DoDoM 14 26 47 0 CMP lt gt lt gt lt gt D L DoDoM 28 06 127 5 CMP lt gt lt gt lt gt DoDoM 28 06 127 5 ICMP gt gt 36 56 169 5 ICMP D L gt 57 36 557 5 lt gt lt gt lt gt 1 DoD 4 68 5 00 LC lt gt lt gt lt gt D L DoD 19 66 86 5 LC lt gt gt lt gt DoD 19 66 86 5 M M gt D 20 86 86 5 ADD W I D D 5D 13 76 47 3 34 86 166 3 ADD L D D gt 5D 34 86 16
108. D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed When a user program execution error occurs special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS are turned on For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the LOGE instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W wod Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example LOGE E When input I1 is on the natural logarithm of the binary data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 LOGE F 51 Di D10 D20 log 86 0 4 454347 51 Di 010 011 86 0 x 020 021 4 454347 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 22 1 22 LOGARITHM POWER INSTRUCTIONS LOG10 Common Logarithm H log S1 S1 1 gt 01 01 1 LOG10 F S1 Di When input is on the common logarithm of the binary data assigned by source device S1 is stored to destination assigned by device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q
109. D102 24 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS HOUR Hour Meter H 51 Di D2 51 Di D2 D3 eo While input is on the ON duration of the input is measured The measured time value hour minute and second is stored to 3 consecutive data registers assigned by destination device D1 and compared with the preset value assigned by source device S1 When the D1 value reaches the S1 value an output or internal relay assigned by destination device D2 is turned on Two data registers starting with destination device D3 are reserved for system work area Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Fuxton L Q MR T C D Constant Repeat 751 50 1 L Xx 0653 D1 Destination 1 Measured input ON duration X D2 Destination 2 Comparison output D3 Destination 3 System work area X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Source device S1 can be designated by a data register or constant Source device S1 when designated by a data register and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device to store hour minute and second data Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated a
110. D1998 then the data of the data operation the change becomes effective immediately registers becomes the preset value When power is off the changed preset values are cleared and e Directly after the CNTD instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST the original preset values are loaded TML TIM TMH TMS TMLO TIMO TMHO or TMSO instruction e For data movement when changing confirming and clearing can be programmed preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices pm e The CNTD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 5 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC CDPD Double Word Dual Pulse Reversible Counter The double word dual pulse reversible counter CDPD has up and down pulse inputs so the three inputs are required The circuit for a double word dual pulse reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input up pulse input down pulse input the CDPD instruction and a counter number CO through C198 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 4 294 967 295 5 BASIC INS
111. DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS NDSRC N Data Search H When input is on a value specified by device S1 is searched for Data registers are searched starting with the data register assigned by device S2 Device S3 specifies the quantity of 1 word or 2 word blocks of data registers to search depending on the data type NDSRC 51 52 53 Di The offset of the data register where match first occurred is stored in data register assigned by device D1 The number of matches is stored in the next data register When the search results in no match 65535 is stored in device D1 and 0 is stored in device 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Value to be sought X X S2 Source 2 First data register number to search X S3 Source 3 Quantity of blocks to search X X D1 Destination 1 Search result X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Source S1 data specifies the value to be sought and the valid range depends on the data type The search range cannot straddle data registers and non retentive data registers Make sure that the sum of data register numbers designated by S1 and S2 does not result in a different data register range For source S3 and destination D1 1 word is always used without re
112. Data Timing Chart Reset Input IO OFF ON Pulse Input I1 ON ol c2 Output QO is on when counter C2 current value is 5 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current ON Output 00 value reaches 3 and remains until counter C2 is reset ON Output Q1 OFF Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Timing Chart Reset di Instruction Data ON 300501 502 Pulse Input 12 OFF ON Output QO OFF Output QO is on when counter current value is 500 Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Timing Chart Reset Instruction Data e 1 2 350 351 352 Pulse Input 14 OFF ON Output Q1 OFF Output Q1 is turned on when counter C31 current value reaches 350 and remains on until counter C31 is reset Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Timing Chart Reset Instruction Data 100 101 150 151 152 Pulse Input I6 C20 100 oF Output Q2 OF ON Output Q3 OF Output Q3 is on when counter C20 current value is between 100 and 149 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 19 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS DC and DC gt Data Register Comparison The DC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly compare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated The DC gt instruction is an equal to or greater than compa
113. Data Type Double Word and Long When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 6 devices starting with 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 010 011 020 021 D32 D33 D38 D39 010 011 020 021 34 035 040 041 Quotient Remainder Data Type Float When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU DIV F Si 52 DiR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 Dii 020 021 D30 D31 010 011 020 021 032 033 010 011 020 021 D34 D35 Quotient 8 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 i DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Two Source Devices Data Type Word and Integer When 51 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices D1 and 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W Si R S2 R Di REP H D10 D20 D30 3 D10 020 030 031 Dii 021 030 031 012 022 D30 D31 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word and Long When 51 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices 01 01 1 and 01 2 01 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 DIV D Si R S2 R Di REP E D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 gt 030 031 032 033 012 013 B 022 023 030 0
114. Exchange X X 6 15 TCCST Timer Counter Current Value Store X X 6 16 CMP Compare Equal To X X X Xx 7 1 lt gt Compare Unequal To X X 7 1 lt Compare Less Than X X 7 1 CMP Compare Greater Than X X 7 1 CMP Compare Less Than or Equal To X X 7 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X X 7 1 ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X X 7 6 LC Load Compare Equal To XIXIXIXIX 7 8 LC lt gt Load Compare Unequal To XIXIXIXIX 7 8 LC lt Load Compare Less Than XIXIXIXIX 7 8 LC Load Compare Greater Than X X 7 8 LC lt Load Compare Less Than or Equal To XIXIXIXIX 7 8 LC gt Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To XIXIXIXIX 7 8 ADD Addition X X X Xx 8 1 SUB Subtraction X X X Xx 8 1 MUL Multiplication X X XXX 8 1 DIV Division X X X Xx 8 1 INC Increment X XXX 8 13 DEC Decrement X X 8 13 ROOT Root X X X 8 14 Sum ADD X X X Xx 8 15 SUM Sum XOR X 8 15 ANDW AND Word X X 9 1 ORW OR Word X X 9 1 XORW Exclusive OR Word X X 9 1 SFTL Shift Left 10 1 SFTR Shift Right 10 3 BCDLS BCD Left Shift X 10 5 WSFT Word Shift X 10 7 ROTL Rotate Left X X 10 8 ROTR Rotate Right X X 10 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 3 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Group Data Conversion Week Programmer Interface User Communication Program Branching Coordinate Conversion Pulse Dual
115. FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to convert data type X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First device address to store converted data X A X X X X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and only data register can be designated as D1 When F float data is selected and S1 or D1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X or d
116. Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Cancel Data register settings This setting selects whether to configure YEAR instruction dates as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with data registers To configure the dates as fixed settings clear this check box Unselected check box The dates are fixed settings The dates are configured on the parameter tabs The dates cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For the settings see Parameter tab on page 12 3 Note When this check box is selected the settings for dates are indirectly specified with data registers Configure the dates by using data registers The dates can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For indirection specification with data registers see To configure the dates by specifying data registers on page 12 16 2 S1 source 1 Starting data register This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as fixed settings 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as fixed settings 12 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs 12 WEEK PROGR
117. IBMVN S1 R S2 D1 R 02 When input is on the values contained in devices assigned by 51 and S2 are together added to determine the data source The 1 bit data is then inverted and moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X Oori 1 99 S2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X 0 65535 D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X 0 65535 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current TC or CC value is displayed Make sure that the last source data determined by 51 52 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid device range If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Source device
118. Instruction B B Cc 4 1 Advanced IMStruction ERECTO 4 3 Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS ccseececseeeeeeeseueneeseneneeeeeeeeeesenesaensceeeneeseneeeeseneseceeeaeeneeeeeeeeeess 4 6 Structure of an Advanced Instruction Input Condition for Advanced Instructions SOUIGE aNd Destination DEVICES M Using Timer Or Counter as Source DeVICC 1cccccciccesessassenceeenscetennaevanarscenqoetsecesenternsenequeqeedeessuneesanenarazacuuvecesnees Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device 0 rr nn neni nennen nennen 4 9 Data Types for Advanced Instructions 0 cccccccesescacscccensceseceeceseenenseaneeceeeeesenesenseencnaecqeeseeeneeseeasecaeacageneaoess 4 10 6 amp 4 14 NOP Operation 4 14 Basic Instructions LODN Load NOt eer M QUT Output and OUTN OUtpUE a poa tn eau nna ndi eis 5 NEGO AND and AN
119. L long F float X Example SIN When input I1 is turned on the sine of the radian value of data registers D10 and D11 H assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by 11 destination device D1 3 926991 rad 57 4 rad SIN F Si Di D10 D20 sin 57 4 gt 0 7071069 S1 Di 010 011 3 926991 20 021 0 7071069 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 21 3 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS COS Cosine 055151 1 gt 01 1 1 COS F 51 Di When input is on the cosine of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Radian value to convert into cosine value X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the COS instruction is executed in each scan
120. LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 TIDEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS HTOS HMS to Sec H Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Hours minutes seconds Seconds Si Di em When input is on time data in hours minutes and seconds assigned by source device S1 is converted into seconds The result is stored to destination device D1 Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Time data in hours minutes seconds X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Source device S1 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as source device S1 Destination device D1 occupies 2 consecutive data registers to store double word data starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D998 and D1000 D1998 can be designated as destination device D1 Hour data can be 0 through 65535 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 When any of the hour minute or second data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed When the execution of
121. M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert into common logarithm X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the operation result is not within the range between 3 402823 1028 and 1 175495 1038 or between 1 175495 x 1038 and 3 402823 x 108 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the result is 0 For details see Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing on page 4 11 When the value of S1 source 1 is 0 a user program execution error occurs When the value of S1 source 1 is less than 0 a user program execution error occurs When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error occurs and the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed When a user program execution error occurs special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS are turned on For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the LOG10 instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data regi
122. MSG instructions that have inputs that are on Messages are also switched when the acknowledgement for the MSG instruction is enabled Motor 5 STOP AT Example Message output e D in Priority 30 ACTION Motor 2 Mid Example Message output ours in Priority 10 MAINTENANCE Running 2012 0CT 01 MON Date and current time 09 00 12 11 Acknowledgment When acknowledgement is enabled the message is kept displayed even after the input to the MSG instruction is turned off The message is closed when OK button on the SmartAXIS is pressed and then the message for the MSG instruction with the next highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG instructions with inputs that are on at that time If the input to the MSG instruction is on the message is not closed even when the OK button is pressed SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 3 ZiDEC 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Insert Word Device The value of the specified word device can be displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD Insert Word Device E3 x 1 Device Data Word W 2 Conversion Type Decimal 3 Display Option Blinking Invert 4 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x5 1 Device Enter the device to display Valid Devices W word TC TP CC CP D I integer D D double word CC CP D L long D F float D 2 Data Type and Conversion Type
123. NUL A D0010 0041h Note WindLDR Modbus RTU defaults to no No conversion 00h 41h o on indLDR Modbus efaults to x conversion 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example w 1 digits 2 34h G1h 34h G1h Note On WindLDR Modbus ASCII and Modbus RTU T default is set to 2 digits 2 digits 1 34h 31h 31h Lower digit Comparing BCC Codes The SmartAXIS compares the BCC calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data to check for any error in the incoming communication due to external noises or other causes If a disparity is found in the comparison an error code is stored in the data register designated as receive status in the RXD instruction For user communication error code see Chapter 10 User Communication Instructions User Communication Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Example 1 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the XOR format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data T ve 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 30h 37h BCC Calculation Range Comparison result is true to indicate that data is received correctly BCC Calculation
124. Notes maximum of 50 MSG instructions can be entered in a user program Only one MSG instruction message can be displayed on the LCD S1 for the MSG instruction stores the MSG instruction priority When the display conditions for multiple MSG instructions are satisfied the messages are displayed according to the priority set for the MSG instruction For MSG instruction priority see 10 Priority on page 13 3 e The MSG instruction cannot be used during an interrupt program If it is used during an interrupt program a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch 4 4 For Pro only The display instructions cannot be used on Lite Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Priority X 1 Special internal relays cannot be used IDE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 1 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Settings For the MSG instruction settings there are settings for the individual MSG instruction and settings that are common to all the MSG instructions Note Settings that are common to all the MSG instructions are modified in the Function Area Settings dialog box of WindLDR For details see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8
125. ON retained 04 D5 1414 0104 0105 1414 Carry and Borrow When the result of an operation exceeds the valid device range a carry CY or borrow BW occurs Carrying and borrowing occur in the following conditions according to the data type Data Type Status Word Exceeds range between 0 and 65 535 Integer Exceeds range between 32 768 and 32 767 Double Word Exceeds range between 0 and 4 294 967 295 Long Exceeds range between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 If an overflow or underflow occurs Float For details on overflow and underflow see Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing on page 4 11 When a carry or borrow occurs special internal relay M8003 carry and borrow turns on For example when DO has a value of FFFF hex and 1 is added using an INC instruction the result is 10000 hex but when the data type is Word W 0000 hex is stored in DO and 1 is stored in M8003 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 13 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Discontinuity of Device Areas Each device area is discrete and does not continue for example from input to output or from output to internal relay In addition special internal relays M8000 through M8177 are in a separate area from internal relays MO through M1277 Data registers DO through D999 non retentive data registers D1000 through D1999 and special data registers D8000 through D8199 are in separate ar
126. RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output is canceled If the RAMP instruction input turns on again the pulse count is reset and pulse counting starts Even if the contents of the control registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is executed The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the RAMP1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input 19 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS RAMP1 instruction reversible control enabled single pulse output mode timing chart RAMP1 instruction S1 is specified as D200 D1 is specified as internal relay M50 RAMP instruction input RAMP instruction input Control direction D203 0 Forward 1 Reverse Output pulse 014 Reversible control 016 40 1 0 type signal Q12 48 1 0 type Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 When the RAMP instruction input is on pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control registers The reversible control signal is output from Q16 or Q12 When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or d
127. Result 31h e 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 07h Binary to ASCII Conversion w 30h 37h 25 18 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Example 2 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the ADD format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data T van 5 ve zm 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 30h 37h BCC Calculation Range Comparison result is false BCC Calculation Result 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 135h Binary to ASCII Conversion gt 33h 35h Designate an output QO through 021 or internal relay MO through M1277 as a device for the receive completion output When the start input for a RXD instruction is turned on preparation for receiving data is initiated followed by data conversion and storage When the data receive operation sequence is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Error code 9 is stored in the receive status data register Receive Completion Output Conditions for Completion of Receiving Data After starting to receive data the RXD instruction can be completed in three ways depending on the designation of end delimiter and delimiter in the receive format End Delimiter Delimiter Co
128. S1 data is greater than S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Data type W or I S1 lt 52 gt Dion Data type D L or F 5151 1 lt 2 S2 1 gt D1 When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Data type W or I S1 gt S2 D1 on Data type D L or F 5151 1 gt 2 S2 1 Di on When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is greater than or equal to S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 74 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function Q M R T C D Constant Repeat Repeat Result Logical AND or OR operation S1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X 1 99 S2 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Comparison output X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When only S1 and or S2 is repeated the logical operation type can be selected from AND or OR Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated D1
129. S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be used If S2 or D2 are not used the source or destination device is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Examples IBMVN Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device Source device S2 and destination device D2 are the offset values used to determine the source and destination devices M20 D10 NOT gt Q0 C5 S1 M20 S2 D10 D1 D2 Qo c5 REP If the value of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 8 the source M37 M30 M27 M20 data is determined by adding the offset value to internal relay M20 assigned by source device S1 KJ VJ M RJ NOT ath from M20 If the current value of counter C5 assigned by destination device D2 is 10 the destination is determined by adding the offset value to output QO assigned by Q17 012 01007 Qo destination device D1 E W W W YV vv W 10th from Q0 As a result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M30 is inverted and moved to output Q12 6 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC NSET N Data Set H NSET S1 52 assigned by 1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data S1 52 53 D1 N Data Set 1 1 or D1 2 lies 01
130. The communication method is now set to USB Next download a user program 3 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Download The Download dialog box appears then click OK The user program is downloaded to the SmartAXIS un DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 7 1 OPERATION BASICS f Deel 9 Note The Download dialog box can also be opened by selecting Home gt Download Transfer Mode Binary ASCII Download Options Automatic start after download write device data file tothe PLCafter download Setting Z Download comment data Setting Download system software Version 1 82 Latest Detail Program Information Program Size bytes Note When downloading a user program all values and selections in onec bytes the Function Area Settings are also downloaded to the SmartAXIS For bytes details on function settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions in the M SmiartAXIS routes sers Mafia Communication Settings Cancel Monitor Operation Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the computer The input and output status of the sample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor Monitor When both inputs IO and 11 are on the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows
131. The time range is 0 through 6553 5 sec While input is on destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a duration assigned by devices S1 and S2 respectively When the input is off D1 turns off The time range is 0 through 655 35 sec While input is on destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a duration assigned by devices S1 and S2 respectively When the input is off D1 turns off The time range is 0 through 65 535 sec FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 20 1 20 DUAL TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant S1 Source 1 ON duration X 0 65535 S2 Source 2 OFF duration X 0 65535 D1 Destination 1 Dual timer output X D2 Destination 2 System work area X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Destination device D2 system work area uses 2 data registers starting with the device designated as D2 Data registers D0 D998 and D1000 D1998 can be designated as D2 The two data registers are used for a system work area Do not use these data registers for destinations of other advanced instructions and do not change values of these data registers using the monitor function on WindLDR If the data in these data registers ar
132. Variable Duty Cycle Pulse Output The PWM instructions output pulses at the specified frequency and duty cycle from the output port 51 52 Di When the input is on pulses are output according to the control register settings specified by S1 The pulse control information output on output complete error is stored in the 52 internal relays specified by D1 as the operation status Di When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR PWM instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers 52 Di 52 Di X ub EO Note Configure multiple PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP trapezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions so that they do not share the same pulse output port However the ZRN zero return instruction can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP trapezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions Note The PWM instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution
133. When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and S2 When F float data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used When repeat is assigned for a D double word bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word F float Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in CMP x x x x x or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments When an output or internal relay is assigned as the destination only 1 point is used regardless of the selected data type When repeat is assigned for the destination outpu
134. When data register is specified the slave number can be changed by storing the slave number in D8027 and D8028 D8027 Port 2 Slave Number D8028 Port 3 Slave Number For SmartAXIS Pro Lite maintenance communication see Chapter 9 Maintenance Communication Maintenance Communication via Serial Communication in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For Modbus RTU slaves see Chapter 11 Modbus Communication Modbus Communication via RS 232C RS 485 in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For SmartAXIS Touch maintenance communication and Modbus RTU slaves see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Reading Error Data in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8029 System Software Version The PLC system software version number is stored to D8029 This value is indicated in the PLC status dialog box called from the WindLDR menu bar Select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then select Online gt Status See Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Reading Error Data in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8030 Communication Adapter Information Information about the communication adapters installed on the port 2 and port 3 connectors is stored to D8030 Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 1 0 D8030 0 0 Port 3 Port 2 0 RS232C communication adapter is installed 1 RS485 communication adapter is installed or no communication adapter is installed D8031 Optional Cartridge Information Information about the opt
135. X X ARAMP2 X Note2 X X Note2 Note2 Dual Teaching Timer DTML X X X DTIM DTMH DTMS TTIM Trigonometric Function RAD DEG SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN Logarithm Power LOGE LOG10 EXP POW File Data Processing FIFOF FIEX FOEX NDSRC Clock TADD TSUB HTOS STOH HOUR X X X X X X X X OK OK x x X OK OK x OOK x X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK X x Ethernet Instructions ETXD ERXD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Data Logging DLOG TRACE Script SCRPT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK X X X X OK OK X X X Xx gt lt x X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK X X X x x OK x gt lt X X X X X OK X X X X X X OK X X X X X x x OK x x x X Note1 Note2 Note3 4 8 PID PID PULSA and PWM4 cannot be used When usin
136. X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X 1 99 S2 Source 2 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X X X X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and S2 When F float data is selected and S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the binary arithmetic instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word long or f
137. XORW Exclusive OR Word 51 52 D1 XORW 51 8 S2 R D1 R REP When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are exclusive ORed bit by bit The result is set to destination device D1 5151110 0150110 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 9 1 9 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for computation X X X X X X X X 1 99 S2 Source 2 Data for computation X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X X X X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be assigned as D1 Special internal relays cannot be assigned as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Since the Boolean computation instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift r
138. and click on Select button on Script Manager dialog box The selected ID will be entered to S1 27 2 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DE 28 PID INSTRUCTION Introduction The PID instruction performs auto tuning and PID control for temperature control and other purposes PID PID Instruction The PID instruction executes PID control and outputs the result When auto tuning is performed the optimal PID parameters are calculated Symbol Operation The PID instruction is used to perform temperature and other types of control 51 52 53 54 When the input is on auto tuning and PID control are performed Wa rning e Special technical knowledge about the PID control is required to use the PID function of the SmartAXIS Touch Use of the PID function without understanding the PID control may cause the SmartAXIS Touch to perform unexpected operation resulting in disorder of the control system damage or accidents When using the PID instruction for feedback control emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS Touch If such a circuit is configured inside the SmartAXIS Touch failure of inputting the process variable may cause equipment damage or accidents Note The maximum number of PID instructions that can be programmed in a user program is six For details about each control see PID Control on page 28 14
139. are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running When the day of the week or time in the ON OFF settings is modified with the WEEK instruction input turned on the modified data register values are reflected in the ladder program when the current date and time matches the day of the week or time in the ON OFF settings Device tab WEEK Weekly Timer Devices pa Tag Name D0100 Device Address Comment 6 Pulse Output Preview ba 4 40 1 V Data register settings 51 First DR 2 D0100 D0102 Week Day 52 Initialization Input 01 Output 3 e 1 5 4 S3 The number of parametertabs 1 Sunday Monday DataRegisterAllocation 7 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 1 Data register settings This setting selects whether to configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings or to indirectly specify them with data registers To configure the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers select this check box 7 Selected check box The day of the week and the time settings are indirectly specified by data registers Configure the day of the week and the time by using data registers The day of the week and the time can be chang
140. basic operation of WindO I NV3 with the Touch series Start WindLDR From Start menu of Windows select Programs gt Automation Organizer V2 gt WindLDR gt WindLDR WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen project01 pjw WINDLDR puer x 0 ues M gt Eraser s 4Plncrement 13 Split yf Insert Clu v _ Horizontal Decrement Join Append CX Replace Paste Import Select Basic Advanced Maco Draw Coil Rung Set T Line Vertical l comment PADisable X Delete GoTo i Ti d 1 Rung 1 1 m FT1A 48 USB Network 1 1 Edit Rung 1 Line 1 Co n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 1 1 OPERATION BASICS PLC Selection Before programming a user program in WindLDR select a PLC type 1 Select Configuration from the WindLDR menu bar then select PLC Type The PLC Selection dialog box appears PLC Selection Option PLC Selection OpenNet FC4A C10R2X FC4A C16R2X FC4A C24R2X 4 020 3 FC4A D20RX1 4 040 3 FC5A C 10R2X FCSA C16R2X FCSA C24R2X FC5A D16RX1 FC5A D32X3 FFC5A D12X1E FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 1 48 Use as Default Default 9 jii FT1A 12 SmartAXIS Type No
141. can set from 0 to 100 For example when ARW 50 and proportional band 20 0096 the integral action starts from when the deviation becomes smaller than 10 9 AT Auto Tuning Bias 51 13 Set the bias value for the auto tuning The auto tuning start point is determined by the AT bias value in 1 increments When process variable lt set point AT bias value AT start point set point AT bias value When process variable gt set point AT bias value AT start point set point AT bias value When set point AT bias value process variable lt set point AT bias value AT start point set point For details see Auto Tuning AT on page 28 15 The AT bias can be set between the minimum value and the maximum value of the process variable 28 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 E IDEC 28 PID INSTRUCTION mOutput tab This tab configures the output parameters for the PID instruction PID PID Control ENT Input Control Output PV D0000 32768 to 32767 Control Mode PID PID Control MV D0019 32768 to 32767 SP 0 Devices Input Control Output 1 Dutput Manipulated Variable MV Analog Output Data Register M Device Address poo19 3 Maximum Value 327675 32768 to 32767 4 Minimum Value 32768 E 32768 to 32767 5 Manipulated Variable Limit Disable 7 8 Manual ModeOutput MV
142. counting the pulse inputs as they change from off to on Reset Preset Pulse ON OFF ON OFF Valid Invalid Valid More than one scan time is required A single counter number cannot be programmed more than once The preset input must be turned on initially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin The up mode is selected when the up down selection input is on The down mode is selected when the up down selection input is off The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to 0 on the next count up When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor Monitor then Online Custom New Custom Monitor Change the current value while the counter preset input is off When the preset or current value is changed during counter o
143. data and 0 through 9999 9999 5F5 EOFFh for double word data Make sure that the source designated by S1 is within the valid value range If the source data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the HTOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word L long data or 2 points double word data are used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 1 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOB Data Type Word Binary HTOB W S1 D1 0 D10 D20 I1 D10 0000h D20 1234 D10 04D2h D20 9999 D10 270Fh D20
144. data as many consecutive data registers as the repeat cycles are used Repeat One Source Device e Data Type Word and Integer When only S1 source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices D1 and 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W SiR 52 D1 REP H SOTU D D10 amp 20 gt D30 D31 D11 D20 gt D30 D31 D12 D20 D30 D31 Quotient Remainder e Data Type Double Word and Long When only S1 source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices 01 01 1 and 01 2 01 3 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 n D12 DI3 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 032 033 Di4D15 D20D21 gt D30D31 D32 D33 Quotient Remainder e Data Type Float When only 51 source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU DIV F SiR 52 Di REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 RI 030 031 012 013 020 021 LL 030 031 014 015 B 020 021 RE 030 031 Quotient Repeat Destination Device Only Data Type Word and Integer When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 6 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 DIV W S1 S2 DIR REP H SOTU W m Don B D10 20 030 D33 010 20 031 D34 D10 020 gt p32 035 Quotient Remainder
145. displayed in the ladder program display screen For the symbol of each instruction see Instructions Reference on page 4 1 Ladder program display screen Details screen 5 OPCODE MOV W S1 00000 1234 00002 Hik D1 R 00123 1234 rab M0002 M0003 M0004 REP 03 99 2 3 Explanation of displayed content 1 Shows the cursor The content at the cursor position is displayed inverted 2 Devices are shown as device symbol one character address four digits bit position two digits For devices see Device Addresses on page 3 1 3 If the instruction results output is on it is displayed inverted 4 Instructions except for LOD LODN OUT OUTN SET RST AND ANDN OR and ORN are displayed as with the instruction name displayed in a maximum of five characters under the box MCS MCR JMP END LABEL LJMP LCAL and LRET instructions are displayed in one line on the screen 5 When the OK button is pressed the details of the instruction at the cursor position are displayed A maximum of four lines are displayed Press the sc se ESC button to return to the original screen Details of the following instructions can be displayed in the Details screen LOD LODN OUT OUTN SET RST AND ANDN OR ORN TML TIM TMH TMS TMLO TIMO TMHO TMSO CNT CDP CUD CNTD CDPD CUDD SFR SFRN CC gt DC DC gt basic inst
146. errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Precautions for Programming TXD Instruction e The SmartAXIS has five formatting areas each for executing TXD2 through TXD3 instructions so five instructions each of TXD2 through TXD3 can be processed at the same time If inputs to more than five of the same TXD instructions are turned on at the same time an error code is set to the transmit status data register designated by device D2 in the excessive TXD instructions that cannot be executed e Ifthe input for a TXD instruction turns on on while another TXD instruction is executed the subsequent TXD instruction is executed 2 scan times after the preceding TXD instruction is completed e Since TXD instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 1 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication Transmit Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR TXD Transmit Type RXD ETXD ERXD Port Port 2 51 Device Address Comment Insert Delete Edit J D1 D2 Cancel X Selections and Devices in Transmit Instruction Dialog Box TXD Transmit instruction Type RXD Receive instruction Port Port 2 Port 3 Transmit user communication from port 2 TXD2 through port 3 TXD3 E
147. execution error occurs and the source data is not moved to the destination Repeat Devices The MOV move instruction moves 16 bit data word or integer data or 32 bit data double word or integer data When a bit device such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as the source or destination device 16 or 32 bits starting with the one designated by S1 or D1 are the target data If a repeat operation is designated for a bit device the target data increases in 16 or 32 bit increments depending on the selected data type Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 MOV F SIR DIR REP D10 D20 3 DiODiil 1 5 gt 020 021 1 5 D12 D13 Invalid 022 023 11 1 D14 D15 3 44 0240251 3 44 Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W 51 DIR REP 110 D10 MO 3 D10 110 gt through M7 M10 through M17 11 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 0121 112 MA40 through M47 M50 through M57 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV D 51 DIR REP 111 D10 MO 3 D10 110 r through M7 M10 through M17 gt Dil 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 0121 112 M40 thr
148. first in execute 23 3 first out execute 23 3 FOEX 23 3 format number 17 1 17 2 17 3 forward shift register 5 22 hex to ASCII 11 5 BCD 171 1 hexadecimal storage decimal values 4 10 high speed counter comparison output reset M8030 M8040 M8045 3 2 gate input M8031 M8041 M8046 3 2 l IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 INDEX refresh 15 3 reset input M8032 M8042 M8047 3 2 HMS to sec 24 9 HOUR 24 11 hour meter 24 11 HSCRF 45 3 HTOA 11 5 HTOB 171 1 HTOS 24 9 I refresh 15 1 IBMV 6 10 IBMVN 6 12 ICMP gt 7 6 IMOV 6 6 IMOVN 6 8 INC 8 13 increment 8 13 indirect bit move 6 10 bit move not 6 12 move 6 6 move not 6 8 initialize pulse M8120 3 7 in operation output M8125 3 7 input condition for advanced instructions 4 9 instruction bytes A 5 A 6 instructions average 18 1 binary arithmetic 8 1 Boolean computation 9 1 clock 24 1 coordinate conversion 17 1 data comparison 7 1 data conversion 11 1 dual teaching timer 20 1 file data processing 23 1 logarithm power 22 1 move 6 1 program branching 14 1 prohibited 5 31 shift rotate 10 1 trigonometric function 21 1 user communication 25 1 interrupt input status M8070 M8075 3 6 interval compare greater than or equal to 7 6 IOREF 15 1 IP address D8084 D8087 3 13 J JMP and JEND instructions 5 29 jump instructions 5 29 L LABEL 14 1 label 24 7 call 14 3 jump 44 1 return 14 3 LC lt 78 LC lt 78 LC lt gt 78 LC 78 LC
149. in One Scan While the SmartAXIS is running the SmartAXIS performs operations repeatedly such as input refreshing ladder program processing and error checking A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies with respect to program length The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 scan time current value and the maximum value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 scan time maximum value These values can be viewed on the PLC status screen of WindLDR while monitoring on a computer Executing Program Instructions During the scan time program instructions are processed sequentially starting with the first line of the ladder program except for interrupt program execution One scan time of a ladder program is approximately equal to the total execution time of each instruction shown on preceding pages Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle scan time to prevent hardware malfunction When the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time a watchdog timer error occurs and the system is reset If this is the case place NOP instructions in the ladder diagram The NOP instruction resets the watchdog timer For details on the watchdog timer see Chapter 5 Special Functions Watchdog Timer in
150. is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types x When a D data register is assigned as the source or destination 1 point word data or 2 points double word I integer data are used When repeat is assigned the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments D double word X L long F float Examples SWAP Data W word When input IO is turned on upper and lower byte data of the 16 bit data in data register D10 assigned by source device S1 are exchanged and the result is stored to data register D20 assigned by destination device D1 Data Type D double word Before Execution After Execution 12345 14640 010 3039h 0201 3930p SWAP W S1 D1 REP D10 D20 When input I1 is turned on upper and lower word data of the 32 bit data in data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 are exchanged and the result is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 SWAP D S1 D1 REP Before Execution After Execution Fo D10 020 D10 100 B D20 200 D11 200 D21 100 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 23 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 11 24 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING M
151. is off the reversible control signal Q15 turns off forward When I1 is on the reversible control signal Q15 turns on reverse MOWW Si Di 0 D3 MOWW S1 Di 1 D3 starts RAMP Ramp Pulse Output a Turn on initialization input MO When the RAMP instruction input I0 turns on pulse output When I1 is off store 0 forward in control direction D3 When I1 is on store 1 reverse in control direction D3 Devices Settings RAMP 1 Q0014 51 Control Register 52 Initialization Input Di OperationStatus Tag Name D0000 0000 as M0100 Device Address 100000 vo 000 0100 Comment RAMP Ramp Pulse Output eax Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency D0000 1000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 50 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable Single pulse output Control direction D0003 Forward Preset value D0004 D0005 100000 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0006 D0007 1to 100 000 000 Error status D0008 oK Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency DO 1000 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency Di 50 500 Hz Frequency change time D
152. is on the Y value assigned by device S2 is converted into the corresponding X value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction Device S1 selects a format from a maximum of 8 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the device assigned by D1 CVYTX 51 S2 D1 1 12 1 24 1 40 1 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number 0to7 0 to 65535 S2 Source 2 Y value X X X X X X X 32768 to 32767 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 7 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed or when XYFS and CVYTX instructions of the same format number have different data type designations a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the Smar
153. is stored at the position indicated by the FI pointer and the FI pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate the position to store the next data When the FI pointer indicates the last record of the FIFO data file and an FIEX instruction is executed the FI pointer will return to 0 Dici FO pointer The FO pointer indicates the position to retrieve the stored data from the FIFO data file When an FOEX instruction is executed the data at the position indicated by the FIFO pointer is retrieved and stored to the data registers starting with the device designated by D1 of the FOEX instruction and the FO pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate the position to retrieve the next data When the FO pointer indicates the last record of the FIFO data file and an FOEX instruction is executed the FO pointer will return to 0 01 2 01 51 1 0 The first record to store data 01 51 2 D1 S1x2 1 Record 1 The second record to store the data a 01 51 62 1 2 01 51 52 1 Record 52 1 The last record to store the data Destination Device D2 FIFO Status Output When FIEX or FOEX instructions are executed the following internal relays are turned on or off according to the execution status Device 02 0 Function Data file full output Description When the value stored in the FI pointer D1 0 is equal to the value stored in the FO pointer 01 1 1 t
154. is stored to D8001 D8002 SmartAXIS Type Information Information about the SmartAXIS type is stored to D8002 0 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 12 I O type 1 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 24 I O type 2 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 40 I O type 3 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 48 I O type 4 SmartAXIS Touch D8003 Memory Cartridge Information When an optional memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS cartridge connector information about the user program stored on the memory cartridge is stored to D8003 0 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 12 I O type 1 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 24 I O type 2 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 40 I O type 3 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 48 I O type 255 The memory cartridge does not store any user program D8005 General Error Code SmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005 When a general error occurs the bit corresponding to the error occurred turns on The general error and user program execution error can be cleared by writing 1 to the most significant bit of D8005 using a user program For details on Pro Lite general error codes see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on Touch general error codes see Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 Troubleshooting in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8006 User Program Execution Error Code SmartAXIS user program execution error information is stored to D8006 When a user program execution error occurs the error code corresponding to the error occurred is stored to D8006 For detai
155. is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example ASIN When input I1 is turned on the arc sine of the value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 asin 0 7071069 0 7853982 rad 0 7853982 rad 4 rad ASIN F 51 D1 D10 D20 S1 Di 010 011 0 7071069 020 021 0 7853982 21 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 f DEC 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS ACOS Arc Cosine H acos 1 S1 1 D1 D1 1 rad ACOS F Si D1 When input is on the arc cosine of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians to the destination assigned by device D1 The 51 51 1 value must be within the following range 1 0 lt 51 51 1 lt 1 0 If the 51 51 1 value is not within this range 0 is stored to D1 D1 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Arc cosine value to convert into radian X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the data designated by source devi
156. jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments Program execution returns to the address of input I1 M8122 is the 100 ms clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 ms increments Program execution returns to the address of input I2 M8123 is the 10 ms clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 ms increments Program execution returns to the address of END 14 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero H Applicable SmartAXIS When input is on the value stored in the data register assigned by S1 is decremented by one and is checked If the resultant value is not 0 program execution jumps to address with label 0 through 255 assigned by S2 If the decrement results in 0 no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction 51 52 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Decrement value X m S2 Source 2 Label number to jump to X 0 255 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the DJNZ instructi
157. lt OK OK x x OK OK OK x OK OK x OK OK x OK x OK x x x SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 X X X X x x x OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK OK OK OK x x x x x X X X X OK x x OK OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK OK OK X OK OK OK OK x x OK OK x OK X X OK X x x x OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK OK OK OK x OK OK x OK IDEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Grou Symbol P y AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC Touch HTOB BTOH HTOA ATOH BTOA ATOB ENCO DECO BCNT ALT CVDT DTDV DTCB SWAP WEEK YEAR Display MSG X TXD2 User TXD3 Communication RXD2 RXD3 LABEL LJMP LCAL LRET Program Branching DJNZ DI EI IOREF HSCRF XYFS Coordinate CVXTY Conversion CVYTX AVRG x lt Data Conversion Week Programmer x X X X X OK X X gt lt gt lt gt lt X X X X X X X x x Xx X Note X X Note X Note X Note X Note X Note L 1 gt lt S gt lt gt lt gt lt x x x x 0 x x x x x x x x C g gt lt gt lt gt lt x x x x x x x x x xx D x 1 x g x x x x x x x
158. modified using the SmartAXIS operation buttons The values cannot be modified when the SmartAXIS is stopped To modify the value of word device mont a LCD A monitor LLL 60000 Actua 40000 ps While the above message is displayed press and hold the OK button and the cursor is displayed on the devices that can be modified ne A monitor an 60000 Actual 20000 ff Wooo ITT TTT TT Move the cursor to the device you wish to edit using amp up down left right buttons and press the oy OK button to change the device in the editable state A moni 60000 20000 Press the right button to move the cursor to the fourth digit and then use the up button to modify the target value to 65000 Line A monitor Plan 20000 Diff 40000 Press the OK button to confirm the modifications 13 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE e 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Scrolling text example Character Set European scroll speed 500 ms When a text with effect is set to scroll the text is displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD as follows When scrolling text longer than the specified area When scrolling a text shorter than or equal to the the LCD specified area on the LCD Text IDEC Corporation SmartAXIS
159. mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil and click the left mouse button Note Another method to insert an instruction either basic or advanced is to type the instruction symbol OUT where you want to insert the instruction The Output dialog box appears 9 Enter QO in the Tag Name field and click OK A NO output coil of output Q0 is programmed in the right most column of the first ladder line This completes programming for rung 1 ER agg project01 pjw WINDLDR Configuration Online View a amp nes B A M L 2 Eraser E J Incement r Split Insert _ Horizontal JF Decrement Join Append Paste Select Basic Advanced Macro Draw Col Rung ga vi Invert Comment Disable X Delete Line Vertical instruction P i ing a Main Program 1 m E 5 Ee 10000 10001 90000 Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating similar procedures A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung A new rung can also be inserted by selecting Home Append Append a Rung n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 5 1 OPERATION BASICS When completed the ladder program looks like below project01 pjw WINDLDR EN Split Join lel Insert Convert Jum
160. occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ENCO instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Examples ENCO When input IO is on a search begins for a bit that is set on in an array of 64 bits starting at internal relay M4 assigned by device S1 51 4 Di IO D100 Since internal relay M30 is the first point that is on the offset from the first search point is 20 and 20 is stored to data register D100 assigned by device D1 LL 20 M57 Poper ga ARa E o w77 BH CLELELELLLELE E Eee v EEE EE 7 Searchea area When input I1 is on a search begins for a bit that is set on in an array of 64 bits starting at bit 0 of data register D10 assigned by device S1 Di D10 D100 n Since bit 8 of data register D11 is the first point that is on the offset from the first search point is 24 and 24 is stored to data register D100 assigned by device D1 Bit 15 14 B 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D10 11 gt 0100 24 012 D13 aM ON 014 BT EIE EE Searched area I TI DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 15 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIO
161. of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0009 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms p Preset value 00010 D0011 5000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0012 Forward Acceleration deceleration contra D0012 Acceleration deceleration later lext step number D0013 3 O to 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D8 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D9 3000 3 000 ms Preset value 010 011 5000 Preset 5 000 Control direction D12 Forward Forward 0 Timing of change D12 Acceleration deceleration later After 2 Next step number D13 3 Step 3 Step 3 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E3757 Devices settings Ramp Table B m m _ _ _ Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 ISteady pulse frequency D0014 100 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0015 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0016 D0017 5000 1 to 100 000 000 ee Control direction D0018 Reverse Acceleration deceleration contra D0018 Acceleration deceleration first INext step number D0019 4 Oto 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency Di4 100 1kHz Frequency change time D15 3000 3 000 ms Preset value D16 D17 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D18 Reverse Reverse 1 Timing of change D18 Acceleration deceleration first Before 0 Next step number D19 4 Step 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 47 19
162. of the following conditions occurs a user program execution error occurs e The data designated by source device S1 is less than 0 and the data designated by source device 52 is not an integer e The data designated by source device S1 is 0 and the data designated by source device S2 is less than or equal to 0 When the data designated by source device S1 or S2 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error occurs and the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed When a user program execution error occurs special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS are turned on For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the POW instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types 7 Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example POW When input I1 is on the data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is raised to the power D20 D20 1 assigned by source device 11 S2 and the operation result is stored to data registers D30 and D31 assigned by destination device D1 4125 5 656856 POW F Si S2 Di D10 D
163. off delay timer instructions TMLO TIMO TMHO TMSO cannot be used in an interrupt program e If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy due to software configuration depends on three factors timer input error timer counting error and timeout output error These errors are not constant but vary with the user program and other causes Timer Input Error The input status is read at the END processing and stored to the input RAM So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timer input turns on in a scan cycle The same error occurs on normal input and catch input The timer input error shown below does not include input delay caused by the hardware Minimum Error Maximum Error TIM END END TIM END TIM Program Processing Program Processing ON ON Actual Input OFF Actual Input OFF ON ON Input RAM OFF Input RAM OFF Timer Start Timer Start Tet Tie Tet gt gt lt gt 1 scan time 1 scan time When the input turns on immediately before END processing When the input turns on immediately after END processing Tie is Tie is almost 0 Then the timer input error is only Tet behind almost equal to one scan time Then the timer input error is Tie error and is at its minimum Tet one scan time Tet
164. on data of data registers D25 D26 assigned by source device S1 is moved to 10 m gt D36D37 123 4 data registers starting with D30 assigned by destination device D1 L p38D39 123 4 6 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DEC 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS XCHG Exchange H Word data 01 lt 02 Double word data 0101 1 D2 D2 1 XCHG D1 D2 When input is on 16 32 bit data in devices assigned by D1 and 02 are exchanged with each other Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat 01 Destination 1 First device address to exchange X X X 02 Destination 2 First device address to exchange X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 or D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 or D2 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the destination 16 I integer points word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the destination 1 point word data or 2 points L long double word data are used F float Examples
165. operation for W word and I integer data the destination uses a different quantity of devices W word I integer Operation D double word L long F float ADD 51 S2 1 word device S1 D1 2 word devices 2 word devices S2 1 word device XOR S1 S2 D1 1 word device DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 15 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Carry and Borrow In advanced instructions involving D double word L long or F floating point data special internal relay M8003 carry and borrow is turned on when the execution of the instruction results in the following value Data Type M8003 Execution Result D double word 1 Exceeds the range between 0 to 4 294 967 295 L long 1 Exceeds the range between 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 F float 1 See the figure below Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing When advanced instructions involving floating point data are executed special internal relay M8003 carry and borrow is updated M8003 Execution Result Value 1 0 Overflow exceeds the range between 3 402823 1038 and 3 402823 1038 1 0 Not zero within the range between 1 175495x10 3 and 1 175495x10 29 0 0 Zero Not Zero Overflow Overflow M8003 1 1 Execution Result 3 402823x1038 1 175495 1038 0 1 175495 10738 3 402823x1038 Examples SUM Data Type Word 1 10 00 1 gt D100 D
166. point Time e When the proportional band is made smaller the control output turns on or off from near the set point so the time until the process variable rises in temperature to the set point decreases and the offset also becomes smaller but hunting increases When the proportional band is made larger the control output turns on or off from a temperature considerably lower than the target temperature so auto tuning and hunting eliminate but it takes time until the process variable rises in temperature to the set point and the offset between the set point and the process variable becomes larger uPI control The I action automatically corrects the offset generated by Proportional control However for rapid changes in temperature due to disturbances it will take time until the temperature stabilizes The PI action is suitable for temperature control with a slow rate of change When set to PI control derivative time is automatically 0 Temperature Proportional band 4 7 Disturbance Set point Time e If the integral time is too small I integral control becomes more powerful and the offset can be corrected in a short amount of time but this may cause long cycles of hunting e If integral time is too large I integral control becomes weaker and it takes time to correct the offset PD control Compared to Proportional control PD control increases the response to rapid temperature changes due to disturbanc
167. program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 24 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS Examples TSUB The following examples demonstrate the TSUB instruction to that will subtract time data in two different modes Mode 0 E 52 Di D10 020 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 HB DI rou BI Dil finis RUNE Dai ine D2 end Dia ich D22 When the result is less than 00 00 00 24 is added to the result turning on special internal relay M8003 borrow Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 ae Hour di Hour Di Dil Dai m D2 mm Die D22 T 1 51 D8008 52 0100 Di D200 10 Source 1 Destination 1 7 7 D8008 year 0200 Year 8 8 08009 D201 Month 23 23 D8010 D202 8 Day Day D8011 4 Note p203 4
168. range BCC 2 digits BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from exclusive OR ADD addition ADD 2comp Modbus ASCII or Modbus Example Conversion results of transmit data consist of 41h 42h 43h and 44h ASCII data 6 41h 42h 43h 44h 1 calculation formula Calculation result 41h 42h 43h 44h 04h 2 calculation formula ADD Calculation result 41h 42h 43h 44h 10Ah 0Ah Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC 3 calculation formula ADD 2comp Calculation result FEh F6h 2 digits without conversion 4 calculation formula Modbus ASCII Calculation result 88 ASCIT 5 calculation formula Modbus Calculation result 85h OFh binary DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 5 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Conversion Type The BCC calculation result is converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 0041h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data posa Moogin 4 Note On WindLDR Modbus ASCII is defaulted to i Binary to ASCII conversion 34h 31h binary to ASCII conversion NL 2 digits 2 No conversion ASCII data germs i NUL A Note On WindLDR Modbus RTU is defaulted to no No conversion 00h 41h convers
169. result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M15 is moved to output Q14 6 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS sotu H IBMV S1 S2 D1 D2 REP 10 D10 5 D20 12 Since source device S1 is a data register and the value of source device 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 54 32 1 0 S2 is 5 the source data is bit 5 of data register D10 assigned by source D10 L device S1 Bit 5 Since destination device D1 is a data register and the value of source device D2 is 12 the destination is bit 12 of data register D20 assigned by destination device D1 Bti5 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 54 3 2 As a result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of data register D10 D20 m bit 5 is moved to data register D20 bit 12 Bit 12 Repeat Operation in the Indirect Bit Move Instructions Repeat Bit Devices Source and Destination If a repeat operation is set for bit devices such as input output internal relay or shift register as many bit devices as the repeat cycles are moved 10 5 00 9 Repeat 3 11 Since source device S1 is internal relay M10 and the value of source M27 M20 M17 M45 M10 device S2 is 5 the source data is 3 internal relays start
170. rotation D20 16387 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 MSB D20 LSB After second rotation 020 53248 1101400 00 00 00 0 0100 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word SOTU Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D20 021 is rotated to ROTR D 51 bits the right by 1 bit as assigned by device bits D20 1 The last bit status rotated out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Bits to rotate lt 1 Before rotation D20 D21 851 981 MSB 020 021 LSB gt 10101010101000100010111110111010100101010101010101011111011 7 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation D20 D21 2 147 909 638 MSB 020 021 158 1000000010001010111110111010010101010101001010111110 1 M8003 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 11 IDEC 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS 10 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data conversion instructions convert data to binary BCD and ASCII format The ENCO encode DECO decode and BCNT bit count instructions processes bit device data The ALT alternate output instruction turns an output
171. setting 00001 1 The value of the data register is 100000001 binary 257 decimal When configured to turn on the output on December 31st December 31st Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Month setting 1100 12 Day setting 11111 31 The value of the data register is 110000011111 binary 3103 decimal When configured to turn on the output on the 1st Monday of January 1st Monday of January Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting Bit 15 14 13 12 11 Bit Bit Bit 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 po o o o ojojoj jojo o oj1 ojo 1 Month setting 0001 1 January Week setting 001 1 ist Day of the week setting 001 1 Monday The value of the data register is 100001001 binary 265 decimal When configured to turn on the output on the 4th Thursday of June 4th Thursday of June Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting Bit 15 14 12 11 Bit Bit Bit 13 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 Month setting 0110 6 June Week setting 100 4 4th Day of the week setting 100 4 Thursday The value of the data register is 11000100100 binar
172. step number 1 1 to 6 step Interrupt step number D0000 6 1 to 6 step OK Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Reversible control enable Disable The number of steps 6 Start number 1 Step 1 Interrupt number DO 6 Step 6 Step 1 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 Steady pulse frequency D0002 500 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Es change time D0003 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms ep Preset value 00004 00005 100000 1 to 100 000 000 Step 4 ad Control direction D0006 Step 5 Acceleration deceleration contral D0006 Acceleration deceleration later sms Next step number D0007 2 0 to 6 step Go Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D2 500 5 kHz Frequency change time D3 5000 5 000 ms Preset value D4 D5 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction D6 Timing of change D6 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D7 2 Step 2 19 50 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Step 2 settings 19 PuLsE OuTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Pulse Output with Table 3757 Devices Settings Ramp Table S
173. stored in the designated data register is converted and the assigned quantity of digits of the resultant data is transmitted The conversion types that are available are Binary to ASCII BCD to ASCII and no conversion When repeat is designated data of data registers as many as the repeat cycles are transmitted starting with the designated data register Repeat cycles can be up to 99 Conversion Type The transmit data is converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example D10 stores 000Ch 12 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data vo 0 D10 000Ch Binary to ASCII conversion 30h 30h 30h 43h When transmitting 4 digits 2 BCD to ASCII conversion ASCII data VT WISWISTT 010 000Ch 0012 Decimal value 1000 BCD to ASCII conversion 30h 30h 30h 31h 32h When transmitting 5 digits 3 No conversion ASCII data NUL FF Di Ch PERSE No conversion N When transmitting 2 digits n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 3 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Digits Bytes After conversion the transmit data is taken out in specified digits Possible digits depend on the selected conversion type Example D10 stores 010Ch 268 1 Binary to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 2 ASCII
174. the configured preset value Pulse output continues even if an the Starting Overflow 0 None overflow occurs during steady output or while the pulse number 3 1 An overflow has occurred frequency is changing However pulse counting is suspended at the point when the overflow occurred Setting tab Ramp Pulse Output 9 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode 5 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Steady pulse frequency 6 100 1to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Initial pulse frequency 7 100 1to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz Frequency change time 8 100 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable 9 Disabled Control direction 10 Preset value 11 100000000 1 to 100 000 000 Current value 12 1 to 100 000 000 Error status 13 5 Operation mode This setting selects the frequency range to output from the following operation modes Select the operation mode according to the steady pulse frequency and the initial pulse frequency used Operation mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz increments of 1 Hz Note 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz increments of 10 Hz Note Note The output frequency error is within 5 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 17 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 6 Steady pulse frequency This setting specifies the steady pulse frequency after the pulse frequency increases For operation mode 0 set the frequency in t
175. the SmartAXIS modules e The SmartAXIS contains electronic parts and batteries When disposing of the SmartAXIS do so in accordance lt gt with national and local regulations O DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Preface 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This user s manual describes basic and advanced instructions and the usage of software for SmartAXIS ladder programming Chapter 1 Operation Basics General information about simple operating procedures from creating a user program using WindLDR on a computer to monitoring the SmartAXIS operation Chapter 2 Ladder Program Monitoring on the SmartAXIS Monitoring the ladder program in the SmartAXIS Chapter 3 Device Addresses Device addresses available for the SmartAXIS to program basic and advanced instructions Special internal relays and special data registers are also described Chapter 4 Instructions Reference List of all basic and advanced instructions and general rules of using advanced instructions terms data types and formats used for advanced instructions Chapter 5 Basic Instructions Programming of the basic instructions available devices and sample programs Chapter 6 through Chapter 26 Detailed descriptions for advanced instructions Appendix Additional information about execution times and byte sizes for instructions Index Alphabetical listing of key words Publication history March 2013 First Edition August 2013 Second Edition October 2013 Third E
176. the desired output will be initiated When a counter comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a counter comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the CC or CC gt instruction a counter number CO through C199 followed by a preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D1999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram CC Program List Counter to compare with Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram CC gt The CC and gt instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values e The comparison instructions only compare the current value The status of the counter does not affect this function e The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram CC C5 10 IO Q0 Program List Program List Program List 5 5 18 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples CC and CC gt Counter Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Instruction
177. the preset The counter output is turned on The preset value is changed to 0 The counter output is turned on without regard to the current value When the reset input is on the preset value is changed to 0 5 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 The counter output is not turned on CUD Up Down Selection Reversible Counter 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS The up down selection reversible counter CUD has a selection input to switch the up down gate so the three inputs are required The circuit for an up down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input pulse input up down selection input the CUD instruction and a counter number CO through C199 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Preset Input IO Pulse Input I1 U D Selection 12 4 I3 Timing Chart Preset Input IO Pulse Input I1 U D Selection Input I2 Counter C2 Value Counter C2 Program List Instruction Data ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 500 501 502 501 500 499 eee 0 1 500 500 ON OFF Valid Pulse Inputs The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input One scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off and the counter starts
178. to 0 turning on the carry M8003 Decrement beyond Limits When the S D value is at its minimum and is decremented by one the value returns to its maximum value word or double word data or to 1 integer or long data turning on the internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Example INC E Example DEC INQW S D D10 D10 100 1 10 101 When input IO is turned on the data of D10 is incremented by one If SOTU is not programmed the data of D10 is incremented in each scan DEC W S D D20 D20 100 1 gt D20 99 When input I1 is turned on the data of D20 is decremented by one If SOTU is not programmed the data of D20 is decremented in each scan DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 13 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS ROOT Root Data type W 51 ROOT S1 D1 51 PUES n When input is on the square root of the device assigned by S1 is extracted and stored to the destination assigned by D1 The square root is calculated to two decimals omitting the figures below the second place of decimals and multiplied by 100 ate type D 51 51 1 D1 D1 1 When input is on the square root of the device assigned by S1 S1 1 is extracted and is stored to the destination assigned by 01 01 1 The square root is calculated to two decimal
179. used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D991 and D1000 to D1991 The contents of the monitor registers are read only Address Description Value range unit Starting number 0 Next step number 0 to 18 Starting number 1 Running step number 1 to 18 Mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz mode 1 20 to 10 000 Startin 2 Stead Ise freque onito arting number ady pulse frequency monitor increments of 10 Hz Starting number 3 Frequency change time monitor 10 to 10 000 ms Starting number 4 Preset val High word Note M ee Hig J Mote 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 5 monitor Low word Note Starting number 6 High word Note Current value 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 7 Low word Note Starting number 8 Error status 0to9 Note The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32 bit data storage method specified For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Next step This register stores the number of the step to execute next If the next step is 0 pulse output ends after the currently executed step is complete Running step This register stores the number of the step that is currently being executed Steady pulse frequency monitor This register stores the steady pulse frequency for the step that is currently being executed Frequency change time monitor T
180. used in a user program counters cannot be used in any other counter instructions Counter Device Address Preset Value CNTD double word adding counter to C198 Constant 0 to 4 294 967 295 CDPD double word dual pulse reversible counter CO to C198 Data registers DO to 0998 D1000 to D1998 CUDD double word up down selection reversible counter CO to C198 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 The preset value can be 0 through 4 294 967 295 and designated using a constant or a data register If a data register is designated as the preset value two consecutive data registers are used CNTD Double Word Adding Counter When double word adding counter instructions are programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a double word adding UP counter must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input the CNTD instruction and a counter number CO through C198 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 4 294 967 295 The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register When a data register is used the double word data of two consecutive data registers becomes the preset value For 32 bit data storage setting see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Ladder Diagram Program List e Double word counter instructions use two consecutive counters Reset au C and co
181. using a bit device such as input output internal relay or shift register Timer and counter can also be used as an input condition to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the counter counts out While the input condition is on the advanced instruction is executed in each scan To execute the advanced instruction MOV W S1 Di REP only at the rising or falling edge of the input use the SOTU or IO D10 D20 SOTD instruction While the input condition is off the advanced instruction is not executed and device statuses are held Source and Destination Devices The source and destination devices specify 16 or 32 bit data depending on the selected data type When a bit device such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as a source or destination device 16 or 32 points starting with the designated number are processed as source or destination data When a word device such as timer or counter is designated as a source device the current value is read as source data When a timer or counter is designated as a destination device the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter When a data register is designated as a source or destination device the data is read from or written to the designated data register Using Timer or Counter as Source Device Since all timer instructions TML 1 sec timer TIM 100 ms timer TMH 10 ms timer and TMS 1 ms timer subtrac
182. x x x x x x x x gt lt X X X X X X Xx gt lt x X X x x x x x X x 15 x x x x x x x x x g x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Z x x x x x x x x OK x x x x x x x T x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x g x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x g x x x x x x x x x x x x x x xx X X X X X X X X X gt lt lt X X OK OK 0X OK OK X X lt OK OK X X X Note MSG instructions can be used with Pro series only IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 7 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Group Pulse Symbol PULS1 FT1A 12 AC DC FT1A 24 AC DC AC FT1A 40 DC X AC FT1A 48 DC FT1A Touch PULS2 X x lt PULS3 X Note1 gt lt gt lt PULS4 X Note1 PWM1 X PWM2 X PWM3 X Note1 x x x Xx PWM4 X Note1 RAMP1 X X X RAMP2 X Note2 X X Note2 Note2 ZRN1 X X X ZRN2 X X X ARAMP1 X
183. 0 3 402823 38 2012 02 06 10 20 50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 7 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS TRACE Data Trace F 51 Di The TRACE instruction saves the values for the previous number of scans for the specified device in the specified data format as a CSV file on the SD memory card When the input is turned on the date and time and the values of the previous scans for the specified device are output to the CSV file in the folder assigned by S1 When the execution of the instruction finishes the device assigned by D1 is turned on and the execution status is stored to the device assigned by D2 When the folder assigned by S1 does not exist on the SD memory card that folder is created The folder path is DATAO001YTRACE User specified folder For details on the folder structure see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual The CSV file name is DATE csv The date when the TRACE instruction is turned on is used as DATE Example If the date is September 30 2011 the file name is 20110930 csv When a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1 the CSV file is created and the trace data is output The oldest data is output at the top of the trace data and the latest data is output at the bottom of the trace data Output example
184. 0 10 0 1 8003 Shift to the left After shift cy MSB 011 010 LSB 1 11 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 M8003 10 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS SFTR Shift Right S1 CY H SFTR 51 52 N_B Bits When input is on N_B bit data string starting with source device S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity of bits assigned by device Bits The result is set to source device S1 and the last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zero or 1 assigned by source device S2 is set to the MSB e S2 0 16 Bits 1 52 MSB S1 LSB Before shift 0 gt 11001111101110111110 0110 Shift to the right M8003 MSB S1 LSB cY After shift 01001111101101110011 0 M8003 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First data for bit shift X A X X S2 Source 2 Data to shift into the MSB X X X X Oori N_B Number of bits in the data string X 1 65535 Bits Quantity of bits to shift X 1 15 For valid device address ranges see Chapter 5 Special Functions Device Addresses in the SmartAXIS Tou
185. 0 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable Dual pulse output Control direction D0003 Forward Preset value D0004 D0005 1000000 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0006 D0007 1to 100 000 000 Error status D0008 Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency DO 3000 30 Hz Initial pulse frequency Di 1000 10 kHz Frequency change time D2 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Dual pulse output Control direction D3 Forward Forward 0 Preset value D4 D5 1000000 Preset value 1 000 000 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 25 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ZRN Zero Return 51 52 53 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 Di The ZRN instruction outputs pulses while the proximity signal is off When the input is on pulses of the initial pulse frequency specified by S1 and 51 1 are output until the proximity signal specified by S3 turns on When the proximity signal turns on pulses of the creep pulse frequency specified by 51 2 and S143 are output until the proximity signal turns off When the proximity signal turns off pulse output stops Note The ZRN instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on s
186. 0 3 D10 110 D20 110 D11 111 D21 111 D12 112 022 110 m D13 113 D23 111 D14 114 024 110 D15 115 D25 111 Repeat Source and Destination Devices When both S1 source and D1 destination are set to repeat as many devices as the repeat cycles starting with the device designated by S1 are moved to the same quantity of devices starting with the device designated by D1 Note The BMOV block move instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with both the source and destination designated to repeat Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W 51 DIR REP gt D10 D20 3 D10 110 D20 110 Dii 111 gt D21 111 012 12 gt 022 112 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 6 3 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Double Word H MOV D SIR DIR REP Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 I6 D10 D20 3 D10 110 n D20 110 Dii 111 021 111 D12 112 r D22 112 D13 113 E D23 113 D14 114 D24 114 D15 115 025 115 e Data Type Float When the source data does not comply with the normal floating point format in any repeat operation a user program
187. 00 could be assigned first as YO and the point 100 0 could be defined next as X1 Y1 In this case this linear relationship would have priority In this case if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 180 not 60 17 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 18 AVERAGE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Average instructions average the specified data AVRG Average H When input is on sampling data assigned by device S1 is processed according to sampling conditions assigned by devices S2 and S3 When sampling is complete average maximum and minimum values are stored to 3 consecutive devices starting with device assigned by D1 then sampling completion output assigned by device D2 is turned on AVRG 51 52 53 Di D2 Data 1 D L F Average Di 0101 1 01 1 01 2 01 3 Minimum value 01 2 01 4 01 5 The AVRG instruction is effective for data processing of analog input values A maximum of eight AVRG instructions can be programmed in a user program Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Sampling data X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Sampling end input X X X X S3 Source 3 Sampling cycles scan times X X X X X X X 0 65535
188. 00 000 000 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 11 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Examples PWM PWM 1 instruction pulse counting enabled timing chart PWM1 instruction S1 is specified as D200 D1 is specified as internal relay M50 PWM1 instruction input PWM1 instruction input ni n2 gs wl 2 Output pulse Q14 Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 w1 w2 w3 pulse width ratio n1 n2 n3 output pulse count When the PWM1 instruction input changes from off to on M50 turns on and pulses with the width ratio configured by D201 are output When the number of pulses configured by D202 and D203 are output pulse output stops If the value of D201 changes during pulse output pulses are output with the width ratio based on that value When the PWM1 instruction input changes from on to off M50 turns off and M51 turns on at the same time The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PWM1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input 19 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZIDEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS PWM instruction pulse counting disabled timing chart PWM2 instruction S1 is specified as D100 D1 is specified as internal relay M200 S1 D100 52 0200 Di M200 PWM2 ins
189. 000 19 18 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 12 Current value The number of pulses output from the pulse output port is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the RAMP instruction is executed at each scan 13 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the RAMP instruction input changes from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and this register is set to the error code Error code Description 0 Normal 2 Initial pulse frequency designation The initial pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 error The initial pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100 000 000 Steady pulse frequency The steady pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 designation error The steady pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 Frequency change time 5 The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10 000 designation error 7 Control direction designation error The control direction was not set to 0 or 1 The number of frequency change pulses exceed the total number of output pulses 8 Exceeded pulse count error y 1 9 The initial pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse fre
190. 000 PWM3 Q16 1 to 100 1 to 50 Hz increments of 1 51 to 1 000 Hz increments of pulse Disable pulse counting PWM4 Q17 frequency 50 2 S1 source 1 Control register S1 specifies the starting number for the data registers to use with PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 or PWM4 instructions Starting from the specified number 7 consecutive 16 bit data registers are used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D993 and D1000 to D1993 Storage destination Setting Function Starting number 0 Output pulse frequency 1 to 1 000 increments of 1 Hz Reference 5 Output pulse frequency on page 19 10 Starting number 1 Pulse duty cycle ON ratio 1 to 100 6 Pulse width ratio on page 19 10 Starting number 2 Starting number 3 Preset value high word Note 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Preset value low word Note 8 Preset value on page 19 11 Starting number 4 Starting number 5 Current value high word Note 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Current value low word Note 9 Current value on page 19 11 Starting number 6 Error status 0to4 10 Error status on page 19 11 Note The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32 bit data storage method specified For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input S2 specifies the initializa
191. 000 8177 8000 0 8199 15 120 141 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Data registers can be used as bit devices with the data register number and the bit position separated by a period Note For restrictions on ladder programming of OUT and OUTN instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 1 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Multiple OUT and OUTN There is no limit to the number of OUT and OUTN instructions that can be programmed Ladder Diagram into one rung I 12 Programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended However if doing so it is good practice to separate the outputs with the JMP JEND set of instructions or the MCS MCR set of instructions These instructions are detailed later in this chapter Ladder Diagram ON When the same output number is programmed more than once within one scan the output nearest to the END instruction is given priority for outputting In the example on the right output QO is off 5 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples LOD Load OUT Output and NOT Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart 10 Q0 n 01 Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 00 01 Ladder Diagram Program List E Q2 Ladder Diagram Program List IO QO
192. 000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 2012 02 06 10 20 30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 2012 02 06 10 20 40 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 2012 02 06 10 20 50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 The sample user program described below operates as follows e M100 is turned on when the transfer of log data has finished transferring to the SD memory card is complete e The DLOG instruction status code is stored in D100 e The status code saved in D100 is checked and QO is turned on if an error occurs e Configuration Procedure 1 Insert the instructions in the Ladder editor DLOG 51 Di D2 RESULT M100 D100 CMP lt gt W 51 S2 Di D100 0 Qo 2 Configure the DLOG instruction Configure the Devices tab 1 Designate M100 as D1 Completion Output 2 Designate D100 as D2 Execution Status DLOG Data Logging E377 Devices Settings 1 2 D1 Completion Output D2 Execution Status Tag Name 0100 Device Address 0100 Comment Camel 26 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 26 DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS Configure the Settings tab 3 Enter RESULT in S1 Folder Name 4 Configure DO to output the decimal value of DO to the CSV files with the data type W word 5 Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of DO through D5 to the CSV files 6 Configure D10 to output the decimal value of D10 t
193. 000 ms 5 000 ms 52 53 Di D2 MO M100 D20 M50 Step 4 Step 5 Preset value 1 000 000 Preset value 100 000 r Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time 8 000 ms 8 000 ms When I2 turns on the initialization input MO is turned on and the ARAMP instruction control register values are initialized When the ARAMP instruction input I0 turns on pulse output starts When I1 turns on the interrupt input M100 is turned on and the interrupt step is executed SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 49 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Basic settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table 9 Devices Settings Ramp Table 1 Q0014 S1 Control Register 52 Initialization Input 53 Interrupt Input 01 Monitor Register D2 OperationStatus Tag Name D0000 La 000 s Mo100 D0020 Mooso Device Address D0000 M0000 2 Comment ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ea Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Reversible control enable Disabled S 1 Number of steps 6 1to 18 steps Start
194. 00006 00007 00008 END Note The LCD resolution number of pixels differs between the SmartAXIS Pro and the SmartAXIS Touch but the content of the ladder program display screen is the same excluding the display area for the SmartAXIS Touch operation buttons This chapter describes the operations using the LCD display on the SmartAXIS Pro When using the SmartAXIS Touch read this manual taking into consideration that the operation button display area is omitted Starting the Ladder Program Monitoring The way to start the ladder program monitor differs between the SmartAXIS Pro and the SmartAXIS Touch For the SmartAXIS Pro see Chapter 6 HMI Function Monitoring the Program in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual and start the ladder program monitoring For the SmartAXIS Touch see Chapter 24 Monitor Functions 2 3 Ladder Program Monitor Ladder Monitor in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual and start the ladder program monitoring When the ladder program monitor is started the ladder line selection screen is displayed When the ladder line is specified the ladder program including the specified line is displayed Ladder line selection screen gt Last Monitored Line a gj BE i Go To X 10000 1 510 90500 00002 0
195. 0034 Decimal value BCD to ASCII conversion 2 Repeat cycles 3 ASCII data T T van 757 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h Repeat 1 D10 000Ch gt 00012 Repeat 2 D11 0022h 00034 Repeat 3 D12 0038h gt 1 00056 Decimal value BCD to ASCII conversion 25 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Block Check Character Block check characters can be appended to the transmit data The start position for the BCC calculation can be selected from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC can be 1 or 2 digits 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th ee 7 calculation start position can be selected from this range i BCC 2 digits BCC calculation range when starting with the 1st byte of the data BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the transmit data Example Transmit data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start position 1 ist 2nd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 ist 2nd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation
196. 004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned If S2 or D2 is not assigned the source or destination device is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid device range If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 When you specify D0000 to D0999 as S1 make sure that 51 52 does not exceed D0999 In order to specify D1000 to D1999 as source device with 51 52 specify D1000 to D1999 as 51 When you specify D0000 to D0999 as D1 make sure that D1 D2 does not exceed D0999 In order to specify D1000 to D1999 as destination device with D1 D2 specify D1000 to D1999 as D1 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer or destination 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a bit D double word X device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as
197. 01 Q0004 00006 10002 00007 10003 CUD 00008 END 2 Press the 4 amp 1 down button once The cursor moves one line down 00001 90900 10000 SOTU 2 1 1 1 LT o 0000 1 M0001 1 M0002 M0003 M0004 0005 MOO06 M0007 MO010 0011 00001 M0012 M0013 M0014 M0015 Q0002 M0000 M0002 M0003 M0004 00004 00002 HE H PL H C0000 Q0003 00005 10001 90004 00006 10002 00007 10003 CUD 00008 END 3 Press the gt right button four times The ladder program display screen moves right one instruction 00001 won i 10000 9077 00000 SOTU aub 00002 iL e 13280 34 0000 1 0001 0002 MOO03 0004 0005 MOO06 0007 0010 0011 00001 0002 4 HK KE m M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 M0012 M0013 M0014 M0015 00002 00004 0000 Q003 00005 10001 90004 00006 10002 00007 10003 CUD 00008 END 4 Press the amp 1 down button once The ladder program display screen moves down one line 00002 H FP 4 4 1 MOOO1 M0002 M0003 M0004 M0005 M0000 MO001 0002 M0003 ne inii S 00003 H 1 M0013 M001
198. 014 1 2 3 4 S1 Control Register 52 Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus Tag Name _ Device Address Comment Cancel 1 Select instruction This item selects which PULS instruction to use PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 or PULS4 The pulse output configurable operation modes and enabling disabling pulse counting varies based on the instruction Instruction Pulse output Configurable operation mode Enable disable pulse counting PULS1 Q14 Operation mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Pulse counting can be enabled or disabled PULS2 Q15 Operation mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Pulse counting range 1 to 100 000 000 PULS3 Q16 Operation mode 0 1 Hz to 5 kHz Disable pulse counting PULS4 Q17 2 S1 source 1 Control register S1 specifies the starting number for the data registers to use with PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 or PULSA instructions Starting from the specified number 7 consecutive 16 bit data registers are used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D993 and D1000 to D1993 Faris un Function Setting Reference PULS1 Mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz Output pulse PULS2 Mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 6 Output pulse frequency on frequency PULS3 Mode 0 1 to 5 000 increments of 1 Hz page 19 3 PULS4 Mode 1 Cannot be specified Starting number 1 Reserved Starting number 0 Preset value Starting number 2 high word Note
199. 03 Pushbutton Data Type Integer ADD I Si 52 Di REP D10 4 020 1 gt D30 15 10 010 D20 D30 Data Type Double Word ADD D Si S2 D1 REP 10 D10 D20 D30 010 011 1957400 020 021 4112600 030 031 6070000 e Data Long ADD L S1 52 D1 REP 10 D10 D20 D30 010 011 216283 020 021 964355 030 031 748072 e Data Type Float ADD F S1 52 01 10 D10 D20 D30 010 011 1 414 020 021 3 14 D30 D31 4 554 Example SUB Data Word The following example demonstrates the use of special internal relay M8003 to process a borrow SUB W S1 S2 Di REP D12 7000 D12 Due um D12 Borrow is processed so that the number of times a borrow occurs is subtracted from D13 SUB W 51 52 Di D13 1 D13 When a borrow occurs D13 is decremented by one M8003 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 3 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples MUL Data Word
200. 04 D105 4584557 4 D201 3 Quantity of matches D106 D107 12345678 6 match D108 D109 12345678 8 match 0110 0111 1234457 e Data Type Float E NDSRC F 51 52 53 Di D10 D100 010 011 0 4521 Search D98 D99 Offset D100 D101 0 D102 D103 2 Result 0200 6 Offset of first match D104 D105 4 D201 1 Quantity of matches D106 D107 6 match D108 D109 8 0110 0111 23 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS Introduction TADD time addition and TSUB time subtraction instructions add or subtract time data in two different modes The data can be selected from time hour minute and second or date time year month day day of week hour minute and second HTOS HMS to sec and STOH sec to HMS instructions perform conversion of time data between hours minutes seconds and seconds HOUR hour meter instruction measures the on duration of the input and compares the total duration to a preset value When the preset value is reached an output or internal relay is turned on TADD Time Addition H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 S2 D1 CY When input is on time data assigned by source device S2 are added to date time data assigned by source device S1 depending on the selected mode The result is stored to destination device D1 and carry M8003 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A
201. 06 User Program Execution Error Code When error occurred 3 12 D8007 Reserved D8008 Year Every 500 ms 3 12 D8009 Month Every 500 ms 3 12 D8010 Calendar Clock Day Every 500 ms 3 12 D8011 Current Data Day of Week Every 500 ms 3 12 D8012 Read only Hour Every 500 ms 3 12 D8013 Minute Every 500 ms 3 12 D8014 Second Every 500 ms 3 12 D8015 Year 3 12 D8016 Month 3 12 D8017 Calendar Clock Day EE D8018 New Data Day of Week 3 12 D8019 Write only Hour 3 12 D8020 Minute 3 12 D8021 Second 3 12 Constant Scan Time Preset Value D8022 1 to 1 000 ms B 2 D8023 He Tine Scan Time Current Value ms Every scan 3 12 D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value ms At occurrence 3 12 D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value ms At occurrence 3 12 D8026 Communication Mode Information Port 2 and Port 3 Every scan 3 13 D8027 Port 2 Slave Number Every scan 3 13 D8028 Port 3 Slave Number Every scan 3 13 D8029 System Software Version Power up 3 13 D8030 Communication Adapter Information Power up 3 13 D8031 Optional Cartridge Information Power up 3 13 D8032 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No IO 3 14 D8033 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No I2 3 14 D8034 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No I3 3 14 D8035 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No I5 3 14 D8036 Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No 3 14 D8037 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No I6 3 14 D8038 Interrupt I
202. 1 1 D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 9 When input is on the 16 or 32 bit binary data assigned by S1 is converted into BCD and converted into ASCII data The data is read from the lowest digit as many times as the quantity of digits assigned by S2 The result is stored to the destination starting with the device assigned by D1 BTOA 51 52 Di The number of digits that can be converted is 1 through 5 for word data and 1 through 10 for double word data Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1 5 1 10 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed The number of digits that can be converted is 1 through 5 for word data and 1 through 10 for double word data Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 S2 1 is within the valid d
203. 1 Advanced Ramp 1 19 32 ARAMP2 Advanced Ramp 2 19 32 DTML 1 sec Dual Timer 20 1 DTIM 100 ms Dual Timer 20 1 DTMH 10 ms Dual Timer 20 1 DTMS 1 ms Dual Timer 20 1 TTIM Teaching Timer 20 3 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC Group Trigonometric Function Logarithm Power File Data Processing Clock Ethernet Instructions Data Logging Script PID IDEC Valid Data Type 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Symbol Name See Page W I Degree to Radian X 21 1 DEG Radian to Degree X 21 2 SIN Sine X 21 3 COS Cosine X 21 4 TAN Tangent X 21 5 ASIN Arc Sine X 21 6 ACOS Arc Cosine X 21 7 ATAN Arc Tangent X 21 8 LOGE Natural Logarithm X 22 1 LOG10 Common Logarithm X 22 2 EXP Exponent X 22 3 POW Power X 22 4 FIFOF FIFO Format X 23 1 FIEX First In Execute X 23 3 FOEX First Out Execute X 23 3 NDSRC N Data Search X X X Xx 23 5 TADD Time Addition 24 1 TSUB Time Subtraction 24 5 HTOS HMS to Sec 24 9 STOH Sec to HMS 24 10 HOUR Hour Meter 24 11 ETXD Transmit over Ethernet 25 21 ERXD Receive over Ethernet 25 21 DLOG Data Logging 26 1 TRACE Data Trace 26 8 SCRPT Script X X X Xx 27 1 PID PID 28 1 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 5 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS Applicable advanced instructions depend on the SmartAXIS type as listed in the table below Group
204. 1 Auto manual mode R W 1 ON Manual 342 Output manipulated variable 0 OFF Disabled R W limit enable 1 ON Enabled operates with S1 14 15 settings 53 3 High alarm output Turns on when process variable 51 0 gt high alarm value S1 3 R 53 4 Low alarm output Turns on when process variable 51 0 x low alarm value S1 4 R 53 5 Control output Turns on and off according to the control period and output manipulated variable R Starts auto tuni hen execute auto tuning is turned on 346 AT execution arts au uning when execu uning is turi i R W Stops auto tuning if execute auto tuning is turned off while auto tuning is executed S3 7 AT complete output Turns on after auto tuning ends R S3 8 to S3415 Reserved Operation action 53 0 In direct control action PID instruction operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is higher than the set point Cooling equipment uses this operation In reverse control action PID instruction operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is lower than the set point Heating furnaces uses this operation Output manipulated Output manipulated variable variable Set Point Set Point 100 100 0 0 P Process variable q gt Process variable Proportional Band Proportional Band Direct control action Reverse control action Auto manual mode S
205. 1 Hz 13 Steady pulse Starting number 2 Ste Ise frequen arting number ady pulse frequency Mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz frequency on page 19 38 14 Frequency change Startin ber 3 Freque hange time 10 to 10 000 ms arting number requency change ti 0 00 time on page 19 38 Starting number 4 Preset value high word Note 15 Preset value on e i hig Note to 100 000 000 pulses cc Starting number 5 Preset value low word Note 19 38 Starting number 6 Step options 0 103 I6 Step options on pags 19 38 17 Next step number on Starting number 7 Next step number 1 to 18 number page 19 38 Note The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32 bit data storage method specified For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 33 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Step 2 6 words Storage destination Function Setting Reference Mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz 13 Steady pulse Starting number Stead Ise freque iid ibi Mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz frequency on page 19 38 17 Next step number on Starti 13 Next st b 1101 arting number ext step number 18 page 19 38 Step N 6 words Mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz 13 Steady pulse Starting number 2 N x 6
206. 101 coooooooah SUM W S1 ADD DO E 2 Di oo02h 3 02 4 03 ooo4h 261 1276 DO 0105h 0100 parCh SUM W 51 XOR DO 758 Di 02F6h 775 02 0307h 1032 03 o40gh Operation DO 0105h 0000 0001 0000 0101 Di 02F6h 0000 0010 1111 0110 D2 0307h 0000 0011 0000 0111 XOR D3 0408h 0000 0100 0000 1000 D100 04FCh 0000 0100 1111 1100 8 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Integer E 500 4566 DO Egg 71002101 SUM I Si S2 Di ADD DO 25 D1 0919h 4095 D2 Fop1h 4 D3 o094h e Data Type Double Word E 100000 1000000 0001 000186 D100D101 8 000 42401 SUM D Si S2 Di ADD DO 200000 0203 00030040 300000 0405 000493E0h 400000 0607 00061 80 e Data Long 500000 10253086 D0 Di 85 gt 0100 0101 FF638CE2h SUM L Si S2 Di ADD DO
207. 17 18 19 20 11 15 16 17 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 Data Register Allocation Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program 51 52 53 D1 1 00 12 24 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on output QO only on the 2nd Monday of each month from 2000 to 2099 xxx January February March April xx s A ON date 2000 2nd Monday el i Ta eR ppseecssos OFF date 2099 2nd Monday 1 day 5 7o din Yearly ON 4 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd Monthly ON Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday 1 1 1 1 Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer gt a Devices P1 ON settings ILI Year 2000 Month and Day Settings Month Day 1 Day of the week Monday End of month OFF settings Year 299 E Wie 3 Specify ON duration 18 Preview Year 20 2013 2013 March 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr 5 3 1234 5 1 2 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 5 16 17 18 19 10 1 2 13 14 15 16 10 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27
208. 19 54 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 20 DUAL TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Dual timer instructions generate ON OFF pulses of required durations from a designated output internal relay or shift register bit Four dual timers are available and the ON OFF duration can be selected from 1 ms up to 65535 sec Teaching timer instruction measures the ON duration of the start input for the teaching timer instruction and stores the measured data to a designated data register which can be used as a preset value for a timer instruction DTML 1 sec Dual Timer H DTIM 100 ms Dual Timer E DTMH 10 ms Dual Timer H DTMS 1 ms Dual Timer H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 52 Di 02 51 52 Di 02 51 52 Di 02 51 52 Di 02 1 12 1 24 X X While input is on destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a duration assigned by devices S1 and S2 respectively When the input is off D1 turns off The time range is 0 through 65535 sec While input is on destination device D1 repeats to turn on and off for a duration assigned by devices S1 and S2 respectively When the input is off D1 turns off
209. 1h D101 0032h 25 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Block Check Character The SmartAXIS has an automatic BCC calculation function to detect a communication error in incoming data If a BCC code is designated in the receive format of a RXD instruction the SmartAXIS calculates a BCC value for a specified starting position through the position immediately preceding the BBC It then compares the calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC can be 1 or 2 digits When an end delimiter is not used in the RXD instruction the BCC code must be positioned at the end of the receive format designated in Source 1 device When an end delimiter is used the BCC code must be immediately before or after the end delimiter The SmartAXIS reads a specified number of BCC digits in the incoming data according to the receive format to calculate and compare the received BCC code with the BCC calculation results BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the receive data Example Received data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start p
210. 1h 32h 33h 03h End delimiter End of receiving data D100 n The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter is not stored to a data register Any data arriving after the end delimiter is discarded 25 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 3 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and one byte BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 as the first data register 27 ETX BCC 31h 32h 03h Code End delimiter End of receiving data D101 gt D100 n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter and BCC code are not stored to data registers After receiving the end delimiter the SmartAXIS receives only the one byte BCC code Constant for Verification Constants excluding start and end delimiters can be configured in the receive format to verify the incoming data with the constants which are either characters or hexadecimal values As many constants can be configured for the verification as required The verification result is stored in the receive status of the RXD instruction Example Programming Constant for Verification The following example shows the advan
211. 2 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Single pulse output Control direction D3 Forward Forward 0 Preset value D4 05 100000 Preset value 100 000 19 24 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec To output 1 000 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control by dual pulse output 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS When the RAMP instruction input I0 changes from off to on pulse output starts For forward when I1 is off pulses CW are output from Q14 For reverse when I1 is on pulses CCW are output from Q15 MOWW S1 MOWW S1 1 D3 0 D3 Di starts REP RAMP Ramp Pulse Output Le e Devices Settings RAMP 1 Q0014 51 Control Register 52 Initialization Input Tag Name 01 Status Turn on initialization input MO When the RAMP instruction input IO turns on pulse output When I1 is off store 0 forward in control direction D3 When I1 is on store 1 reverse in control direction D3 D0000 0100 Device Address 0000 000 mo100 Comment RAMP Ramp Pulse Output Le Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency D0000 3000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 100
212. 2 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Arc tangent value to convert into radian X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ATAN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types 7 Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long m F float X Example ATAN When input I1 is turned on the arc tangent of the value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 atan 0 4142136 0 3926992 rad 0 3926992 rad 7 8 rad ATAN F Si D1 Dio D20 51 Di 010 011 0 4142136 p20 D21 0 3926992 21 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 22 LOGARITHM
213. 2 status M8072 Interrupt input status M8073 Interrupt input I5 status M8074 Interrupt input I6 status M8075 Interrupt input I7 status M8076 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag Access to the SD memory card stops when M8076 is turned from off to on M8080 M8085 Interrupt Input Edge ON Rising OFF Falling This flag indicates whether the interrupt input is triggered with a rising edge or falling edge M8090 M8095 Catch Input ON OFF Status When a rising or falling input edge is detected during a scan the input statuses of catch inputs Group 1 10 through Group 6 17 at the moment are set to M8090 through M8095 respectively without regard to the scan status Only one edge is detected in one scan For the catch input function see Chapter 5 Special Functions Catch Input in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8100 M8102 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag When M8100 M8101 or M8102 is turned on all ERXD instructions ready for receiving user communication through connection 1 connection 2 or connection 3 are disabled respectively M8110 M8112 Connection Status When SmartAXIS and a network device are connected via the maintenance communication server user communication server client or Modbus TCP server client the connection status turns on When no network devices are connected the connection status turns off These relays are always off for the 12 I O type SmartAXIS without Ethernet port 3 6 SMARTAXIS LAD
214. 20 030 S1 S2 Di 010 011 4 0 020 021 1 25 30 031 5 656856 22 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 j DEC 23 FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS Introduction File data processing instructions implement the first in first out FIFO data structure FIFOF FIFO Format instructions initialize the FIFO data files storing the data FIEX First In Execute instructions store new data to the FIFO data files and FOEX First Out Execute instructions retrieve the stored data from the FIFO data files The first data to be stored to the FIFO data files by FIEX instructions will be the first data to be retrieved by FOEX instructions NDSRC N Data Search instructions search a designated value through a specified range FIFOF FIFO Format When input is on FIFOF instruction initializes an FIFO data file Each data FIFOF W 51 52 Di D2 file has unique number 0 through 9 A maximum of 10 data files can be used in a user program Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 X X X X Valid Devices FT1A Touch Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat N File Number File Number 0 9 S1 Source 1 Quantity of data registers per record 1 255 S2 Source 2 Quantity of records 2 255 D1 Destination 1 First data register to store FIFO data file X
215. 2h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h BCD ASCII Binary 49 1234 0031h gt 020 1804020 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h BCD ASCII Binary 49 123 0031h gt 020 007Bh 50 0032h 51 0033h BCD ASCII Binary 49 12 0031h 020 0018h 50 0032h BCD ASCII Binary 49 1 0031h gt 020 coo01h SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 13 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOB D Quantity of Digits 10 E ATOB D Si S2 D10 10 e Quantity of Digits 6 ATOB D Si D10 Quantity of Digits ATOB D Si D10 Di D20 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D10 D11 D12 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h 54 0036h 55 0037h 56 0038h 57 0039h 48 0030h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h 54 0036h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h p20 D21 p20 D21 p20 D21 11 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 BCD Binary
216. 3 Month and Day Settings Month June day 255 Day of the week End of month E Specify ON duration Preview Year 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr GA 2 26 27 28 29 30 Data Register Allocation Configure the tab as shown above and set D1 to QO Ladder program SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 23 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on output 00 from 0 00 on August 12 to 0 00 on August 15 every year xxx 2009 2010 2011 2012 ON date 2000 08 12 E OFF date 2099 08 15 OFF Yearly ON Monthly OFF x D f A x 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer Devices P1 ON settings Year 2000 H Month and Day Settings Month August Day 23 Yearly Monthly Day of the week End of month OFF settings Year os E Month and Day Settings Month August dav asi Day of the week End of month Specify ON duration Preview Year July 2013 August 2013 September 20 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 208 508 T 7 8 9 10 i 12 13 4 S 6 7 8 9 i0 8 9 10 12 13 14 14 15 16
217. 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 020 021 D32 D33 014 015 020 021 D34 D35 Quotient DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 11 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat All Source and Destination Devices e Data Type Word and Integer When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 DIV W Si R S2 R DiR REP E D10 D20 D30 3 D10 S D20 D30 D33 Dii D21 031 D34 D12 022 D32 035 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word and Long When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 6 devices starting with 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 DIV D Si R S2 R DiR REP E D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 D20D21 030 031 036 037 012 013 0220233 032 033 038 039 014 015 D24D25 034 035 040 041 Quotient Remainder e Data Type Float When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 DIV F SIR S2R DIR REP Fi D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 D22 D23 LI D32 D33 014 015 B D24 D25 Lf 034 035 Quotient Note When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERR LED are turned on and maintai
218. 3 1 In auto mode PID instruction controls the output according to the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction In manual mode PID instruction controls the output with the manual mode output manipulated variable 51 17 To use manual mode you must set the manual mode output manipulated variable in advance Output manipulated variable limit enable 53 2 You can enable or disable the output manipulated variable restriction using the output manipulated variable upper limit value 51 14 and the output manipulated variable lower limit value 51 15 High alarm output 53 3 Turns on if the process variable 51 0 is higher than or equal to the high alarm value 51 3 This is read only data Low alarm output 53 4 Turns on if the process variable 51 0 is lower than or equal to the low alarm value 51 4 This is read only data 28 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 E IDEC 28 PID INSTRUCTION Control output S3 5 When PID instruction is in auto mode the control output turns on and off according to the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction and the control period 51 21 When PID instruction is in manual mode the control output turns on and off according to the manual mode output manipulated variable 51 17 and the control period AT execution 53 6 When the execute auto tuning is turned on auto tuning is initiated Once auto tuning is finished it is turned off automatically The aut
219. 3 by turning on initialization input S2 Data register DO 2 03 M8120 Mi M8125 M10 P 1 tab Initial setting 2011 ON settings Month Day 2305 September 1st OFF settings E 1 Month Day 1561 June 25th S1 2013 MOV W 51 2020 D2 MOV W REP Di REP The initial settings configured on the P 1 tab are stored in DO to D3 at the first scan e The YEAR instruction starts operating according to the values of data registers DO to D3 2013 DO and the OFF settings year changes to 2020 D2 When M1 turns on all of the YEAR instruction settings DO to D3 return to the initial settings SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 When M10 turns on the ON settings year changes to 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 12 28 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The display instructions display the specified data such as text and device values on the SmartAXIS LCD MSG Message This instruction displays the specified data on the SmartAXIS LCD MSG 51 KKK When the input turns on a message is displayed on the LCD according to the content configured in the MSG instruction dialog box The following types of data can be displayed Device values can be displayed e Word device values can be displayed as numeric v
220. 31 032 033 014 015 24 025 gt 30 031 D32 D33 Quotient Remainder e Data Type Float When 51 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination devices 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 DIV F Si R S2 R Di REP a D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 8 030 031 012 013 022 023 030 031 014 015 024 025 39 030 031 Quotient Repeat Source and Destination Devices Data Type Word and Integer When S1 source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 DIV W SiR 52 DiR REP n D10 D20 D30 3 D10 020 D30 D33 Dii 020 D31 034 012 020 D32 035 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word and Long When Si source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 6 devices starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 DIV D SiR 52 DiR REP n D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 gt D30 D31 036 037 012 013 020 021 D32 D33 D38 D39 014 015 B 020 021 9 D34 D35 D40 D41 Quotient Remainder e Data Type Float When Si source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 DIV F Si R 52 DiR REP 11 D10 D20 D30
221. 4 M8000 M8177 144 M8000 M8177 144 M8000 M8177 144 M8000 M8177 144 8000 8177 144 Shift Register R RO R127 128 RO R127 128 RO R127 128 RO RI27 128 RO R127 128 Timer T TO T99 100 TO T199 200 TO T199 200 199 200 TO T199 200 Counter C CO C99 100 co c199 200 co c199 1200 co ci99 200 199 200 oy Register 9 309 400 p0 D1999 2000 D0 D1999 2000 D0 D1999 2000 D0 D1999 2000 Special Data D8000 08199 200 D8000 D8199 200 D8000 D8199 200 D8000 D8199 200 08000 D8199 200 Register D Notes 1 The least significant digit of input output internal relay and special internal relay device address is an octal number 0 through 7 Upper digits are decimal numbers Out of data registers DO through D1999 D1000 through D1999 cannot be designated as keep types Retained in STOP gt RUN but zeroed out when the power is turned on 2 3 For SmartAXIS Pro Lite when you use data register ROM backup you can initialize the data registers with the values backed up in ROM For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 1 ZIDEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Special Internal Relays Special internal relays M8000 through M8177 are used for controlling the CPU operation and communication and for indicating CPU status All special internal relays cann
222. 4 M0015 Mos N0015 i 0002 C0000 00003 10001 00004 10002 10003 ib END un DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 5 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS 5 Press the The cursor moves to the start of the next rung The ladder program display screen changes as shown below J down button twice 00005 00006 10002 10000 Q0004 SOTU 00000 uU 1 1 LU 1 F MO000 M0001 0002 M0003 MO004 0005 M0006 M0007 M0010 M0011 90001 6 Press the M0012 M0013 M0014 M0015 0002 0003 10003 00004 down button three times The cursor moves to the rung containing the END instruction 00008 00001 10000 END 00002 SOTU 00000 00003 MOO00 M0001 M0002 M0003 MO004 MOO05 0006 M0007 m Ji Tr 167 M0010 M0011 90001 12 2 6 M0013 M0014 M0015 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS Displaying Detailed Device Information This section describes the steps to monitor the detailed information of the CUD instruction 1 In the state of step 5 on the previous page press the gt right The c
223. 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat N File Number File number 0 9 01 Destination 1 First data register number to store data X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Make sure that FOEX instructions are executed after the corresponding FIFOF instruction has initialized the FIFO data file If FOEX instructions are executed without executing the corresponding FIFOF instruction a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the FOEX instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 23 3 23 FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS Valid Data Types xXx I integer D double word L long F float Example FIFOF FIEX and FOEX When a D data register is assigned as the destination as many data registers as the value stored in device S1 of the corresponding FIFOF instruction are used This program demonstrates a user program of the FIFOX FIEX and FOEX instructio
224. 402823 38 12345 2 12379 56789 1 56772 3 402823 38 12345 2 12381 56789 1 56771 3 402823 38 New 12345 2 12383 56789 1 56770 3 402823 38 The sample user program described below operates as follows e M100 is turned on when the writing trace data to the SD memory card completes The TRACE instruction status code is stored to D100 e The execution status saved D100 is checked and 00 is turned on if an error occurs 26 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC Configuration Procedure 1 Insert the instructions in the Ladder editor TRACE 51 Di D2 RESULT M100 D100 CMP lt gt W Sl S2 Di D100 0 Qo 2 Configure the TRACE instruction Configure the Devices tab 1 Designate M100 as D1 Completion Output 2 Designate D100 as D2 Execution Status TRACE Data Tracing Devices Settings 1 2 D1 Completion Output D2 Execution Status Tag Name 0100 po100 E Device Address mo100 J Comment E Cancel Configure the Settings tab 3 Enter RESULT in S1 Folder Name 26 DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS 4 Configure DO to output the decimal value of DO to the CSV files with the data type W word 5 Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of DO through D5 to the CSV files 6 Configure D10 to output the value of D10 to the CSV files with the data type F fl
225. 49672953 02 65535 11 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC DTDV Data Divide H Applicable SmartAXIS 51 D1 D1 1 DTDV W S1 D1 the device next to D1 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS When input is on the 16 bit binary data assigned by S1 is divided into upper and lower bytes The upper byte data is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 The lower byte data is stored to FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to divide X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed Destination device D1 uses 2 data registers starting with the device assigned by D1 Since the DTDV instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word data are used D double word When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long m 1 poi
226. 5 52 gt 51 52 1 2 3 4 5 R M When more than one ICMP gt or CMP instruction is used M8150 M8151 or M8152 indicates the result of the instruction that was executed last 76 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 DEC 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Example ICMP gt Ho When input I0 is turned on data of data registers D10 D11 and D12 assigned by source devices S1 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met internal relay Q1 assigned by destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met Q1 is turned off D10 gt D11 gt D12 Q1 goes on ICMP gt W Si 52 53 Di D10 D11 D12 Q1 51 52 53 Di M8150 M8151 M8152 M8004 D10 17 gt Dii 15 Di2 15 Qi goes on OFF OFF OFF OFF D10 15 lt Dii 18 lt D12 19 Qi goes off ON ON OFF ON IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 7 7 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS LC Load Compare Equal To Data type W or I 51 52 Data type D 51 51 1 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 32 bit data assigned by S1 and S2 When 51 data is equal to S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC lt gt Load Compare Une
227. 5 OFF Text 1 Device Enter the device to display Valid Devices I Q M R T D X X X X X X 2 Display Options Configure the options to blink or invert the text For the blinking speed see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 Display Options Description Blinking Blinks the specified text Invert Inverts the display of the specified text 3 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 1 to 24 The display size is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used 4 ON Text Enter the text to display when the specified device is on Up to 24 single byte characters can be entered A space is also counted as one character 5 OFF Text Enter the text to display when the specified device is off Up to 24 single byte characters can be entered A space is also counted as one character 6 Special Character Enters a special character at the cursor position Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed For the special characters see 8 Special Character on page 13 3 7 Insert Overwrite Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 5 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS I
228. 5 56789 1 56789 3 402823 38 12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 3 402823 38 12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 3 402823 38 12345 2 12351 56789 1 56786 3 402823 38 12345 2 12353 56789 1 56785 3 402823 38 12345 2 12355 56789 1 56784 3 402823 38 12345 2 12357 56789 1 56783 3 402823 38 12345 2 12359 56789 1 56782 3 402823 38 12345 2 12361 56789 1 56781 3 402823 38 12345 2 12363 56789 1 56780 3 402823 38 12345 2 12365 56789 1 56779 3 402823 38 12345 2 12367 56789 1 56778 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12369 56789 1 56777 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12371 56789 1 56776 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12373 56789 1 56775 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12375 56789 1 56774 3 402823E 38 New 12345 2 12377 56789 1 56773 3 402823E 38 26 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 27 SCRIPT Introduction The SCRPT instruction calls and executes a script from the ladder program SCRPT Script Executes the specified script Symbol SCRPT 51 Di Operation When the input turns on the script that corresponds to the script ID specified by S1 is executed When the script is finished executing the execution status and the execution time are stored in D1 and D1 1 To use the SCRPT instruction you must create a script to execute in Script Manager dialog box beforehand For details about the script executed by SCRPT instruction refer to the following manuals Script function overview
229. 50 600 Function setting Current Value Device Address 1 Process variable 995 395 00000 2 MV Output manip 0 0 D0001 11 3 Operating status 0 D0002 LD 4 High alarm value 600 500 00003 5 Low alarm value 0 0 D0004 12 Apply Tuned Value 1 PID instruction list Select the PID instruction to monitor All PID instructions in the ladder program opened in WindLDR are displayed The PID instructions can be identified by the program name and line number in which the instruction is used 2 Refer to PID settings Opens a dialog box for the PID instruction being monitored so that you can confirm the settings 3 Jump to target PID instruction Moves the cursor of the ladder editor to the position of the PID instruction being monitored 4 Show hide PID monitor table You can show or hide PID Monitor Table 11 and Apply Configured Values button 12 5 PID monitor settings Opens the PID Monitor Settings dialog box For details see PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box on page 28 21 6 Primary parameters panel You can check the values of the process variable PV set point SP and manipulated variable MV For the MV the analog value can be checked with the horizontal bar graph and the digital value on off can be checked with the color of the OUT indicator When the OUT indicator is white the output is off When it is green the output is on The colors of the values for the process variab
230. 6 is always on or off When the proportional band is made larger the control output 53 6 turns on and off from a state where the deviation is large so overshooting process variable goes above the set point undershooting process variable falls below the set point and hunting process variable is in an unstable undulating state decrease but it takes time until the process variable reaches the set point and the offset between the set point and the process variable becomes larger When the proportional band is made smaller the control output starts turning on and off at near the set point so the time until the process variable reaches the set point decreases and the offset also becomes smaller but hunting increases If the proportional band is set extremely small the control is the same as on off operation When auto tuning is used the appropriate proportional band can be automatically set for the target application For details see Auto Tuning AT on page 28 15 The proportional band can be set from 0 01 to 100 00 in 0 01 increments SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 5 28 PID INSTRUCTION 5 Integral Time 51 9 With only the proportional action an offset occurs between the set point and the process variable even when the target application is in a stable state In order to bring this offset close to 0 the integral action is required Integral time is a factor that determines the manipulated variable b
231. 7 3 ADD F D D gt D 35 86 171 9 M MoD 20 86 86 5 SUB W I D D gt D 13 76 47 3 M MoD 34 86 166 3 SUB D L D DoD 34 86 167 3 SUB F D DoD 35 86 171 9 MxMoD 20 36 86 5 MUL W I DxDoD 13 36 47 3 MxMoD 34 76 166 3 MUL D L DxDoD 34 76 167 3 MUL F DxDoD 35 76 171 9 M M gt D 14 36 86 5 DIV W I 6 36 9 80 M M gt D 34 96 166 3 DIV D L D D gt 5D 34 96 167 3 DIV F D D gt 5D 36 66 171 9 INC W I 11 86 44 7 INC D L 25 66 124 5 DEC W I 11 86 44 7 DEC D L 25 66 124 5 ROOT W JD gt D 7 36 5 50 ROOT D JD gt D 21 76 86 7 ROOT F JD gt D 19 66 886 5 SUM W I gt 13 16 0 8 47 6 1 1 SUM L DDoD 21 36 7 6n 90 5 41 5n SUM F DDoD 21 36 9 2 90 5 45 0 M MoD 20 16 46 1 ANDW ORW XORW W D DoD 5 36 5 70 ANDW ORW XORW D D D gt D 27 06 127 1 SFTL SFTR N_B 100 18 76 56 1 A 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC APPENDIX Execution Time ps Instruction Device and Condition SmartAXIS Pro Lite SmartAXIS Touch BCDLS D D S1 1 10 56 49 9 WSFT DoD 22 56 91 3 ROTL ROTR W D bits 1 12 16 44 9 HTOB W DoD 4 84 10 5 BTOH W DoD 4 92 11 1 HTOA W DoD 7 96 13 7 ATOH W 6 0 BTOA W DoD 137 ATOB W DoD 56 3 ENCO W M gt D 16 bits 6 9 DECO D
232. 74 Receive Format Receive completion output 1 Constant for Verification Note Constants configured in the beginning of receive formats have different functions as shown below e More than five constants are configured in the beginning of the receive format Byte ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 200th Const Const Const Const Const Const Const Receive Format Start Delimiter Constant for Verification Up to 5th byte 6th byte and after e Other than constants data register skip or BCC are included in the first five bytes of the receive format Byte ist 2nd 4th 5th 6th 200th Const DR Const Const Const Receive Format etc Start Delimiter Data register Constant for Verification Consecutive first 5 bytes only skip or BCC Not consecutive in the first 5 bytes Skip When skip is designated in the receive format a specified quantity of digits in the incoming data are skipped and not stored to data registers A maximum of 99 digits bytes of characters can be skipped continuously Example When a RXD instruction with skip for 2 digits starting at the third byte is executed Incoming Data 5 3 or 6 6 5 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 37h 38h D102 0035h Skipped d D103 0036h gt D104 0037h D105 0038h When D100 is designated as the first data register D100 003
233. 8 Special Character A special character can be entered at the cursor position Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed The special characters that can be used are as follows Special characters list v A 4 gt C 9 Insert Overwrite Selects insert or overwrite as the character input mode Click this button to switch the input mode 10 Priority The priority of the MSG instruction can be configured between 0 to 49 0 is the highest priority and 49 is the lowest priority e The same priority cannot be set for multiple MSG instructions When inputs to two or more MSG instructions turns on the message of the MSG instruction with the highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG instructions with inputs that are on e When the MSG instruction input with the highest priority changes from on to off the message for the MSG instruction with the next highest priority is displayed the priority is checked when the input changes e If Acknowledgement 11 is enabled for the MSG instruction with the highest priority even after the input changes from on to off the same message is kept displayed The message for the MSG instruction with the next highest priority is displayed when the SmartAXIS module OK button is pressed Note When you press the gt up or amp down button on the SmartAXIS the messages are switched between the
234. 8 to 2 147 483 647 11 DEC F 3 402823 38 to 3 402823 38 13 HEX W 0000 to FFFF 4 HEX D 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8 BIN B 1 1 26 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 26 DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS 8 Repeat The data in as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat starting from the specified device address are output to the SD memory card For example when the display type of D10 is DEC W and the repeat is set to 8 the data is output to SD memory card as follows Triggered at 2011 9 7 15 40 30 Header row 1 Scan D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 D0014 D0015 D0016 D0017 Header row 2 Old 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 Data 7 scans before 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 Data 6 scans before 3 1 19 27 35 43 51 59 Data 5 scans before 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 Data 4 scans before 5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 Data 3 scans before 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 Data 2 scans before 7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 Data 1 scan before New 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Latest data 9 Trace data size The amount of memory that the TRACE instruction uses for the current trace settings is shown The amount of memory used increases when a device to trace the data is added You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices the total amount of memory must be less than or equal to 1 024 bytes One byte of memory area is required for eac
235. 926991 D20 D21 1 000001 T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 21 5 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS ASIN Arc Sine H asin 51 51 1 01 01 1 rad ASIN F 51 Di When input is on the arc sine of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians to the destination assigned by device D1 The 51 51 1 value must be within the following range 1 0 lt 51 51 1 lt 1 0 If the S1 S1 1 value is not within this range 0 is stored to D1 D1 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Arc sine value to convert into radian X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the data designated by source device S1 is not within the range between 1 0 and 1 0 or does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ASIN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data
236. AMMER INSTRUCTIONS This setting configures the number of parameter tabs When this value is increased or decreased the number of parameter tabs displayed on the dialog box increases or decreases 10 bytes of the user program region are used for each parameter tab For the settings see Parameter tab on page 12 13 5 D1 destination 1 Output This setting configures the output for the results when the configured dates and the current date are compared Setting Description Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for each device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited 6 Pulse Output This setting configures the operation for D1 output This setting is applied to all parameter tabs Selected check box E Unselected check box When the current date changes to the date in the ON settings the output is turned on for only one scan The output is turned on and off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings Parameter tab This tab configures the settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR instruction YEAR Yearly Times E Devices P1 1 2 V Yearly Monthly 1 El Yen oo Month and Day Settings Month January z day ili Day of the week End of month OFF settings 4 ven E Month and Day Setti
237. ANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The Week Programmer instructions turn output on or off at a specified interval WEEK Weekly Timer H For example if the ON settings are Monday 13 00 and the OFF settings are Wednesday 18 00 output D1 turns on and off as follows The WEEK instruction compares the specified day of the week ON time and OFF time with the current time and outputs that result 51 52 53 Di When the input is on the output specified by D1 is turned on when the day of the week and the time specified by the ON settings match the current day of the week and time The output is also turned off when the day of the week and the time specified by the OFF settings match the current day of the week and time Day of the week u Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Time 13 00 18 00 o ON OutputDi OFF A Ue ON settings Day of the week Monday OFF settings Day of the week Wednesday Time 13 00 Time 18 00 Notes A maximum of 10 WEEK instructions can be used in a user program e Normally the output is only updated when the current time and the time for the ON OFF settings matches but when the WEEK instruction input changes from off to on the output state at the current time is determined according to the ON OFF settings and the output is t
238. Addresses on page 3 1 When the conversion result is not within the range between 3 402823 x 1028 and 1 175495 1038 or between 1 175495 10 38 and 3 402823 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the conversion result is 0 When the conversion result is below 3 402823 x 103 or over 3 402823 x 10 causing an overflow the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus infinity Not Zero Overflow Overflow M8003 1 1 Execution Result 3 402823 1038 1 175495 1038 0 1 175495 10 38 3 402823x10 8 When the data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the DEG instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example DEG When input I1 is turned on the radian value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is converted into a degree value and stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1
239. Cures 1 Carrer 2 Carrer 3 Cures 4 Carrer 5 S Auie Pu pM L Preface 1 About This Manual Preface 2 Related Manuals cessere nnne Preface 3 Names and Abbreviations Used in this nennen nnne nnne nnn nnn nnn nnns Preface 4 Operation Basics Start WindLDR desc ninian Create Ladder 1 3 SAVE 1 6 Simulate Operatii eoii 1 7 Download Progra DLL IQ LL I a a Eaa inn 1 7 Menem 1 8 e Uer m onii 1 8 Ladder Program Monitoring on the SmartAXIS BaSiC p 2 1 adder Program P BRA 2 3 Using the Ladder Program Monitor 2 22e coe inre e tinte eene tnn pu o 2 4 Device Addresses Device Adresses Special Internal Relays iiiter urne citet tina cgcdsdevnedeueienesdceng danheasesieasececucesefasteddsasaincbidenedectedssdevaes Special Data Registers Instructions Reference Basic
240. DDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 27 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Multiple Usage of MCS instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data This master control circuit will give priority to I1 I3 and I5 in that order When input I1 is off the first MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I6 are forced off When input I1 is on the first MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When I1 is on and I3 is off the second MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I4 through I6 are forced off When both I1 and 13 are on the first and second MCSs are not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 Counter and Shift Register in Master Control Circuit Ladder Diagram When input I1 is on the MCS is not executed so that the counter and shift register are executed according to the actual status of subsequent inputs I2 through 14 When input I1 is off the MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through 14 are forced off When input I1 is turned on while input I2 is on the counter and shift register pulse inputs are turned on as shown below Timing Chart ON Input I1 OFF ON Input I2 OFF ON Counter Pulse Input OFF Shift Register Pulse Input 0 ift Register Pulse Input 5 28 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 5 BASIC IN
241. DER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES M8120 Initialize Pulse When the CPU starts operation M8120 turns on for a period of one scan TE Leon ume M8120 Start M8121 1 sec Clock s s While M8001 1 sec clock reset is off M8121 generates clock d us pulses in 1 sec increments with a duty ratio of 1 1 500 ms on and M8121 500 ms off F 1sec M8122 100 ms Clock 20 M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 ms increments P m whether M8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 50 ms on and M8122 50 ms off me 100 5 gt 8123 10 ms Clock 6 M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 ms increments i whether 8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 5 ms on and 5 ms off M8123 FX 10ms M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed When timer or counter preset values are changed in the CPU module RAM M8124 turns on When a user program is downloaded to the CPU from WindLDR or when the changed timer counter preset value is cleared M8124 turns off When a timer or counter is designated as a destination of an advanced instruction the timer counter preset value is also changed M8125 In operation Output M8125 remains on while the CPU is running M8130 M8132 Disconnect User Communication Connection When SmartAXIS is connected to a remote host with the user communication client and a special internal relay corresponding to the connection is turned from off to on t
242. DN And niea rua Eo PAESE SER EE LAN Ra Pani Reno LEER PRX FER EE cteain Nod JE AND LOD Load OR LOD Load ES BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP Bit Pop TML TIM TMH and TMS Tirrier theta uhi Ra Rana SiS TMLO TIMO TMHO and TMSO Off Delay CNT CUD COUR iiie sasin nes dasa cto ch eras ee ihid qa pacc dui da siesta tae sue Bonus n EAEE RASAT CNTD CDPD and CUDD Double Word ao gt S eosizgeens epee Em DC and DC gt Data Register Comparison eee nennen nnne nnn nennen nnne SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift lt nnne nnn SOTU SOTD Single Output Up and MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset JMP Jump and JEND Jump End SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cures 6 7 Cures 8 Cures 9 Cures 10 Cures 11 Il Restriction S sala aee EE 5 31 Move Instructions MOV Amen MOVN Move
243. Data Word XCHG W Di D2 Before Exchange After Exchange 10 Der D21 1000 D21 2000 021 lt 024 022 022 When input IO is turned on data of data registers 021 D23 D23 and D24 assigned by devices D1 and D2 are exchanged D24 2000 D24 1000 with each other Data Type Double Word Before Exchange After Exchange XCHG D D1 D2 Fi D31 D37 D31 D32 1234567890 031 032 9876543 033 034 033 034 031 032 lt 037 038 D35 D36 D35 D36 When input I1 is turned on data of data registers D37 D38 9876543 D37 D38 1234567890 D31 D32 and D37 D38 assigned by devices D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 6 15 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS TCCST Timer Counter Current Value Store TCCST S1 R Di R REP H 51 Di When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 is displayed and stored to the current value of device assigned by D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First device address to move to X X 1 99 F
244. Device M0000 Bit Device 00002 fect Bar Graph m mim mm end Configuring the special character 12 Select the area at the 15th column on the second line and click Special Character MSG Message 2 Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings a Sao itenim M0000 Bit Devi NEN TT mim The Special Characters List window is popped up 13 Double click on 9C 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message E377 Options Priority 0 E Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings Leo Display SpecialData special character Word Device M0000 Bit Device ETE Bar Graph n D E SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 13 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Configuring the bar graph 14 Select the entire area on the third line and click Bar Graph
245. Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A H40RC FT1A B40RC Valid Devices Device gt Fuxtonn gt I Q M T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Control register S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X D1 Destination 1 Operation status Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 19 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC Settings Device tab PWM Pulse Width Modulation Devices Settings PWM 1 00014 4 2 3 4 D1 OperationStatus S1 Control Register S2 Initialization Input Tag Name 7 Device Address Comment Cancel 1 Select instruction This item selects which PWM instruction to use PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 PWM4 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS The pulse output pulse duty cycle ON ratio and enabling disabling pulse counting varies based on the instruction Instruction Pulse output Pulse duty cycle ON ratio PWM1 Q14 1 to 100 increments of 1 Enable disable pulse counting Pulse counting can be enabled or disabled PWM2 Q15 Pulse counting range 1 to 100 000
246. FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 14 3 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Correct Structure for Calling Subroutine When a LCAL instruction is executed the remaining program instructions on the same rung may not be executed upon return if input conditions are changed by the subroutine After the LRET instruction of a subroutine program execution begins with the instruction following the LCAL instruction depending on current input condition When instructions following a LCAL instruction must be executed after the subroutine is called make sure the subroutine does not change input conditions unfavorably In addition include subsequent instructions in a new ladder line separated from the LCAL instruction Correct Incorrect MOV W Si D1 REP MOV W S1 Di IO Di 10 00 01 LCAL Si LCAL 51 0 0 S 10 MOV W S1 Di REP D21 D20 D21 Separate the ladder line for each LCAL instruction IO status may be changed by the subroutine upon return Example LCAL and LRET The following example demonstrates a program that calls three different portions of program depending on the input When the subroutine is complete program execution returns to the instruction following the LCAL instruction When input IO is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution
247. FT9Y B1382 3 FI1 A SERIES smart AXIS Ladder Programming Manual IDEC CORPORATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Read the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual to make sure of correct operation before starting installation wiring operation maintenance and inspection of the SmartAXIS All SmartAXIS modules are manufactured under IDEC s rigorous quality control system but users must add a backup or failsafe provision to the control system when using the SmartAXIS in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused in case the SmartAXIS should fail Inthis user s manual safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution The SmartAXIS is not designed for use in medical equipment nuclear power railways aviation passenger vehicle equipment or similar applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety The SmartAXIS cannot be used for such applications When using SmartAXIS in applications not described above that require a high degree of reliability in terms of functionality and precision appropriate measures such as failsafe mechanisms and redundant mechanisms must be taken for a system containing the SmartAXIS e Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS e If relays or transistors in the SmartAXIS output circuits should fail outputs may remain in the on or off state For output signals which may cause serious accidents
248. Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X 1 99 S2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X X X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the device data is the timer counter current value TC or CC When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the device data is the timer counter preset value TP or CP 0 through 65535 Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned If S2 or D2 is not assigned the source or destination device is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by 51 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid device range If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer or destina
249. G instruction uses for the current log settings is shown The amount of memory used increases when a device to log the data is added You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices the total amount of memory must be less than or equal to 1 024 bytes One byte of memory area is required for each character 10 Remaining size The amount of free memory the difference between the logging data size and 1 024 bytes is shown 26 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 26 DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration The CSV file output format is as follows You can change the separating character for each data and the decimal symbol for floating point numbers that are output to the CSV files on the Function Area Settings dialog box Output format Time D0010 D0020 D0030 D0050 D0060 2011 09 07 15 40 00 12345 1 5 12 111 2011 09 07 15 41 00 1212 3 7 35 222 2011 09 07 15 42 00 345 4 99 79 333 When the DLOG instruction is executed and the CSV file for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1 a new CSV file is created and the header and the log data 1 are output as shown in above output format example If the DLOG instruction is executed again on the same date the log data 2 is appended to the CSV file Similarly if the DLOG instruction is executed again on the same date log data 3 is appended to the CSV file When the date changes and the DLOG instruction is executed a
250. Input I1 Output Operation 1 ON OFF Output QO is turned ON 2 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON 3 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Note One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung WindLDR manages programs in rung units Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments for individual rungs Start WindLDR From the Start menu of Windows select Programs gt Automation Organizer V2 gt WindLDR gt WindLDR WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen B Select Basic Advanced Macro project01 pjw WINDLDR M 7 Eraser Split of Insert snap ta 5 _ Horizontl jfDecrement Append s 15 z Coll Line Vertical Invert Com Qi Disable X Delete FT1A 48 USB Network 1 1 Mode Edit 1 Line 1 Column 1 m SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 1 3 1 OPERATION BASICS Edit User Program Rung by Rung Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input IO 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Home Basic A Normally Open B Normally Closed OUT Output OUTN OutputNot SET Set RST Reset Single Output eeecosx Timer Counter Shift Regis
251. List Program List Program List Instruction Data 5 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DC and DC Data Register Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List MOV W S1 Di Instruction Data D10 D2 LOD MOV W Timing Chart ON Input I1 OFF D10 Value D2 Value Output 0 is on when data register 02 value is 5 ON Output QO OFF Output Q1 is on when data register D2 value is 3 or more ON Output Q1 OFF Ladder Diagram 2 Timing Chart MON W Si Di D30 Value D50 D30 ON Output QO OFF Output 00 is on when data register 030 value is 500 Ladder Diagram 3 Timing Chart MOV W Si Di D15 Value DO D15 Output Q1 ON OFF Output Q1 is on when data register D15 value is 350 or more Ladder Diagram 4 Timing Chart MOV W Si Di D20 Value 90 120 180 150 80 160 110 95 D100 D20 ON Output QO OFF ON Output Q2 OFF Output Q2 is on while data register D20 value is between 149 and 100 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 21 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift Register SmartAXIS have a shift register consisting of 128 bits which are allocated to RO through R127 Any number of available bits can be selected to form a train of bits which store on or off status The on off data of constituent bits is shifted in the forward direction forward shift register or i
252. M 50 0 BCNT M 5 D 16 bits 2E ALT 10 86 42 7 eunt W I D L gt F 53 0 FOWILD L 56 3 DTDV W DoD 8 90 DTCB W B 10 4 SWAP W 4 22 8 9 SWAP D 19 06 89 7 WEEK YEAR MSG LABEL LJMP LCAL LRET DJNZ IOREF 46 8 HSCRF 46 8 DI 90 3 EL 54 1 XYFS CVXTY CVYTX m AVRG W I S3 10 6 38 AVRG D L S3 10 49 5 AVRG F S3 10 55 1 PULS PWM RAMP XE ZRN ARAMP m m DTML DTIM DTMH 60 2 DTMS 63 0 TTIM 60 3 RAD FoF 143 9 DEG FoF 143 9 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 A 3 IDEC APPENDIX Execution Time us Instruction Device and Condition SmartAXIS Pro Lite SmartAXIS Touch SIN COS FoF 36 96 161 1 TAN FoF 34 66 149 1 ASIN ACOS FoF 81 36 618 9 ATAN FoF 72 96 616 5 LOGE LOG10 FoF 43 56 206 0 EXP FoF 37 56 172 5 POW FoF 47 36 191 0 FIFOF 129 0 FIEX EE 129 0 FOEX E 129 0 NDSRC W I D D D gt D 19 5 NDSRC D L D D DoD 782 5 NDSRC F D D DoD 782 5 TADD 54 4 TSUB E s 54 4 HOUR D gt D Y D 20 6 HTOS 52 7 STOH DoD 92 1 TXD RXD ERXD TRACE SCRPT PID Processing
253. M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 2 Cleared Cleared Write M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 3 Cleared Cleared Write M8024 BMOV WSFT Executing Flag Maintained Maintained Read M8025 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Maintained Cleared Read Write M8026 SD Memory Card Status Maintained Cleared Read M8027 SD Memory Card Writing Flag Maintained Cleared Read M8030 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8031 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8032 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8033 Reset Status Maintained Cleared Read W High speed Counter Group 1 10 M8034 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8035 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8036 Underflow Maintained Cleared Read M8037 Count Direction Maintained Cleared Read M8040 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8041 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8042 High speed Counter Group 2 I2 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8043 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8044 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8045 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8046 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8047 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8050 Reset Status Maintained Cleared Read High speed Counter Group 3 13 M8051 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8052 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8053 Underflow
254. M8024 BMOV WSFT Executing Flag While the BMOV or WSFT is executed M8024 turns on When completed M8024 turns off If the CPU is powered down while executing BMOV or WSFT M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again M8025 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Outputs are normally turned off when the CPU is stopped M8025 is used to maintain the output statuses when the CPU is stopped When the CPU is stopped with M8025 turned on the output ON OFF statuses are maintained When the CPU restarts M8025 is turned off automatically M8026 SD Memory Card Status When an SD memory card is inserted into the SmartAXIS M8026 turns on When an SD memory card is not inserted M8026 turns off M8027 SD Memory Card Writing Flag While logging data is written to the SD memory card M8027 turns on When writing logging data is finished M8027 turns off 8030 8061 Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter Special internal relays used for the high speed counter For details on the Pro Lite high speed counter see Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on the Touch high speed counter see Chapter 3 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual M8070 M8075 Interrupt Input Status Turns on when the corresponding user interrupt is allowed When interrupt inputs are disabled these internal relays are turned off M8070 Interrupt input 10 status M8071 Interrupt input I
255. MMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 6 1 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Examples MOV Data Type Word E D10 12345 through M7 M10 through M17 D10 When input I2 is on data in data register D10 assigned by source device S1 is moved to 16 internal relays starting with MO assigned by destination device D1 MOV W Si Di D10 MO Data in the source data register is converted into 16 bit binary data and the ON MSB LSB OFF statuses of the 16 bits are moved to internal relays MO through M7 and M10 olol l llolololollololilill lololi through M17 MO is the LSB least significant bit M17 is the MSB most significant M17 M10 M7 MO bit Data Type Word 810 5 D2 MOV W S1 Di REP When input IO is on constant 810 assigned by source DO 10 810 D2 device S1 is moved to data register D2 assigned by Di destination device D1 D2 810 810 Data move operation for integer data is the same as for word data Data Type Double Word 810 gt D2 D3 MOV D Si D1 REP When input I0 is on constant 810 assigned by source DO 810 D2 E Data move operation for the long data type is the same as for the double word data type device S1 is moved to data registers D2 and D3 assigned Di by destination device D1 D2 0 r 0 D3 810 810
256. MSG Instruction Individual Settings The settings for the individual MSG instruction such as texts and devices to display and the priority can be configured in the Edit MSG instruction dialog box Edit MSG Message dialog box MSG Message Lo ies Options 10 11 Priority c B Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings 7 8 9 SpecialData Special Character Insert mim 3 4 Text with Effect Bar Graph 6 1 LCD Screen The screen displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD when the MSG instruction is executed can be configured in this area Enter characters at the cursor position using the keyboard The character input method insert overwrite is changed by clicking Insert 9 Note Text entered on the LCD Screen 1 with the keyboard cannot be set to scroll blink or invert To scroll blink or invert the text enter the text with Text with Effects 5 and configure the display options For details on inserting text with effects see Insert Text with Effect on page 13 6 2 Work Area This area is used when editing the LCD screen This area is for temporarily relocating text and device data Text and device data be moved between the LCD Screen and the Work Area with or W When the dialog is closed the work area data is discarded 3 Word Device Inserts a word device at the cursor position The value of the specified word device is displayed on th
257. Maintained Cleared Read M8054 Count Direction Maintained Cleared Read 3 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC Device CPU 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES IDEC Address Description Stopped Power OFF Read Write M8055 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8056 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8057 High speed Counter Group 4 15 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8060 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8061 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read Reserved M8070 Interrupt Input IO Status Cleared Cleared Read M8071 Interrupt Input I2 Status Cleared Cleared Read M8072 Interrupt Input I3 Status a Cleared Cleared Read ON Allowed OFF Prohibited M8073 Interrupt Input I5 Status Cleared Cleared Read M8074 Interrupt Input I6 Status Cleared Cleared Read M8075 Interrupt Input I7 Status Cleared Cleared Read M8076 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag Operating Cleared Write M8077 Reserved M8080 Interrupt Input 10 Edge Cleared Cleared Read M8081 Interrupt Input I2 Edge Cleared Cleared Read M8082 Interrupt Input I3 Edge 2 Cleared Cleared Read ON Rising OFF Falling M8083 Interrupt Input I5 Edge Cleared Cleared Read M8084 Interrupt Input I6 Edge Cleared Cleared
258. N Input Control Output PV D0000 1 32768 to 32767 Control Mode PID PID Control MV D0019 32768 to 32767 SP 0 Devices Input Control Output 1 Process Variable PV Analog Input Data Register 2 Device Address 00000 3 Data Type Integer I 4 Maximum Value 2767 3276810 32767 5 Minimum Value 32768 32768 to 32767 6 High Alarm Value o 3276810 32767 7 LowAlarm Value o 32768 to 32767 8 sampling Period 0 124 0 01 to 100 00 s Device Allocation Basic 1 Process Variable 51 0 Configure the input for the PID control The process variable is linearly converted and given to the PID control for the input value The value can be specified as Analog Input or Data Register When Analog Input is specified AIO to AI5 can be specified The value stored in the special data register that corresponds to the specified analog input 10 to AI5 is used as the PID control input The analog input value is also stored in control register S1 0 51 0 is read only For the allocation of special data registers see Chapter 27 Internal Devices 2 2 Control Device Addresses in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Notes To use an analog input AIO to AI5 the analog input must be configured in advance For details on analog input settings see Chapter Project 4 12 Analog Input in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual When Analo
259. NICATION INSTRUCTIONS Receive Status Designate a data register D0 D1998 as a device to store the receive status information including a receive status code and a user communication error code Receive Status Code Receive Status Code Status Description From turning on the start input for a RXD instruction to read the receive format until 16 Preparing data receive i aub occ the RXD instruction is enabled by an END processing From enabling the RXD instruction by an END processing until incoming data is 32 Receiving data received From receiving incoming data until the received data is converted and stored in data 48 Data receive complete l registers according to the receive format 64 Receive instruction complete All data receive operation is completed and the next data receive is made possible 128 User communication receive RXD instructions are cancelled by special internal relay for user communication instruction cancel flag active receive instruction cancel flag such as M8022 or M8023 If the receive status code is other than shown above a receive instruction error is suspected See Chapter 10 User Communication Instructions User Communication Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Receive Data Byte Count The data register next to the device designated for receive status stores the byte count of data received by the RXD instruction When a start delimiter end delimiter and BCC are i
260. NOP Move Data Comparison Binary Arithmetic Boolean Computation Shift and Rotate 4 6 Symbol NOP MOV FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC FT1A Touch gt lt MOVN IMOV IMOVN BMOV IBMV IBMVN NSET NRS XCHG TCCST CMP CMP lt gt CMP lt CMP gt CMP lt CMP gt ICMP gt LC LC lt gt LC lt LC LC lt LC gt ADD SUB MUL DIV INC DEC ROOT SUM ANDW ORW XORW SFTL SFTR BCDLS WSFT ROTL ROTR X X X lt gt lt x x OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK x OK OK x x X X X lt OK OK OK OK OK OK OK lt OK x x x OK x OK gt lt X X X OK x OK X OK OK x OK OK OK OK x OK OK gt lt OK OK x x X X X OK OK x x OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK X OK OK OK X OK x OK OK x x x X X X X X X X OK x X OK OK OK OK OK X X OK OK OK OK X OK OK X OK X KY X OK x x x x X X X X OK x OK gt
261. NS DECO Decode H When input is on the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and D1 are added together to determine the destination and the bit is then turned on S1 Di Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Offset X X X X X 0 255 D1 Destination 1 First bit to count offset X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated D1 Valid values for the offset designated by source device S1 are 0 through 255 Make sure that the offset designated by S1 and the last bit of destination data determined by the sum of S1 and D1 are within the valid value range If the offset or destination data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the DECO instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Examples DEC
262. Name E 5 6 7 8 5 Tag Name Device address Display Type Repeat Device Address p Comment 4 Tracing datasize 0 bytes MAX 1024bytes 10 Remaining size 1024 bytes 11 The number of scans 0 Scan Cancel 1 S1 source 1 Folder name Specify the folder name on the SD memory card that will store the trace data using up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Notes e The following single byte characters cannot be used in folder names lt gt 90 amp e Consecutive periods cannot be used in folder names period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name Single byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 9 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS 2 D1 destination 1 Completion output Specifies the device that turns on when the transfer of trace data to SD card and the execution of the TRACE instruction are complete This device turns on regardless of the success or failure of the transfer of trace data to the SD memory card 3 D2 destination 2 Execution status Specifies the data register to store the status code One of the following status codes is stored according to the TRACE instruction execution status and result Status code Status Description 0 Normal 1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inser
263. Note Delimiters for data registers can be used in the receive format of RXD instructions only Designating Constant as Start Delimiter A start delimiter can be programmed at the first byte in the receive format of a RXD instruction the SmartAXIS will recognize the beginning of valid communication although a RXD instruction without a start delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at the first byte of source device S1 the one byte data serves as a start delimiter to start the processing of the received data A maximum of five instructions each of RXD2 through RXD3 with different start delimiters can be executed at the same time When the first byte of the incoming data matches the start delimiter of a RXD instruction the received data is processed and stored according to the receive format specified in the RXD instruction If the first byte of the incoming data does not match the start delimiter of any RXD instruction that is executed the SmartAXIS discards the incoming data and waits for the next communication 25 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS When a RXD instruction without a start delimiter is executed any incoming data is processed continuously according to the receive format Only one instruction each of RXD2 through RXD3 without a start delimiter can be executed at a time If start inputs to two or more RXD instructions without a start delimiter are t
264. O E When input IO is on the destination bit is determined by adding the value contained in data register D20 assigned by device S1 to internal relay M104 assigned by destination device D1 51 D20 D1 M104 Since the 19th bit from internal relay M104 is internal relay M127 the bit is then turned on j Mee po 19 v J 50 5 0 is E EIE M157 M140 M177 M160 M7 M180 1111 1 111 Mae When input I1 is on the destination bit is determined by adding the value contained in data register D10 assigned by device S1 to data register D30 assigned by destination device D1 Since the 39th bit from data register D30 bit 0 is data register D32 bit 7 the bit is then turned on Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 D10 39 o 11 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BCNT Bit Count H Applicable SmartAXIS When input is on a search begins for the total number of bits that are on an array of consecutive bits starting at the point assigned by source device S1 Source device S2 assigns the quantity of bits searched The quantity of bits which are on is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 S2 Di 51 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Functio
265. OGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 D10 D10 D10 D10 D10 BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D20 ASCIT 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCIT 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCIT 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCIT 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCIT 53 0035h 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOA D e Quantity of Digits 10 BCD Binary ASCII 1234567890 D20 49 499602D2h 0031h BTOA D S1 S2 D1 D10 10 020 010 011 50 021 9932h 51 D22 993p 52 023 oga4n 53 024 ogash 54 025 0036h 55 026 9937p 56 027 0038 57 028 0939p 48 029 0030h Quantity of Digi
266. Output Total Error Error Error Advance error 0 Note 0 0 Note 0 Minimum Behind error Tet 0 Tte 0 Advance error 0 Note Increment 0 Note Increment Tet Tte Maximum 1 scan time Behind error 1 scan time Tte 1 scan time 2 scan times Tet Tte Tet 1 scan time Notes Advance error does not occur at the timer input and timeout output Tet Tte 1 scan time Increment is 1 sec TML 100 ms TIM 10 ms TMH or 1 ms TMS The maximum advance error is Increment 1 scan time The maximum behind error is 3 scan times The timer input error and timeout output error shown above do not include the input response time behind error and output response time behind error caused by hardware Power Failure Memory Protection Timers TML TIM TMH and TMS do not have power failure protection To provide a timer with this protection use a counter instruction and special internal relay M8121 1 sec clock M8122 100 ms clock or M8123 10 ms clock Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart 10 sec Timer ON Reset 4 10 gt ON C2 or Note Designate counter C2 used in this program as a keep type counter See Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 9 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS TMLO TIMO TMHO and TM
267. P D10 D20 D30 Note Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of float data data register D999 or D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 5 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the ADD and SUB Instructions Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination When destination device D1 is not set to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 When repeat is assigned as many consecutive devices as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ADD addition and SUB subtraction instructions the following examples are described using the ADD instruction Repeat One Source Device Data Type Word and Integer When only S1 source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 SOTU ADD W SIR S2 Di 11 D10 D20 D30 3 Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 3 D10 10 Dii 15 D12 20 S2 Repeat 0 D20 25 D20 25 D20 25 When only Si source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device 01 01 1 ADD D SiR D10 52 D20 Di REP D30 3 ri Re
268. PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Step 4 settings Pulse Output with Table 9 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0020 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz NS Frequency change time D0021 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0022 D0023 5000 1to 100 000 000 Control direction 00024 Reverse Acceleration deceleration contrd D0024 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number D0025 0 Oto 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D20 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D21 3000 3 000 ms Preset value D22 D23 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D24 Reverse Reverse 1 Timing of change D24 Acceleration deceleration first Before 0 Next step number D25 0 Step 0 end 19 48 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS This section describes an example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function single pulse output reversible control disabled using the following settings The pulses are output from Q14 100 kHz 200 Hz Step 1 Preset value 100 000 Frequency change time 5 000 ms Interrupt Step Preset value 100 000 Preset value 1 000 000 Preset value 3 000 r 5
269. Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1 5 1 10 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h through 39h The number of digits that can be converted is be 1 through 5 for word data and 1 through 10 for double word data Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the S1 or S2 data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Make sure that the last source data determined by 51 52 1 is within the valid device range If the derived source device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ATOB
270. RAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 27 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 4 S3 source 3 Proximity signal S3 specifies the proximity signal Specify either an external input or an internal relay The external input can be specified as IO to 135 or the internal relay can be specified as MO to M1277 An interrupt is used to read the proximity signal The proximity signal can be read without being affected by the user program scan I1 14 110 to 135 The information updated in the END processing is read as the proximity signal It is affected by the to M1277 user program scan High speed 10 I2 13 15 I6 17 Notes Do not use the same input or internal relay as the proximity signal for ZRN1 and ZRN2 instructions If they operate simultaneously pulse output may not stop even if the proximity signal changes from on to off the high speed proximity signal set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Input on Function Area Settings Do not use the input as interrupt input catch input high speed counter or frequency measurement When using the high speed proximity signal ensure that no chatter noise occurs in the proximity signal 5 D1 destination 1 Operation status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the ZRN1 and ZRN2 instructions Starting from the specified internal relay this instruction uses 2 sequential internal relays The range of available in
271. RC FT1A H24RA FT1A H24RC FT1A HAORKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A H40RC FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC Modules that extend the functionality of display FT1A M12RA W FT1A M12RA B FT1A M12RA S FT1A C12RA W FT1A C12RA B FT1A C12RA S See FT1A M14KA W FT1A M14KA B FT1A M14KA S FT1A C14KA W FT1A C14KA B FT1A C14KA S FT1A M14SA W FT1A M14SA B FT1A M14SA S FT1A C14SA W FT1A C14SA B FT1A C14SA S 12 1 0 type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 12 I O points FT1A B12RA FT1A B12RC FT1A H12RA FT1A H12RC 24 1 0 type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 24 I O points FT1A B24RA FT1A B24RC FT1A H24RA FT1A H24RC 40 I O type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 40 I O points FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A B40RC FT1A H40RKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A H40RC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 48 I O points 48 1 0 type FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with an AC power supply AC power type FT1A B12RC FT1A H12RC FT1A B24RC FT1A H24RC FT1A B40RC FT1A H40RC FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with a DC power supply DC power type FT1A B12RA FT1A H12RA FT1A B24RA FT1A H24RA FT1A B40RKA FT1A H40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A H40RSA FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA Preface 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC TABLE OF CONTENTS
272. RISON INSTRUCTIONS gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To H Data type W or I S1 252 gt S3 gt D1 on Data type D L F 5151 1 252 52 1 gt S3 S3 1 gt D1 on When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off ICMP gt S1 S2 S3 Di Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X X S3 Source 3 Data to compare X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Comparison output For the valid device address range see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or S3 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 S2 and S3 When F float data is selected and S1 S2 or S3 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When the data of S1 is sma
273. ROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 9 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Data Types for Advanced Instructions When using move data comparison binary arithmetic Boolean computation bit shift rotate data conversion and coordinate conversion instructions data types can be selected from word W integer I double word D long L or float F For other advanced instructions the data is processed in units of 16 bit word Data Type Symbol Bits poesia Range of Decimal Values Word Unsigned 16 bits 16 bits 1 0 to 65 535 Integer Signed 15 bits I 16 bits 1 32 768 to 32 767 Double Word Unsigned 32 bits D 32 bits 2 0 to 4 294 967 295 Long Signed 31 bits L 32 bits 2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Float Floating point F 32 bits 2 3 402823x10 to 3 402823x1078 Decimal Values and Hexadecimal Storage Word Integer Double and Long Data The following table shows hexadecimal equivalents which are stored in the CPU as a result of addition and subtraction of the decimal values shown Data Type Result of Addition Hexadecimal Storage Result of Subtraction Hexadecimal Storage 65535 FFFF 0 0000 0 0000 Word 65535 FFFF 1 BW FFFF 131071 CY FFFF 65535 BW 0001 65536 BW 0000 65534 CY 7FFE 65534 BW 7FFE 32768 CY 0000 32768 BW 0000 32767 7FFF 32767 7FFF 0 0000 0 0000 Integer 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 32767 8001 32767 8001 32768 8000 32768 8000 32769 CY FFFF 32769 BW FFFF
274. ROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 u DEC 19 PuLsE OuTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Preview The preview shows the operation with the content configured on the Table tab Si Control Register S2 Initialization Input 7153 Interrupt flag D1 Monitor Register 02 Completion Output Tag Name D0000 f es re Device Address 00000 wooo ooo Preview 18 100000 5 Hz Step 2 Step Step Step Step 6 Step Min 18 Max This setting configures the maximum value for the graph The range of values that can be entered depends on the selected mode 19 Min This setting configures the minimum value for the graph The range of values that can be entered depends on the selected mode 20 Slide bar Move the slide bar to preview the operation when the interrupt input is executed n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 39 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Examples ARAMP ARAMP1 instruction reversible control disabled timing chart ARAMP1 instruction S1 is specified as data register D200 S2 is specified as internal relay MO S3 is disabled D1 is specified as data register DO D2 is specified as internal relay M50 ARAMP instruction input ARAMP instruction input Output pulse Q14 Pulse output ON M50
275. Read M8085 Interrupt Input I7 Edge Cleared Cleared Read eae Reserved M8090 Group 1 10 Maintained Cleared Read M8091 Group 2 I2 Maintained Cleared Read M8092 Group 3 I3 Maintained Cleared Read Catch Input ON OFF Status M8093 Group 4 I5 Maintained Cleared Read 8094 Group 5 I6 Maintained Cleared Read M8095 Group 6 I7 Maintained Cleared Read MED Reserved M8100 User Communication Connection 1 Cleared Cleared Write 7 8101 Receive Instruction Cancel Connection 2 Cleared Cleared Write M8102 Flag Connection 3 Cleared Cleared Write 7 Reserved Connection 1 ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating Cleared Connection 2 M8111 Connection Status ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating Cleared Read Connection 3 mente ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating Read peers Reserved 8120 Initialize Pulse Cleared Cleared Read M8121 1 sec Clock Operating Cleared Read M8122 100 ms Clock Operating Cleared Read M8123 10 ms Clock Operating Cleared Read M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed Maintained Maintained Read M8125 In operation Output Cleared Cleared Read us Reserved M8130 Connection 1 Maintained Cleared Read Write 1 1 Oe User Connection 2 Maintained Cleared Read Write Communication Connection M8132 Connection 3 Maintained Cleared Read Writ
276. S1 52 gt D1 D2 When input is on the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and S2 are added together to determine the data source The 16 or 32 bit data is then moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2 IMOV S1 R S2 D1 R 02 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X 1 99 S2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X X X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the device data is the timer counter current value TC or CC When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the device data is the timer counter preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 When F float data is selected only data register can be designated as S1 or D1 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8
277. S1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 11 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Settings There are two methods to configure dates for the YEAR instruction Specify the method on the Device tab with Data register settings e Configure the dates as a fixed setting The dates for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The dates for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see To configure the dates as a fixed setting on page 12 12 Configuring the dates by specifying data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see To configure the dates by specifying data registers on page 12 16 To configure the dates as a fixed setting The dates for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The dates for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running Device tab YEAR Yearly Timer E3777 Devices pi Data register s 495 R 5 01 Output 2 Device Address Comment Pulse Output 53 The number of parameter tabs 1 E Preview Year 23 January 2013 February 2013 March 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th
278. SB 51 LSB After shift 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First data for bit shift X X X S2 Source 2 Data to shift into the LSB X X X X Oori N_B Number of bits in the data string X 1 65535 Bits Quantity of bits to shift X 1 15 For valid device address ranges see Chapter 5 Special Functions Device Addresses in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 Since the SFTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 1 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples SFTL 16 bits M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MON W Si Di When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 43690 D10 43690 to data register D10 Each time input IO is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the left by 1 bit as assigned by device Bits The last bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Zeros are set to the LSB Bits to shift 1
279. SO Off Delay Timer Four types of on delay off delay timers are available 1 sec off delay timer TMLO 100 ms off delay timer TIMO 10 ms off delay timer TMHO and 1 ms off delay timer TMSO A total of 100 FT1A 12 or 200 other SmartAXIS on and off delay timers can be programmed in a user program Each timer must be allocated to a unique number TO through T199 Timer Device Address Range Increments TMLO 1 sec off delay timer TO to T199 0 to 65535 sec 1 sec TIMO 100 ms off delay timer TO to T199 0 to 6553 5 sec 100 ms TMHO 10 ms off delay timer TO to T199 0 to 655 35 sec 10 ms TMSO 1 ms off delay timer TO to T199 0 to 65 535 sec 1ms Preset Value 0 to 65535 DO to D1999 Constant Data registers The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 The preset value can be 0 through 65535 and designated using a constant or a data register TMLO 1 sec Off delay Timer Ladder Diagram TMLO Program List Timing Chart Instruction Data ON OFF 4sec gt TIMO 100 ms Off delay Timer Ladder Diagram TIMO Program List Instruction Data I 10 1 TMHO 10 ms Off delay Timer Ladder Diagram TMHO 10 IE 2 TMSO 1 ms Off delay Timer Ladder Diagram TMSO 10 m T3 5 10 Program List Instruction Data Program List Instruction Data 10 ON OFF
280. STRUCTIONS JMP Jump and JEND Jump End The JMP jump instruction is usually used in combination with the JEND jump end instruction At the end of a program the JMP instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the JEND instruction These instructions are used to proceed through the portion of the program between the JMP and the JEND without processing This is similar to the MCS MCR instructions except that the portion of the program between the MCS and MCR instruction s executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is on the JMP is valid and the program is not executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is off the JMP is invalid and the program is executed When the input condition to the JMP instruction is on and the JMP is executed other instructions between the JMP and JEND are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT and OUTN All are held in current status SET and RST All are held in current status Current values are held TML a Timeout statuses are held Current values are held CNT CDP and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are held Shift register bit statuses are held SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is held Input conditions cannot be set fo
281. SmartAXIS Describes basic operations for ladder programming instructions for editing and FT9Y B1382 Ladder Programming Manual monitoring ladders on the SmartAXIS available devices and instruction lists and this manual details of each instruction SmartAXIS FBD Programming Describes basic operations for function block programming device and function block FT9Y B1386 Manual lists and details of each function block SmartAXIS Touch product specifications installation and wiring instructions instructions for FT9Y B1390 setting basic programming actions and special functions device and instruction lists User s Manual communication functions and troubleshooting procedures for the Touch series Describes usage instructions for WindLDR programming software for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite series Describes programming for the SmartAXIS Touch series and usage instructions for the WindO I NV3 configuration software WindLDR Help WindO I NV3 Help DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Preface 3 NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL Model Names Name Used in this Manual Description Detailed Type No SmartAXIS FT1A programmable logic controllers Modules without LCD SmartAXIS Lite FT1A B12RA FT1A B12RC FT1A B24RA FT1A B24RC FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A B40RC FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC Modules with LCD SmartAXIS Pro FT1A H12RA FT1A H12
282. Stead Ise frequen arting number dd Mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz frequency on page 19 38 17 Next step number on Starti 7 N x 6 Next st b 1101 arting number x 6 6 ext step number o 18 page 19 38 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input S2 specifies the initialization input When the initialization input S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR ARAMP instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers An external input IO to 135 Note or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To only initialize the values one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU single output up instruction or the SOTD single output down instruction Note For the 40 I O type external inputs IO to I27 can be used 4 S3 source 3 Interrupt input When the interrupt input changes from off to on the pulse output process for the running step is aborted and pulse output restarts with the settings for the step configured by the interrupt number In the following example the interrupt input turns on while step 2 is running Pulse output processing for step 2 aborts and the operation transitions to step 12 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Steady pulse frequency frequency Steady pulse frequency
283. TAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 17 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Data Register Allocation The settings configured on the parameter tabs are allocated to the data registers as follows Storage 7 Read destination Data size word W Write Setting Start address 0 1 R W ON setting Start address 1 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 2 1 R W P 1 tab Year OFF settin Month D Day of th k b Start address 3 1 R W of days when specified to remain on Start address 4 1 R W ON setting Start address 5 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 6 1 R W 2 tab Year OFF settin Month D Day of th k b Start address 7 1 R W ONEN Zay m idis i of days when specified to remain on Start address 76 1 R W ON setting Start address 77 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 78 1 R W P 20 tab Year OFF settin Month D Day of th k b Start address 79 1 R W onthi Day or Day 6f the wee namber of days when specified to remain on Month Day or Day of the week data register allocation The Month Day or Day of the week are allocated as bits in 1 data register as follows e Month Day Data register 1 word _ _____ ____ 4
284. TRUCTIONS 6 D2 destination 2 Operation status D2 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 instructions Starting from the specified internal relay 5 sequential internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Address Description This relay turns on during pulse output Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when the ARAMP instruction output stops number 0 ON 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output ends This relay turns on when pulse output completes Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when the step number currently being executed is number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete 0 This relay turns off when the ARAMP instruction output starts Starting Pulse output 0 Steady pulse output This relay turns off when the pulse output status is steady number 2 status 1 Changing output pulse frequency This relay turns on when the pulse output is changing This relay turns on when the pulses output exceed the configured preset value Starting Overflow 0 None Pulse output continues even if an the overflow occurs during steady number 3 1 An overflow has occurred output or while the pulse frequency is changing However pulse counting current value data register is suspen
285. TRUCTIONS The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register When a data register is used the double word data of two consecutive data registers becomes the preset value For 32 bit data storage setting see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Ladder Diagram Preset Input 10 Up Pulse 1 Down Pulse Timing Chart Preset Input IO Up Pulse I1 Down Pulse I2 Counter C2 Value Counter C2 Program List Instruction Data 10 1 12 C2 100000 I3 C2 01 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 100000 100001 100000 99999 ee 0 1 100000 100000 ON OFF Double word counter instructions use two consecutive counters and counters cannot be used more than once in a user program The preset input must be turned on initially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the up and down pulses are on simultaneously no pulse is counted The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 4 294 967 295 on the next count down After the current value reaches 4 294 967 295 counting up it changes to 0 on the next count up When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see
286. Text IDEC Corp SmartAXIS un DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 17 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Character Set European Scroll speed 500 ms Scroll unit 1 dot When a text with effect is set to scroll the text is displayed on the LCD of the SmartAXIS as follows Text IDEC Corporation SmartAXIS 13 18 1234567812345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812 IDEC Co poration t 1 1 1 1 1 1 LT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 pt W 62 5 msec 62 5
287. They can be combined with reversible control as follows Select this option when using pulse output Reversible control TR A disabled in a single direction Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently Reversible control Pulse A is used as pulse output Pulse B on Single pulse off is used as reversible control output mode Pulse A is use fo d pulse CW Reversible control forward ps GW Dual pulse output output i p Pulse B is used as reverse pulse CCW mode output The ports used on the SmartAXIS varies based on the instruction used the combination of the pulse output mode and reversible control and the model used Port used Instruction Operating condition 30 170 type 48 1 type Pulse output Reversible Pulse output Reversible port control port port control port Reversible control disabled Q14 Q14 ARAMP1 Reversible control single pulse output Q14 Q16 Note Q14 Q12 Reversible control dual pulse output Q14 Q15 Q14 Q15 Reversible control disabled Q15 Q15 ARAMP2 Reversible control single pulse outp
288. U and SOTD instructions 5 26 SOTU SOTD instructions using with program branching 14 2 Source and destination devices 4 9 device 4 9 special data register 3 8 special dates 12 11 special internal relay 3 2 for interrupt status 16 1 for receive instruction cancel flag 25 20 specified date 172 11 start control M8000 3 5 delimiter 25 10 multi byte 25 11 WindLDR 1 1 1 3 status code receive 25 20 transmit 25 6 STOH 24 10 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 INDEX structure of an advanced instruction 4 9 receive instruction cancel flag SUB 8 1 M8100 M8102 3 6 subnet mask 08088 08091 3 13 port 2 M8022 3 5 subroutine 14 4 port 3 M8023 3 5 subtraction 8 1 program SUM 8 15 execution error sum 8 15 M8004 3 5 SWAP 11 23 User Program Execution Errors 4 13 posue V version version D8029 3 12 system program D8029 3 12 setup W WindLDR ID quantity of inputs D8000 3 11 programming ID quantity of outputs D8001 3 11 DI or EI 16 2 T 241 qut 1 8 TAN 21 5 start 1 1 1 3 tangent 21 5 word shift 20 7 TCCST 6 16 WISE 107 teaching timer 20 3 X XCHG 6 15 time XORW 9 1 addition 241 XY format set 17 1 subtraction 24 5 XYFS 171 timer 100 ms off delay 5 10 10 ms off delay 5 10 1 ms off delay 5 10 1 sec off delay 5 10 accuracy 5 8 instruction using with program branching 14 2 interrupt status M8144 3 7 or counter as destination device 4 9 as source device 4 9 timer counter current value store 6 16 TML TIM TMH and TMS
289. V or WSFT is executed M8024 turns on When completed M8024 turns off If the CPU is powered down while executing BMOV or WSFT M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again Example WSFT Before shift 10 010 12345 D100 through D102 D101 through D103 D100 1111 D10 0100 D101 2222 When input IO is turned on data of 3 data registers starting with D100 assigned by destination device D1 is shifted to the next data registers Data of data register D10 D102 3333 assigned by source device S1 is moved to D100 assigned by destination device D1 D103 4444 0104 5555 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 After first shift 010 12345 D100 12345 D101 1111 D102 2222 D103 3333 D104 5555 10 7 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTL Rotate Left When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the assigned source device S1 is rotated to the left by the ieu EJ 9874 bits quantity of bits assigned by device bits The result is set to the source device S1 and last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Data Type Word bits to rotate 1
290. Week Day 53 The number of parametertabs 1 Sunday Monday Data Register Allocation J Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Preview Week Day ON Sunday Monday Cancel Data Register Allocation Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Cae Data register allocation The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers DO to D2 as shown in the table below The settings configured on the parameter tab are stored in DO to D2 by turning on initialization input S2 Data register 2 Ladder program M8120 M8125 M10 12 10 1 tab MOV W SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 MOV W Setting Initial setting Day of the week setting 15934 Monday to Friday both ON settings and OFF settings ON time 830 OFF time 1715 REP 51 900 Di Di 51 1700 Di D2 The initialization input M1 turns on with the first scan and the initial settings configured on the P 1 tab are stored in DO to D2 The WEEK instruction starts operating according to the values of data registers DO to D2 When M10 turns on the ON time D1 changes to 9 00 and the OFF time D2 changes to 17 00 When M1 turns on all of the WEEK instruction settings DO to D2 return to the initial setti
291. X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X 1 4 m D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the S1 or S2 data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ATOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the sourc
292. XIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 OFF IDEC 7 Introduction DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Data can be compared using data comparison instructions such as equal to unequal to less than greater than less than or equal to and greater than or equal to When the comparison result is true an output or internal relay is turned on The repeat operation can also be used to compare more than one set of data When the repeat operation is enabled repeated comparison results of CMP instructions can be selected from AND or OR operation and the result is outputted to an output or internal relay Three values can also be compared using the ICMP gt instruction Load comparison instructions load comparison results so that the following instructions can be initiated Since the data comparison instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used CMP Compare Equal H lt gt Compare Unequal H CMP lt Compare Less Than H CMP gt Compare Greater Than H CMP lt Compare Less Than or Equal To H AND OR S1 R S2 R Di R REP CMP lt gt 51 AND OR S2 R Di R REP CMP AND OR S1 R S2 R Di R
293. You can select to output pulses at the steady pulse frequency or to change the frequency at a constant rate until the steady pulse frequency is reached after pulses that maintain the frequency in the previous step are output The next step is executed when the number of pulses output reaches the preset value You can configure a maximum of 18 steps ARAMP 51 52 53 Di D2 1 52 53 Di D2 Steady pulse __N frequency Frequency A Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Before 1 i Before After Steady pulse __ frequency Steady pulse __ frequency P Time Frequency change time Frequency change time When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR ARAMP instruction are stored in the control registers When the interrupt input configured by S3 is turned on the step being executed is aborted and the interrupt step is executed The settings for the step being executed including the preset value and the steady pulse frequency are stored in the data registers specified by D1 The control status including the pulse output status output on output direction output complete is set as the operation status in the internal relays specified by D2 Note Configure multiple PULS pulse output
294. able When Enable upper and lower limits When the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction exceeds the output manipulated variable upper limit or lower limit the upper limit value or the lower limit value is set as the output manipulated variable When Enable percentage The result of the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction multiplied by 1 to 9996 is set as the output manipulated variable The output manipulated variable lower limit 7 is disabled at this time 6 Output manipulated variable upper limit percentage 51 14 When Output manipulated variable restriction is Output manipulated variable upper limit lower limit Set the upper limit value of the output manipulated variable for the control output When the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction is higher than or equal to the output manipulated variable upper limit value the set upper limit value is set as the output manipulated variable for the control output When setting the output manipulated variable upper limit value you must set the output manipulated variable upper limit value so that it satisfies output manipulated variable lower limit value output manipulated variable upper limit value The output manipulated variable upper limit value can be set from 0 to 10096 in 196 increments When Enable percentage The result of the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction multiplied by 1 to 9996 is set as the ou
295. ad Error Flag When an error occurs while calendar clock data is read from the internal clock to the special data registers D8008 to D8014 M8014 turns on If calendar clock data is read successfully M8014 turns off M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag When M8016 is turned on data in data registers D8015 through D8018 calendar new data are set to the internal clock M8017 Clock Data Write Flag When M8017 is turned on data in data registers D8019 through D8021 clock new data are set to the internal clock M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag When M8020 is turned on data in data registers D8015 through D8021 calendar clock new data are set to the internal clock M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented by one M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 2 When M8022 is turned on all RXD2 instructions ready for receiving user communication through port 2 are disabled M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 3 When M8023 is turned on all RXD3 instructions ready for receiving user communication through port 3 are disabled DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 5 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES
296. alues according to the specified data type For details see Insert Word Device on page 13 4 e Word device values can be displayed as bar graphs For details see Insert Bar Graph on page 13 7 e Text can be displayed and switched according to the value of a bit device input output internal relay shift register timer contact or counter contact For details see Insert Bit Device on page 13 5 Arbitrary text can be displayed e The specified text can be displayed For details see Edit MSG Message dialog box on page 13 2 The text display effects can be configured e Text can be scrolled blinked or inverted For details see Insert Text with Effect on page 13 6 Date time data can be displayed e The current date time and the date time when the input to the MSG instruction is turned on can be displayed on the LCD For details see 7 Special Data on page 13 3 The language for displayed text can be selected from 9 languages e Text can be displayed in 9 languages using 4 types of character sets For details see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 The text display settings can be configured The scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed can be configured For details see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 Device values can be modified e Device values displayed with the MSG instruction can be modified on the SmartAXIS For details see Modifying Device Values on the SmartAXIS on page 13 16
297. and 1 175495 x 1038 or between 1 175495 1038 and 3 402823 x 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the conversion result is 0 When the conversion result is below 3 402823 x 1038 or over 3 402823 x 1038 causing an overflow the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus infinity Not Zero Overflow Overflow M8003 1 1 Execution Result 3 402823x10 8 1 175495 1038 0 1 175495 10738 3 402823 1038 When data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the TAN instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example TAN E When input I1 is turned on the tangent of the radian value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 3 926991 rad 57 4 rad tan 5 4 1 000001 TAN F Si Di D10 D20 S1 Di 010 011 3
298. and 3 402823x10 8 1 0 Not zero within the range between 1 175495 107 8 and 1 175495x10 39 0 0 Zero Not Zero Overflow Overflow M8003 1 1 Execution Result 3 402823 1038 1 175495 1038 0 1 175495x10 8 3 402823x1038 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 11 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE 32 bit Data Storage When double word D or long L data is selected the data is stored in consecutive devices in the following manner according to the 32 bit data storage setting configured in Function Area Settings under Device Settings For applicable devices and instructions see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Word devices The data storage when From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings When DO is specified as the source or destination device the upper word is stored in DO and the lower word is stored in D1 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word 1234 5678 DO 1 2 4 Upper word Hexadecimal D1 5 6 7 Lower word The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings When DO is specified as the source or destination device the lower word is stored in DO and the upper word is stored in D1 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word T 1234567 8 5 6 7 8 Lower word Hexadecimal 01 1 2 3 4 Upper word Bit devices The data storage when From Upper Word is s
299. and process variable error are also output as alarms For tag names device addresses and comments see 1 S1 source 1 Control Register on page 28 2 4 S4 source 4 Set Point Shows the device that stores the PID control set point When a data register is specified in S1 source 1 51 7 is automatically allocated For tag names device addresses and comments see 1 S1 source 1 Control Register on page 28 2 28 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE 28 PID INSTRUCTION 5 Device Allocation Click this button to display the Device Allocation dialog box As shown below a table containing the data registers and internal relays and corresponding PID instruction settings is displayed in the dialog box 6 Click Allocate Comments button 7 and you can allocate the names of settings as comments for the data registers and internal relays Device Allocation dialog box Device Allocation Data Register Internal Relay Description Process variable after conversion Output manipulated variable 010 100 Operating status High alarm value Low alam value gt 6 Sampling period Control mode Set point Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Derivative gain ARW anti reset windup AT bias Output manipulated variable upper limit a Input tab This tab configures the input parameters for the PID instruction PID PID Control E
300. anging preset values for timers and counters in the SmartAXIS RAM does not automatically update preset values in the user memory ROM This is useful for restoring original preset values When the Clear button is pressed before pressing the Confirm button the changed timer counter preset values are cleared from the RAM and the original preset values are loaded from the ROM to the RAM WindLDR User Program Clear DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Custom Monitor New Preset Value Clear Button Confirm Button SmartAXIS ROM User Program RAM SmartAXIS ROM User Program RAM SmartAXIS ROM User Program RAM Changed Preset Values Original Preset Values 5 17 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CC and gt Counter Comparison The CC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated The CC gt instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value is equal to or greater than the given value
301. are on in an array of 64 bits starting at internal relay M4 assigned by source device S1 Since 3 bits are on in the searched area the quantity is stored to data register D100 assigned by destination device D1 M17 MO M37 M20 D100 3 M57 M40 M7 l M60 ON M97 M80 M117 M100 Searched area When input IO is on a search begins for the total number of bits that are on in an array of 60 bits starting at bit 0 of data register D10 assigned by device S1 Since 2 bits are on among the 60 bits 2 is stored to data register D100 assigned by device D1 Bit D10 Dii D12 D13 014 5102001 1 1 Searched area DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 17 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ALT Alternate Output H Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 X Valid Devices Device D1 Destination 1 When input is turned on output internal relay or shift register bit assigned by D1 is turned on and remains on after the input is turned off When input is turned on again the assigned output internal relay or shift register bit is turned off The ALT instruction must be used with a SOTU or SOTD instruction otherwise the assigned output internal relay or shift register bit repeats to turn on and off in each scan FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X Function I Q M R T C D Constant Re
302. ata register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the number of data registers to read For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 3 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Introduction SmartAXIS instructions are divided into Basic Instructions which perform sequencing and Advanced Instructions which perform moves comparisons Boolean computations binary arithmetic operations bit shifts and other operations Basic Instruction List Symbol Name Function See Page AND And Series connection of NO contact 5 4 AND LOD And Load Series connection of circuit blocks 5 5 ANDN And Not Series connection of NC contact 5 4 BPP Bit Pop Restores the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily 5 6 BPS Bit Push Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily 5 6 BRD Bit Read Reads the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily 5 6 Counter Comparison Equal to comparison of counter current value 5 18 CC gt Counter Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value 5 18 CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter Dual pulse reversible counter 0 to 65 535 5 11 CDPD EL use Double word dual pulse reversible counter 0 to 4 294 967 295 5 14 CNT Ad
303. ated by S1 the CSV file is created and the header and the log data is output Output example Time D0010 Header 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 lt Log data When a CSV file with the same date already exists in the folder designated by S1 only the log data is appended to the CSV file Output example Time D0010 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 2011 09 07 17 30 23 1212 Appended log data When the execution of DLOG instruction finishes the device designated by D1 is turned on and the status code is stored to the device designated by D2 according to the execution result For status codes see 3 D2 destination 2 Execution status on page 26 3 Notes e The time required to create new CSV file create a file and output header is 510 us e When the SmartAXIS starts running and instruction is executed the header is appended to the CSV file even if the same instruction was executed previously within the same day Output example Time D0010 Header 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 Log data Time D0020 Appended header 2011 09 07 17 30 23 1212 Log data e For details on the SD memory card specification see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 1 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS Notes e The number of DLOG instructions that
304. average maximum and minimum values are set to 3 devices starting with device designated by D1 When the sampling exceeds 65535 cycles the average maximum and minimum values at this point are set to 3 devices starting with device designated by D1 and sampling continues When the sampling end input is turned on before the sampling cycles designated by device S3 have been completed sampling is stopped and the results at this point are set to 3 devices starting with device designated by D1 The average value is calculated to units rounding the fractions of one decimal place When the sampling end input is not used designate an internal relay or another valid device as a dummy for source device S2 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When an error occurs incorrect S1 data are skipped Average maximum and minimum values are calculated from correct S1 data and set to 3 devices starting with the device designated by D1 For details about user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 18 1 18 AVERAGE INSTRUCTIONS Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X 16 po
305. be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To only initialize the values one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU single output up instruction or the SOTD single output down instruction Note For the 40 I O type external inputs IO to I27 can be used 4 01 destination 1 Operation status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the RAMP instructions Starting from the specified internal relay 4 sequential internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Pace Function Setting This relay turns on during pulse output Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when the RAMP instruction output stops number 0 ON 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output ends Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay turns off when the RAMP instruction output starts Starting Pulse output 0 Steady pulse output This relay turns off when the pulse output status is steady number 2 status 1 Changing output pulse frequency This relay turns on when the pulse output is changing This internal relay turns on when the pulses output exceed
306. behind error and is at its maximum Tie Time from input turning on to END processing Tet Time from END processing to the timer instruction execution 5 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Timer Counting Error Every timer instruction operation is individually based on asynchronous 16 bit reference timers Therefore an error can occur depending on the status of the asynchronous 16 bit timer when the timer instruction is executed Use of a TMS 1 ms timer is recommended to reduce advance errors TMS Error TML TIM TMH 1 sec timer 100 ms timer 10 ms timer 1 ms timer Advance error 1000 ms 100 ms 10 ms 1ms Maximum Behind error 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time Timeout Output Error The output RAM status is set to the actual output when the END instruction is processed When timeout output turns from off to on an error occurs depending on the position where the timer instruction is programmed in the user program The timeout output error shown below does not include output delay caused by the hardware Program Processin SIE i EM 9 9 Timeout output error is equal to Tte behind error and can be between ON 0 and one scan time Timeout Output RAM OFF 0 Tte 1 scan time ON Tte Time from the timer instruction execution to the END processing Actual Output OFF Tte 1 scan time Error Maximum and Minimum Error Timer Input Error Timer Counting TIBISOUS
307. between 3 and 5 7 9 7 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS 7 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The binary arithmetic instructions make it possible for the user to program computations using addition subtraction multiplication and division For addition and subtraction devices internal relay M8003 is used to carry or to borrow The ROOT instruction can be used to calculate the square root of the value stored in one or two data registers ADD Addition ADD _ Si R 9 SXR Di R SUB Subtraction SUB S1 R SXR DI R MUL Multiplication MUL Si R S2 R H DIV Division H S1 R S2 R DIV Data type W or I Data type D L or F 51 S2 5 D1 CY 5151 1 52 52 1 5 0101 1 CY When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source devices S1 and S2 are added together The result is set to destination device D1 and internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Data type W or I Data type D L or F S1 S2 5 D1 BW 5151 1 52 52 1 0101 1 BW When input is 16 or 32 bit data assigned source device S2 is subtracted from 16 or 32 bit data as
308. bit data S1 52 Di Applicable SmartAXIS 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS When input is on N blocks of 16 bit word data starting with device assigned by D1 are shifted up to the next 16 bit positions At the same time the data assigned by device S1 is moved to the device assigned by D1 S2 specifies the quantity of blocks to move 3 blocks S2 S1 16 bit data S1 data First 16 bit data Second 16 bit data Third 16 bit data Fifth 16 bit data FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Source data for word shift X X X X X X X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of blocks to shift X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First device address to shift For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as source S1 or I integer S2 16 points are used D double word Ei When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as source S1 or S2 1 point is L long used F float Special Internal Relay M8024 BMOV WSFT Executing Flag While the BMO
309. branching instructions 14 1 using with SOTU SOTD instructions 14 2 using with timer instruction 14 2 programming DI or EI using WindLDR 16 2 prohibited instructions 5 31 ladder programs 5 31 proximity signal 79 26 pulse input 5 22 quit WindLDR 1 8 RAD 21 1 radian 21 1 receive 25 7 completion output 25 7 25 19 data byte count 25 20 digits 25 9 format 25 7 25 8 status 25 7 25 20 code 25 20 timeout 25 14 25 19 repeat cycles 4 9 25 4 25 10 designation 4 9 operation ADD and SUB instructions 8 6 ANDW ORW and XORW instructions 9 7 data comparison instructions 7 4 DIV instruction 8 10 indirect bit move instruction 6 11 move instructions 6 3 MUL instruction 8 8 INDEX reset input 5 22 restore timer counter preset values 5 17 restriction on ladder programming 5 31 reverse shift register 5 24 Reversible control 19 18 19 37 ROOT 8 14 rotate left 10 8 right 10 10 ROTL 10 8 ROTR 40 10 RS232C control signal status 3 13 DSR input control signal option 3 14 output control signal option 3 14 rung 1 3 1 4 RXD 25 7 Script SCRPT 27 1 SD Memory Card Capacity 3 72 secto HMS 24 10 server connection 1 through 3 connected IP address D8110 D8121 3 14 SET and RST instructions 5 7 SFR and SFRN instructions 5 22 SFTL 10 1 SFTR 10 3 shift left 10 1 register instructions 5 22 right 10 3 shift rotate instructions 10 1 simulate operation 1 7 SIN 21 3 sine 21 3 single output instruction 5 26 Skip 25 16 SOT
310. can be programmed in a user program is 48 However make sure that the folder name specified by the DLOG instruction is not duplicated by any folder names specified by the other DLOG instructions When the folders are duplicated log data with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file e The DLOG instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 e While the input to DLOG instruction is on log data is repeatedly output to the CSV file When you want to output the log data only one time add a SOTU single output up instruction or SOTD single output down instruction to the input condition For SOTU or SOTD see SOTU and SOTD Single Output Up and Down on page 5 26 e The process of writing data to the SD memory card for the DLOG instruction takes several scans Once a DLOG instruction is executed the process continues until the log data transfer is complete regardless of any change in the instruction input While the log data is being written to the SD memory card instructions are not being executed even when the inputs to DLOG instructions are turned on To execute the DLOG instruction again confirm that the previous data transfer process has finished and then execute the instruction Applicable Smar
311. ce S1 is not within the range between 1 0 and 1 0 or does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ACOS instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example ACOS When input I1 is turned on the arc cosine of the value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by I1 destination device D1 ACOS F Si Di D10 D20 acos 0 7071068 2 356195 rad 2 356195 rad 4 rad S1 Di 010 011 0 7071068 020 021 2 356195 T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 21 7 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS ATAN Arc Tangent H atan 51 51 1 01 01 1 rad ATAN F S1 Di When input is on the arc tangent of the value assigned by source device S1 is stored in radians to destination assigned by device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 1
312. ch User s Manual Since the SFTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 3 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Example SFTR Data Word M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV W pem d REP When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 29 to data register D10 Each time input IO is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as assigned by device Bits The last bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Zeros are set to the MSB Bits to shift 2 MSB D10 LSB Before shift 010 29 010 000010101010101001111101 Shift to the right M8003 YN MSB Y D10 LSB cY After first shift D10 7 00 11111 0 8003 MSB Y D10 LSB After second shift 010 1 1 1 8003 Data Type Double Word M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV W ae nom REP When the CPU s
313. cial Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8160 M8163 Button Input Status When the ESC and direction buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro are simultaneously pressed the corresponding special internal relays M8160 through M8163 turn on When no buttons are pressed M8160 through M8163 turn off M8166 M8177 Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter Special internal relays used for the high speed counter For details on the Pro Lite high speed counter see Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on the Touch high speed counter see Chapter 3 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 3 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC Special Data Registers 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Note Do not change the data in any of the reserved special data registers otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly Special Data Register Device Addresses Device Address Description Updated See Page D8000 Quantity of Inputs When I O initialized 3 12 D8001 Quantity of Outputs When I O initialized 3 12 D8002 SmartAXIS Type Information Power up 3 12 D8003 Memory Cartridge Information Power up 3 12 D8004 Reserved D8005 General Error Code When error occurred 3 12 D80
314. cond rotation D10 32794 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and D11 is rotated to H SOTU ROTL D 51 bits the left by 1 bit as assigned by device bits 11 D10 1 The status of the MSB is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Bits to rotate lt 1 Before rotation 010 011 2 684 788 742 cY MSB 010 011 LSB 1 0 1 011111010 1 0 1011110 M8003 xs Rotate to the left After rotation 010 011 1 074 610 189 MSB 010 011 LSB 1 1 11111011001 1111101 8003 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 9 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTR Rotate Right When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the assigned source device S1 is rotated to the right by the puer bits quantity of bits assigned by device bits WE The result is set to the source device S1 and the last bit status rotated out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Data Type Word bits to rotate 1
315. counter instructions use two consecutive counters and counters cannot be used more than once in a user program The preset input must be turned on initially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin The up mode is selected when the up down selection input is on The down mode is selected when the up down selection input is off The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 4 294 967 295 on the next count down After the current value reaches 4 294 967 295 counting up it changes to 0 on the next count up When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then Online Custom New Custom Monitor To change a counter preset value select DEC D in the pull down list box When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately When power is off the changed preset values are cleared and t
316. cribes the operations using the LCD display on the SmartAXIS Pro When using the SmartAXIS Touch read this manual taking into consideration that the operation button display area is omitted Button Operations The button operations differ when the button is pressed and released and when the button is pressed and held Press Hold Operation Press The button is pressed for 0 1 seconds or more and less than 2 seconds and then released Press and hold The button is pressed for 2 seconds or more and then released Notes This chapter describes the button operations for the ladder program monitoring e For details on SmartAXIS Pro button operations refer to the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e For details on SmartAXIS Touch button operations refer to the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 1 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS List of Button Operations on the Ladder Program Display Screen Button Press Hold Basic operation Press When the cursor is on a NO contact or a NC contact this toggles the state of that contact ox 0 When the cursor is not on a NO contact or a NC contact nothing happens Press and hold Displays the details screen a screen that displays the details of the instruction at the cursor position E Press Ends the ladder program monitoring P
317. cute only one instruction each of RXD2 through RXD3 at a time If the start input for a RXD2 through RXD3 instruction is turned on while another RXD2 through RXD3 instruction without a start delimiter is executed a user communication error occurs Since RXD instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Once the input to the RXD instruction is turned on the is activated and ready for receiving incoming communication even after the input is turned off When the RXD completes data receiving the RXD is deactivated if the input to the RXD is off Or if the input is on the RXD is made ready for receiving another communication Special internal relays are available to deactivate all RXD instructions waiting for incoming communication For user communication receive instruction cancel flags see User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag on page 25 20 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 7 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication Receive Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR RXD Receive 51 01 02 Device Address Comment Insert Delete Edit Selections and Devices in Receive Instruction Dialog Box TXD Transmit instruction Type EE RXD Receive instruction Port Port 2 Port 3 Receive user commu
318. d be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source 16 points I integer word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word data or 2 points double L long word data are used F float 10 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Example ROTL Data Type Word M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV W Si Di 40966 D10 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 M8120 ROTL W Si bits D10 1 Each time input IO is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as assigned by device bits 10 The status of the MSB is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Bits to rotate 1 MSB D10 LSB Before rotation D10 40966 1010 0 00 0 0 01110 M8003 MSB D10 LSB After first rotation 010 16397 1 100 0000 0000 1101 M8003 MSB D10 LSB After se
319. d from ROM For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8148 D8157 D8166 Remote I O Communication Error Status When a communication error occurs between the remote I O communication slave and master the details of the communication error are stored in these special data registers D8148 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error Status D8157 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error Status D8166 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error Status D8149 D8156 D8158 D8165 D8167 D8174 Remote I O Analog Input Values The analog input values 0 to 10 VDC to the remote I O analog inputs are converted to digital values 0 to 1000 and stored in the special data registers allocated to each remote I O slave D8149 AI10 D8150 AI11 08151 12 D8152 AI13 08153 lt D8154 AI15 D8155 AI16 D8156 AI17 e D8158 AI20 D8159 AI21 D8160 AI22 08161 lt 123 D8162 AI24 08163 lt 125 08164 126 D8165 AI27 e D8167 AI30 D8168 AI31 D8169 AI32 D8170 AI33 D8171 A134 08172 lt 135 D8173 AI36 D8174 4137 D8184 Data Register ROM Backup Start Address to Read This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the start address of the data registers to read For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8185 Data Register ROM Backup Number of Registers to Read This special d
320. d in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source 16 points I integer word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word data or 2 points double L long word data are used F float 10 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC Example ROTR Data Type Word Si 13 Di D20 MOV W REP M8120 ROTR W S1 bits D20 2 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 13 to data register D20 Each time input I1 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by 2 bits as assigned by device bits The last bit status rotated out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Bits to rotate 2 MSB D20 LSB Before rotation 020 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 MSB D20 LSB After first
321. d to destination devices as described below Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination device D1 is not assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 and D1 1 When repeat is designated consecutive devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on word and integer data the following examples are described using word data Repeat One Source Device When only Si source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device 01 01 1 Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 MUL W Si R 52 Di REP x 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 030 031 Dii x D20 030 031 012 020 030 031 e Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 MUL D SIR 52 Di REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 NE 030 031 012 013 020 021 030 031 014 015 020 021 030 031 Repeat Destination Device Only When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 MUL W Si 52 DiR REP H D10 D20 D30 3 D10 x D20 D30 D31 D10 020 D32 D33 D10 x D20 RI D34 D35 Data Type Double Word
322. data Transmitted data D10 010Ch 0 1 o C 0 Binary to ASCII conversion 30h 31h 30h 43h 30h 43h Lowest 2 digits 2 BCD to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 3 ASCII data Transmitted data olol PI 010Ch 1 0026 D10 Decimal 8 BCDtoASOI 30h 30h 32h 36h 38h 32h 36h 38h value conversion 3 No conversion Transmit digits 1 ASCII data Transmitted data SOH D10 010 No conversion Lowest 1 digit Repeat Cycles When a data register is assigned to repeat as many consecutive data registers as the repeat cycles are used to transmit data in the same conversion type and transmit digits Example pio o00Ch Data register No D10 Transmit digits 2 D11 0022h Conversion type BCD to ASCIT 012 0038h Data from data registers starting with D10 is converted in BCD to ASCII and is transmitted according to the designated repeat cycles 1 Repeat cycles 2 ASCII data 3 ETE ET e 31h 32h 33h 34h Repeat 1 D10 000Ch 00012 Repeat 2 D11 0022h 1 0
323. dated See Page D8114 D8115 Connection 2 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 15 D8116 D8117 D8118 D8119 Connection 3 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 15 D8120 D8121 D8122 D8129 Reserved D8130 Connection 1 Connected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 16 D8131 Connection 2 Connected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 16 D8132 Connection 3 Connected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 16 When executing data D8133 Data Register ROM Backup Execution Status register ROM backup 3 16 read and write D8134 High Word Current Value Frequency E n 3 14 D8135 Low Word Measurement Value I6 rots D8136 High speed High Word 08137 Counter Lon Nord Preset Value 3 14 LL Group 5 16 RM D8138 High Word Reset Value 3 14 D8139 Low Word D8140 High Word Current Value Frequency 4 E n 3 14 D8141 Low Word Measurement Value I7 pe D8142 Higri speed High Word bpeia3 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 14 L2 Group 6 17 DR REM D8144 High Word Reset Value 3 14 08145 Low Word D8146 Reserved D8147 D8148 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 16 D8149 Analog Input AI10 Every scan 3 16 D8150 Analog Input AI11 Every scan 3 16 D8151 Analog Input 112 Every scan 3 16 Remote I O D8152 Slave 1 Analog Input AI13 Every scan 3 16 D8153 Analog Input AI14 Every scan 3 16 D8154 Analog Input AI15 Every scan 3 16 D8155 Analog Input AI16
324. ded at the point when the overflow occurred This relay turns off when the output direction of the pulses being Starting Pulse output 0 Forward output is forward number 4 direction 1 Reverse This relay turns on when the output direction of the pulses being output is reverse Setting tab ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description Operation mode Us Mode 0 1 Hz to 10kHz 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Reversiblecontrolenable Disabled Number of steps 9 1 1 to 18 steps Start step number 10 1 1 to 1 step Interrupt step number 1 1to 1 step OK 7 Operation mode This setting selects the frequency range to output from following operation modes Operation mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz increments of 1 Hz Note 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz increments of 10 Hz Note Note The output frequency error is within 5 19 36 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 8 Reversible control enable This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following modes Reversible control enable 0 Reversible control disabled 1 Reversible control single pulse output 2 Reversible control dual pulse output There are two modes for the pulse output mode single pulse and dual pulse
325. determined by adding the offset value to data register p3opail 273 020 assigned by source device S1 D 20 2 022 Lu If data register D51 contains a value of 20 the destination is determined by adding the offset value to data register D10 assigned by destination device 01 D 10 20 030 pso 2 D51 20 As a result when input IO is on the data in data registers D22 D23 is moved to data registers 030 031 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 6 7 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOVN Indirect Move Not H When you specify D0000 to D0999 as S1 make sure that S1 S2 does not exceed D0999 In order to specify D1000 to D1999 as source device with S1 S2 specify D1000 to D1999 as S1 When you specify D0000 to D0999 as D1 make sure that D1 D2 does not exceed D0999 In order to specify D1000 to D1999 as destination device with D1 D2 specify D1000 to D1999 as D1 51 52 NOT gt D1 D2 IMOVN Si R S2 D1 R 02 When input is the values contained in devices assigned by S1 and S2 are added together to determine the data source The 16 or 32 bit data is then inverted and moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device
326. device S1 depending on the selected mode The result is stored to destination device D1 and borrow M8003 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device X Fucton L Q MR T C D Constant Repeat Mode Selection of S1 data range 0 1 S1 Source 1 Date time data to subtract from X S2 Source 2 Time data to subtract X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When Mode 0 is selected source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 occupy 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as these devices When Mode 1 is selected source device S1 and destination device D1 occupy 7 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D993 and D1000 D1993 can be designated as these devices Source device S2 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as source device S2 Since the TSUB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 5 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS Mode 0 When mode 0 is selected time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with s
327. ding Counter Adding counter 0 to 65 535 5 11 CNTD Double word Adding Counter Double word adding counter 0 to 4 294 967 295 5 14 CUD Up down selection reversible counter 0 to 65 535 5 11 CUDD Double word Up Down Double word up down selection reversible counter 5 14 Selection Reversible Counter 0 to 4 294 967 295 DC Data Register Comparison Equal to comparison of data register value 5 20 DC gt Data Register Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value 5 20 END End Ends a program 5 30 JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction 5 29 JMP Jump Jumps a designated program area 5 29 LOD Load Stores intermediate results and reads contact status 5 1 LODN Load Not Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status 5 1 MCR Master Control Reset Ends a master control 5 27 MCS Master Control Set Starts a master control 5 27 OR Or Parallel connection of NO contact 5 4 OR LOD Or Load Parallel connection of circuit blocks 5 5 ORN Or Not Parallel connection of NC contact 5 4 OUT Output Outputs the result of bit logical operation 5 1 OUTN Output Not Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation 5 1 RST Reset Resets output internal relay or shift register bit 5 3 SET Set Sets output internal relay or shift register bit 5 3 SFR Shift Register Forward shift register 5 22 SFRN Shift Register Not Reverse shift register 5 22 SOTD Single Output Down Falling edge differentiation output 5 26 SOTU Single O
328. dition August 2014 Fourth Edition Trademarks SmartAXIS is a trademark of IDEC Corporation IMPORTANT INFORMATION Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components individually or in combination with other equipment All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their application and for choosing an application appropriate for the component individually or in combination with other equipment All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does including these diagrams and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all programs prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user Preface 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC RELATED MANUALS The following manuals related to the SmartAXIS are available Refer to them in conjunction with this manual Type No Manual Name Description Describes product specifications installation and wiring instructions instructions for FTOY B1378 SmartAXIS Pro Lite basic programming operations and special functions device and instruction lists User s Manual communication functions and troubleshooting procedures for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite series
329. e Reserved SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 3 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device CPU Address Description Stopped Power OFF Read Write M8144 Timer Interrupt Status ON Allowed OFF Prohibited Cleared Cleared Read Reserved M8150 Comparison Result 1 Maintained Cleared Read M8151 Comparison Result 2 Maintained Cleared Read M8152 Comparison Result 3 Maintained Cleared Read M8153 Reserved M8154 Write Operating Cleared Read Write Data Register ROM Backup M8155 Read Operating Cleared Read Write ae Reserved 8160 ESC Key Up Key Cleared Cleared Read M8161 ESC Key Down Key Cleared Cleared Read Key Input Status M8162 ESC Key Left Key Cleared Cleared Read M8163 ESC Key Right Key Cleared Cleared Read Reserved M8166 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8167 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8170 High speed Counter Group5 I6 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8171 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8172 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8173 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read Write M8174 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8175 High speed Counter Group 6 I7 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read Write M8176 Comparison ON Status Mainta
330. e I integer or destination 16 points word data are used D double word When word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long 1 point word data is used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 7 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOH e Quantity of Digits 4 E ATOH W S1 D10 Quantity of Digits E ATOH W Si D10 Quantity of Digits 2 E e Quantity of Digits 1 E ATOH W S1 D10 ATOH W S1 D10 D10 D11 D12 D13 D10 D11 D12 D10 D11 D10 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h ASCII 49 0031h D20 020 020 020 11 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Binary 4660 1234h Binary 291 0123h Binary 18 0012h Binary 1 0001h IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOA BCD to ASCII H Word data S1 D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 D1 4 Double word data 51 5
331. e SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Basic Operations LCD and Operation Buttons SmartAXIS Pro Five symbols horizontally and two symbols vertically are displayed in the ladder program display screen Ladder program display p fo 19 ooe gt 1 oo 666000 0606 6660000000 6566 lo lo M0001 D0000 01 The operation buttons are laid out on SmartAXIS Pro as shown in the diagram on the right Operation buttons lt gt A total of six buttons left amp up lt down right 69 ESC and OK are available to use For the SmartAXIS Touch Five symbols horizontally and two symbols vertically are displayed in the N ladder program display screen Ladder program display s 00002 H H F4 M0001 poon The operation buttons are laid out on the Operation buttons LCD display screen A total of six buttons left amp up down right 69 ESC and OK are available to use Note The LCD resolution number of pixels differs between the SmartAXIS Pro and the SmartAXIS Touch but the content of the ladder program display screen is the same excluding the display area for the SmartAXIS Touch operation buttons This chapter des
332. e and tangent and also calculation of arc sine arc cosine and arc tangent values RAD Degree to Radian H Applicable SmartAXIS 1 S1 1 x 1 180 gt 01 01 1 rad RAD F Si D1 When input is on the degree value assigned by source device S1 is converted into a radian value and stored to the destination assigned by device D1 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Degree value to convert into radian X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For the valid device address range see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the conversion result is not within the range between 3 402823 1038 and 1 175495 1038 or between 1 175495 103 and 3 402823 x 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the conversion result is 0 When the conversion result is between 1 175495 x 1038 and 1 175495 x 107 the destination device designated by D1 stores 0 Not Zero Overflow Overflow M8003 1 1 Execution Result 3 402823 1038 1 175495 1038 0 1 175495 10 38 3 402823 1038 When data designated by S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution
333. e if the proportional band offset is set to 2090 the proportional band shifted up by 2090 The proportional band offset can be set from 100 to 100 11 Control Period 51 21 Set the cycle to perform on off control of the control output according to the output manipulated variable The on pulse width for the control period varies according to the output manipulated variable The control period can be set from 0 1 to 50 0 seconds in 0 1 second increments When control period 50 5 seconds Output manipulated Output manipulated Output manipulated variable 8096 variable 6096 variable 50 ON 4 sec 5 sec ON 3 sec 5 sec ON 2 5 sec 5 sec Control output lt lt S1 Control registers Storage destination Function Setting details R W When Analog Input is specified AIO to AI5 can be selected 51 0 is read only S140 Process variable When Data Register is specified R W Store a value that satisfies process variable minimum value lt process variable lt process variable maximum value S1 0 is readable writable 51 1 Output manipulated variable Store a value between 0 and 100 0 to 100 R Store the PID instruction execution status or error status S142 Operation status R For details see Operation status S1 2 on page 28 10 Set a value that satisfies low alarm value high alarm value lt process variable maximum S143 High alarm value R W
334. e For SmartAXIS Pro Lite see Chapter 13 Scripts Script Function Overview in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e For SmartAXIS Touch see Chapter 20 Script 1 1 Overview of the Script Function in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Script editing e For SmartAXIS Pro Lite see Chapter 13 Scripts Script Editing and Management in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e For SmartAXIS Touch see Chapter 20 Script 2 Editing and Management of the Script in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Script ID X 1 255 D1 Destination 1 Execution results X Note Note Special data registers cannot be specified Settings S1 source 1 Script ID Specify the script ID A constant or data register can be specified D1 destination 1 Execution results Specify the data register where the execution results are stored Two data registers starting with the specified data register are used The script execution status error code at script completion is stored in D1 The execution time from when the script execution is started until it is completed is stored in D1 1 in 100 ps increments IDE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 27 1 27 SCRIPT Execution results The execution results D1 D1 1 store the execution status and
335. e SmartAXIS LCD For details see Insert Word Device on page 13 4 4 Bit Device Inserts a bit device in the area specified by the cursor Two different items of text can be switched between and displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD according to the value of the specified bit device For details see Insert Bit Device on page 13 5 5 Text with Effects Inserts text in the area specified by the cursor The specified text is displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD For details see Insert Text with Effect on page 13 6 6 Bar Graph Inserts a bar graph in the area specified by the cursor The value of the specified device is displayed as a bar graph on the SmartAXIS LCD For details see Insert Bar Graph on page 13 7 13 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 n DEC INI 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS 7 Special Data Special data such as the current date and time can be entered at the cursor position Select the data to enter on the special data list window popped up when Special Data is pressed Size of the area used on the LCD screen varies based on the selected special data Display Occupied Area Special data Lines x Display type Display example January 1 2012 13 30 columns Current date YYYY MM DD 2012 01 01 1x10 Current time HH MM 13 30 1x5 Date the input to the MSG instruction is turned YYYY MM DD 2012 01 01 1x10 Time the input to the MSG instruction is turned HH MM 13 30 1x5
336. e action becomes large and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes faster The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes more powerful so the time to reach the set point will become longer but overshoot will occur less easily When auto tuning is used the appropriate derivative time can be automatically set for the target application For details see Auto Tuning AT on page 28 15 The derivative time can be set from 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments 7 Derivative Gain 51 11 When the derivative gain is set to a small value the output manipulated variable is more easily affected by noise and changes in the set point When the derivative gain is set to a large value the output manipulated variable is less easily affected by noise and changes in the set point but stability at normal times decreases When noise or changes in the process variable occur normally set this to 20 to 3096 The derivative gain can be set from 0 to 100 in 190 increments 8 ARW Anti Reset Windup 51 12 Set the point to start the integral action If the integral term is enabled from the start of execution of the PID instruction overshoot may be caused Overshoot can be controlled by delaying the integral action with ARW linked to the proportional band ARW is normally 10096 which results in appropriate control with little overshoot If ARW is set too small overshoot can be eliminated but an offset may occur The ARW
337. e changed the dual timer does not operate correctly The dual timer instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed The data in D1 destination 1 is unchanged For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Examples DTML DTIM DTMH DTMS While input IO is on four dual timer instructions turn on and off the Di D2 destination devices according to the on and off durations assigned by source 10 M10 D100 devices S1 and S2 Di D2 10 M20 D200 51 52 01 02 50 25 M30 D300 51 52 01 02 250 125 40 0400 ON I0 ON M10 rr ON M20 ore ON M30 ON M40 rr 250 ms 125 ms Instruction Increments S1 ON duration 52 OFF duration DTML 1 sec 2 1 sec x 2 2 sec 1 1 sec x 1 1 sec DTIM 100 ms 10 100 ms x 10 1 sec 5 100 ms x 5 0 5 sec DTMH 10 ms 50 10 ms x 50 500 ms 25 10 ms x 25 250 ms DTMS 1 ms 250 1 ms x 250 250 ms 125 1 ms x 125 125 ms For the timer accuracy of timer instructions see TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer on page 5 7 20 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 20 DUAL TEACHING TIMER INSTRUCTIONS TTIM Teaching Timer While input is
338. e connected over Ethernet converts the received data in the specified format and stores the converted data to data registers 51 Di 02 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X When the input is on the received data designated by S1 is received from the device connected with the specified connection When all data has been received the device designated by D1 is turned on Receive status the receive status and error code is stored to the device designated by D2 The byte count of received data is stored to 02 1 When user communication receive instruction cancel flag M8100 M8101 M8102 is turned on while receiving incoming data the execution of all active receive instructions for the corresponding connection is canceled Apart from the connection settings and the allocation of the user communication receive instruction cancel flags the settings of ERXD and RXD instructions are the same For details on RXD instruction see RXD Receive on page 25 7 The ERXD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For details on the user communication client and user communication server specifications and for details on use
339. e initial data 1049 DO to store the value for the first cycle 50 D1 to determine the jump cycles IMOV moves DO data 1049 to D1049 in the first cycle DEC decrements DO data to 1048 DJNZ jumps to label 255 until D1 value reduces to 0 1049 149 1049 1048 O 148 1048 1047 147 1047 1046 146 1046 1001 101 1001 1000 0100 1000 14 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 15 REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes the refresh instructions that update the status of input contacts external output and the current value of the high speed counter to the latest value during a ladder scan IOREF I O Refresh H When input is on 1 bit I O data assigned by source device S1 is refreshed immediately regardless of the scan time When I input is used as S1 the actual input status is immediately read into an internal relay starting with M300 allocated to each input available on the SmartAXIS When Q output is used as S1 the output data in the RAM is immediately written to the actual output available on the SmartAXIS Refresh instructions are useful when a r
340. e output is complete number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay turns off when the PWM instruction output starts Starting Overflow 0 None When pulse counting is enabled this relay turns on when a pulse is number 2 1 An overflow has occurred output that exceeds the configured preset value Setting tab PWM Pulse Width Modulation EN Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Output pulse frequency 5 100 1to 1 000 in increments of 1Hz Pulse width ratio 6 50 1 to 100 in increments of 1 26 Pulse counting 7 Disable pulse counting PWM 1 and PWM 2 instructions only Preset value 8 1to 100 000 000 Current value 9 1to 100 000 000 Error status 10 5 Output pulse frequency This setting configures the frequency for the pulses to output from 1 Hz to 1 000 Hz in increments of 1 Hz The output frequency error is within 5 6 Pulse width ratio This setting specifies the ON ratio duty cycle for the pulse frequency to output The duty cycle can be set for output frequency in increments of 1 The pulse duty cycle can be set for output frequency in increments of 1 from 1 Hz to 50 Hz but from 51 Hz to 1 000 Hz the increments for the pulse duty cycle that can be specified to change according to the output frequency The increment becomes pulse frequency 50 For example when 51 Hz is specified for the pulse frequency 51 50 2 rounded up so the increment is 2 When 1 000 Hz is specified f
341. eal time response is required in a user program which has a long scan time The refresh instruction is most effective when using the refresh instruction at a ladder step immediately before using the data The IOREF instruction can be used with an interrupt input or timer interrupt to refresh data Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 I O for refresh X X Only input or output numbers available on the SmartAXIS can be designated as S1 Input and output numbers for remote I O slaves cannot be designated as S1 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Input Device Addresses and Allocated Internal Relays Internal relays are allocated to each input device as shown in the table below For example when 110 is designated as S1 the latest value of 110 is set to M310 Input Device poc Input Device yon Input Device poc Input Device pn 10 M300 110 M310 I20 M320 I30 M330 11 M301 I11 M311 I21 M321 I31 M331 I2 M302 112 M312 122 M322 I32 M332 I3 M303 113 M313 123 M323 133 M333 I4 M304 I14 M314 I24 M324 I34 M334 I5 M305 I15 M315 125 M325 I35 M335 I6 M306 116 M316 I26 M326 17 M307 I17 M317 127 M327 During normal execution of a user program I O statuses are refreshed simultaneously when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan When a real
342. eas and do not continue with each other hat Advanced instructions execute operation only on the available devices in the valid area If a user program syntax error is found during programming WindLDR rejects the program instruction and shows an error message rh The internal relay ends at M1277 Since the MOV move instruction reads 16 internal relays the last internal relay exceeds the valid range resulting in a user program syntax error MOWW Si Di M1270 DO This program results in a user program syntax error The destination of the DIV division instruction requires two data registers D999 and D1000 Since D1000 exceeds the valid range a user program syntax error occurs DIV W 51 52 Di REP D100 D200 D999 The MOV move instruction sets data of data register DO to 16 internal relays M1260 through M1277 in the first repeat cycle The destination of the second cycle is the next 16 internal relays M1280 through M1297 which are invalid resulting in a user program syntax error MOV W Si DIR REP DO M1260 2 For details about repeat operations of each advanced instruction see the following chapters NOP No Operation No operation is executed by the NOP instruction The NOP instruction may serve as a place holder It can also be used to add a delay to the CPU scan time in order to simulate communication with a machine or application for debugging purposes
343. ec 10 ms TMS 1 ms timer TO to T199 0 to 65 535 sec 1 5 The valid device range depends on SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses page 3 1 The preset value can be 0 through 65535 and designated using a decimal constant or data register TML 1 sec Timer Ladder Diagram TML TIM 100 ms Timer Ladder Diagram TIM TMH 10 ms Timer Ladder Diagram TMH TMS 1 ms Timer Ladder Diagram TMS IDEC Program List Instruction Data Program List Instruction Data Program List Instruction Data Program List Instruction Data Timing Chart ON 10 4 ON TO p ON n OFF ON Q0 orr yl Timing Chart ON 10 ON 2 sec Ti ON n OFF ON Qi yl Timing Chart ON 10 gt a 1 sec ON 2 ON ON Q2 yl Timing Chart ON 10 0 5 sec ON ON ON Q3 n SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 7 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Timer Circuit The preset value 0 through 65535 can be designated using a data register DO through D999 or D1000 through D1999 then the data of the data register becomes the preset value Directly after the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML TIM TMH TMS TMLO TIMO TMHO or TMSO instruction can be p
344. ecreasing The pulses increase according to the frequency change time every 10 ms until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output is canceled If this input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is started The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the RAMP1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input NE 1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 21 uL 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS RAMP1 instruction reversible control enabled dual pulse output mode timing chart RAMP1 instruction S1 is specified as D200 D1 is specified as internal relay M50 RAMP instruction input RAMP instruction input Forward pulse Q14 Reverse pulse Q15 Control direction D203 Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 0 Forward 1 Reverse When the RAMP instruction input changes f
345. ecution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Label number to call X 0 255 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the LCAL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Note Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LCAL instruction is programmed When designating S1 using other than a constant the value for the label is a variable When using a variable for a label make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user program If a matching label does not exist a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS LRET Label Return This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine called by the LCAL instruction When the subroutine is completed LRET normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine starting with a LABEL instruction When the LRET is programmed at other places a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12
346. ed as source S1 2 points double word data are used I integer When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as source S2 D double word X 16 points are used L long When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as source S2 1 point is used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 10 5 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Example BCDLS MOV W S1 Di REP M8120 123 D10 MOV W S1 Di REP 4567 Dil BCDLS When S2 1 digits to shift Before shift After first shift After second shift M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instructions set 123 and 4567 to data registers D10 and D11 respectively Each time input IO is turned on the 32 bit binary data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits shifted to the left by 1 digit as assigned by device S2 and converted back to 32 bit binary data Zero is set to the lowest digit after each shift D10 D11 0111213 1415 617 0 lt lt Shift to the left 0 11121314115 1617 0 0 MSD LSD 10 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC WSFT Word Shift H When S2 3 quantity of blocks to shift S1 16 bit data D1 0 First 16
347. ed on Data registers D1900 and D1901 assigned by destination device D3 are reserved for system work area 50 D100 D101 D102 gt Q2 While input IO is on the ON duration is measured The measured time value hour minute and second is stored to data registers D100 D101 D102 assigned by destination device D1 and compared with 50 hours assigned by source device S1 When the measured value reaches 50 hours output Q2 assigned by destination device D2 is turned on Data registers D1900 and D1901 assigned by destination device D3 are reserved for system work area SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 i DEC 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction User communication instructions convert data to the specified data type and transmit and receive that data The user communication instructions can be used on expansion communication ports or the Ethernet port To perform user communication with external devices connected on the expansion communication ports use the TXD user communication transmit and RXD user communication receive instructions To perform user communication with external devices connected over the Ethernet use the ETXD User communication transmit over Ethernet and ERXD User communication receive over Ethernet instructions TXD Transmit H Applicable SmartAXIS When input is on data assigned by S1 is converted into a specified format and transmitted from port 2 through port 3 to a rem
348. ed while the SmartAXIS is running For allocating the data register region see Data Register Allocation on page 12 7 The data registers can be initialized with the days of the week and the times configured on the parameter tabs by turning on the initialization input For initialization see 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input on page 12 6 Note When this check box is not selected the day of the week and the time are fixed settings The day of the week and the time are configured on the parameter tabs The day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For fixed settings see To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings on page 12 2 2 S1 source 1 Starting data register This setting specifies the start of the data register region to store the days of the week and time settings for the WEEK instruction This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers Setting Tag Name Description Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Used Data Registers Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings This item changes when the device address or the number of parameter tabs changes Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited For allocating the data register region
349. een 1 to 65535 seconds When D8074 is 0 the backlight is always ON The backlight ON time can also be changed with the HMI function For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Changing Backlight ON Time in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8077 Out of Analog Input Range Status When an analog input value is 11V or higher the corresponding D8077 bit turns on When an analog input value is lower than 11V the corresponding D8077 bit turns off The assignment of each analog input is as follows Bit Bit Bit Bit 7 0 15 8 JV J E Analog Input 0 Analog Input 1 D8077 0 Analog Input 2 Analog Input 3 Analog Input 4 Analog Input 5 Analog Input 6 Analog Input 7 D8078 D8083 MAC Address Read only MAC address of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers in hexadecimal as shown below Example MAC address AA BB CC DD EE FF D8078 AAh D8079 BBh D8080 CCh D8081 DDh D8082 EEh D8083 FFh 3 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8084 D8087 IP Address Current Data Read only IP address of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example IP address aaa bbb ccc ddd D8084 aaa D8085 bbb D8086 ccc D8087 ddd D8088 D8091 Subnet Mask Current Data Read only Subnet mask of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example Subn
350. egister is assigned as the source I integer or destination 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a bit D double word X device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long 5 When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination F float 1 point word data or 2 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Example XORW To convert optional output status among a series of 10 output points use the XORW instruction in combination with 10 internal relay points 011 010 Q7 00 This program will invert the status of the shaded outputs on the left from on to off and those not shaded from off to on me 10 points M17 M10 M7 MO Ten outputs QO through Q11 are assigned to 10 internal relays through M11 M8120 Five internal relays MO M2 M4 M6 and M10 are set by initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 When input I1 is turned on the XORW instruction is executed to invert the status of outputs Q0 Q2 Q4 Q6 and Q10 XORW W Si S2 Di REP 11 Q0 Qo 9 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 f DEC 9 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operati
351. elected under Device Settings When RO is specified as the source or destination device the upper word is stored in RO to R15 and the lower word is stored in R16 to R31 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word R15 RO x 1234 5678 RO to R15 i 2 3 4 Upper word Hexadecimal R3 R16 x R16 to R31 5 6 7 8 Lower word The data storage when From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings When RO is specified as the source or destination device the lower word is stored in RO R15 and the upper word is stored in R16 R31 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word R15 RO x p 123 415 6 7 8 RO to R15 5 6 7 8 Lower word Hexadecimal E x R16 to R31 12 3 4 Upper word 4 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE User Program Execution Errors When an advanced instruction is executed a user program execution error occurs when any of the following conditions are met e the result of the adavnced instruction is invalid Source or destination device that is indirectly specified in the advanced instruction exceeds the valid device range e the advanced instruction does not operate correctly For example the data in the source device does not comply with the normal floating point format when the data type is Float F When a user program execution error occurs spec
352. em X S2 Source 2 Quantity of data blocks X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When F float data is selected only a data register can be designated as S1 For source S2 1 word is always used without regard to the data type When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When S2 is 0 or exceeds the correct value range for the selected device a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types Calculation ADD When ADD is selected all data types can be used W word x x When XOR is selected only W word data can be used I integer X D doubl d X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or double word destination 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used L long X F float X Quantity of Source and Destination Devices Depending on the ADD or XOR
353. en T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 BCD for word data and 0 through 9999 9999 BCD for double word data Make sure that each digit of the source designated by S1 is 0 through 9 If the source data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the BTOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word L long data or 2 points double word data are used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 3 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOH Data Word
354. er D45 C15 6 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC BMOV Block Move BMOV W Si N W D1 the quantity of blocks to move N blocks of 16 bit data 51 51 1 51 2 First 16 bit data Second 16 bit data Third 16 bit data OE unm RR ol Di Block Move 01 1 0142 am OE S1 S11 S142 STHN 1 D1 D1 1 D1 2 1 1 N blocks of 16 bit data First 16 bit data Second 16 bit data Third 16 bit data Nth 16 bit data S1 N 1 Nth 16 bit data D1 N 1 Nth 16 bitdata Applicable SmartAXIS 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS When input is on N blocks of 16 bit word data starting with device assigned by S1 are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with device assigned by D1 N W specifies FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X m N W N words Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First device address to move to X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or N W the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed W
355. erates as 100 R W S1 13 AT bias a value pi satisfies process variable minimum value lt AT bias lt process R W variable maximum value When Enable upper and lower limits Set a value between 0 and 100 0 to 100 Operates as 100 for a value other than 0 to 100 51414 Output manipulated variable When Enable percentage R W upper limit Set a value between 1 and 99 1 to 99 Operates as 100 for a value other than 1 to 100 Output manipulated variable manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction x scaling factor Output manipulated variable Set a value between 0 and 100 0 to 100 S1 15 M R W lower limit Operates as 0 for a value other than 0 to 100 51416 Output manipulated variable Set a value between 0 and 100 0 to 100 second R W rate of change Operates as 100 for a value other than 0 to 100 Set a value between 0 and 10000 0 00 to 100 0096 Set a value that satisfies output manipulated variable lower limit value manual mode output Manual mode output manipulated variable lt output manipulated variable upper limit value 51 17 i R W manipulated variable Operates as the output manipulated variable lower limit value for a value other than output manipulated variable lower limit value to output manipulated variable Output manipulated variable is stored as a value between 32 768 and 1418 Output manipulated variable 32 767 327 68 to 327 6796 R value For details see Output manipulated variable 90 va
356. erts transmission data to the specified data type and sends it to the external device connected over Ethernet ETXD 51 Di 02 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X When the input is on transmission data designated by S1 is transmitted to the device connected with the specified connection When transmission is complete the device designated by D1 is turned on Transmit status the transmission status and error code is stored to the device designated by D2 The byte count of transmitted data is stored to 02 1 Apart from the connection settings the settings of ETXD and TXD instructions are the same For details on TXD instruction see TXD Transmit on page 25 1 The ETXD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For details on the user communication client and user communication server specifications and for details on user communication over Ethernet see Chapter 10 User Communication User Communication over Ethernet in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual ERXD User Communication Receive over Ethernet H Applicable SmartAXIS The ERXD instruction receives data from an external devic
357. es stabilizes control in a short amount of time and attempts to improve the transient response characteristics PD control is suitable to temperature control with a fast rate of change When set to PD control integral time is automatically 0 Temperature Proportional band Set point Y Disturbance Time e When the derivative time is decreased the D derivative control becomes weaker and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes slower The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes weaker so the rise in temperature time to the set point will become faster but overshooting the set point will occur more easily e When the derivative time is increased the D derivative control becomes more powerful and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes faster The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes more powerful so the rise in temperature time to the set point will become slower but overshooting the set point will occur less easily 28 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC MUNI 28 PID INSTRUCTION PID control PID controls overshooting and hunting in Proportional control corrects the offset in I integral control and makes rapid temperature changes due to disturbances converge on the set point in a short amount of time in D derivative control Ideal temperature control can be performed by using PID control The parameters for the proportional band integra
358. es of internal relays starting with M0000 M0020 or M1180 but values of internal relays starting with M0007 M0037 or M1181 cannot be changed When unaligned bit devices are entered in the Custom Monitor dialog box of WindLDR to monitor 16 32 bit values monitored values are shown in grayed cell and you cannot change values of those devices un DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 7 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS 2 8 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDE e 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Introduction This chapter describes device addresses available for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite to program basic and advanced instructions Special internal relays and special data registers are also described For details on the device addresses of SmartAXIS Touch see Chapter 27 Internal Devices in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual The SmartAXIS is programmed using devices such as inputs outputs remote inputs remote outputs internal relays timers counters shift registers and data registers Inputs I are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals Remote inputs I are relays to receive input signals from external devices connected to the remote I O slaves Outputs Q are relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Remote outputs O are relays to send output signals to external devices connected to the remote I O slaves Internal relays M are relays used
359. es starting at the first scan 151st scan 152nd scan 153rd scan XXXth scan 1st scan Sampling Data D100 489 510 509 504 493 ON In operation Special IR M8125 OFF ON Sampling End Input 110 p NN ON Sampling Completion Output M100 OFF Average Value D200 502 Maximum Value D201 513 Minimum Value D202 485 i Values are set when 110 is turned on 18 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The pulse output instructions output pulses of a specified frequency These pulses will be generated from the pulse output ports PULS Pulse Output The PULS instructions output pulses of a specified frequency from the specified pulse output ports 51 52 Di When input is on pulses are output according to the control register settings specified by S1 The pulse control information output on output complete error is stored in the 52 internal relays specified by D1 as the operation status Di When the initialization input specified by S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR PULS instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers 52 Di 52 Di l1 l1 I Note Configure multiple PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP tra
360. ess with label 0 through 255 assigned by 51 H E Nn When input is off no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction The LJMP instruction is used as an either or choice between two portions of a program Program execution does return to the instruction following the LJMP instruction after the program branch Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Label number X 0 255 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the LJMP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Note Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LJMP instruction is programmed When designating S1 using other than a constant the value for the label is a variable When using a variable for a label make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user program If a matching label does not exist a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 14 1 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example LJMP and LABEL The following example demonstrates a program that jump
361. estination 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word long or float data are used When D double word X repeat is assigned for a bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination F float X 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 19 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples CVDT e Data Type Either 51 or D1 is not float Unless F float data is selected for both source and destination only the integral number is moved omitting the fraction Device Data Type Value Source F 3 141593 10 Destination Ww 3 When input IO is turned on 3 is stored to data register D2 51 Di 00 01 3 141593 D2 3 Data Type S1 has a larger data range than 01 When the source data exceeds the range of destination data type the destination stores a value closest to the source data within the destination data type E Device Data Type Value Source D 4294967295 Destination 65535 When input IO is turned on 65535 is stored to data register D2 51 Di 00 01 429
362. esult is between 1 175495 103 and 1 175495 x 1038 the destination device designated by D1 stores 0 When the operation result is less than 3 402823 1028 or larger than 3 402823 1028 causing an overflow the destination device designated by D1 stores a value of minus or plus infinity When the data designated by source device S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error occurs and the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed When a user program execution error occurs special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS are turned on For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the EXP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long F float X Example EXP When input I1 is on is raised to the data of data registers D10 and 011 assigned by source device S1 and the operation result is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 2 7182818 7 389056 EXP F Si Di D10 D20 51 Di 010 011 2 0
363. et mask aaa bbb ccc ddd D8088 aaa D8089 bbb D8090 ccc D8091 ddd D8092 D8095 Default Gateway Current Data Read only Default gateway of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example Default gateway aaa bbb ccc ddd D8092 aaa D8093 bbb D8094 ccc D8095 ddd D8104 RS232C Control Signal Status Port 2 and Port 3 RS232C control signal status of port 2 and port 3 is stored to D8104 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 00 Both DSR and DTR are off ES t o 01 DSRis off DTR is on D8104 10 DSR is DTR is off Sona y Port3 11 Both DSR and DTR are on D8105 RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option Port 2 and Port 3 Special data register D8105 is used to control data flow between the SmartAXIS RS232C port 2 and port 3 and the remote terminal depending on the DSR data set ready signal sent from the remote terminal Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 5 4 3 0 D8105 00 Port 3 Port 2 000 DSR is not used for data flow control 001 When DSR is on SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data 010 When DSR is off SmartAXIS can transmit and receive data 011 When DSR is on SmartAXIS can transmit data busy control 100 When DSR is off SmartAXIS can transmit data Others as 000 D8106 RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option Port 2 and Port 3 Special data register D8106 is
364. etion output 26 DATA LOG INSTRUCTIONS Specify the device that turns on when the transfer of log data to a SD card and the execution of the DLOG instruction are complete This device is turned on regardless of the success or failure of transferring log data to the SD memory card 3 D2 destination 2 Execution status Specify the device to store the status code One of the following status codes is stored according to the DLOG instruction execution status and result Status code Status Description 0 Normal 1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inserted 2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full 3 SD memory card writing error Writing log data to the SD memory card fails 4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB 5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected 6 SD inem ry card ames amor DEUS is executed while another DLOG instruction or TRACE instruction is being executed 7 Characters conversion error Converting log data to numeric characters fails 8 Folder creation error Creating the folder fails 9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails 32 Executing DLOG instruction Writing log data to SD memory card is in progress 4 Settings The following is a list of the device and display types that can be set as the data to be output to the CSV files Display type Valid Devices DEC W TC TP CC CP D
365. ettings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert Word Device Text with effect BarGraph Work Area cancel The Insert Bit Device dialog box opens 4 Configure the parameters so that the room temperature is displayed when M0000 is on and the outdoor temperature is displayed when M0000 is off Set Device to M0000 Using the keyboard enter IDEC room temp is as the ON Text and IDEC outdoor temp is as the OFF Text Under Display Options disable all of the options Insert Bit Device 9 Device 0000 Displayed when M0000 is a IDEC room temp Display Option Blinking O Invert Occupied Area Row x Column 1 x 24 Special Character inset Displayed when M0000 is off ON Text IDEC outdoor t OFF Text ils Cancel 13 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS 5 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message Ls Options Priority o 4 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert Word Device M0000
366. evice range If the derived destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the BTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long 1 point word data or 2 points double word data are used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 9 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOA W Quantity of Digits 5 E BTOA W Si D10 Quantity of Digits 4 BTOA W Si D10 Quantity of Digits E BTOA W Si D10 e Quantity of Digits 2 E Quantity of Digits 1 BTOA W Si D10 BTOA W Si D10 11 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PR
367. example forward and reverse cannot be changed until the pulse frequency is set to 200 Hz The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the 1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input un DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 41 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP1 instruction dual pulse output reversible control enabled timing chart 40 I O type ARAMP1 instruction S1 is specified as data register D200 S2 is specified as internal relay MO S3 is disabled D1 is specified as data register DO D2 is specified as internal relay M50 ARAMP instruction input ARAMP instruction input Forward pulse CW 014 Reverse pulse CCW Q15 Control direction 0 Forward 1 Reverse Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on pulses are output from Q14 according to the settings configured by the data registers The reversible control signal is output from Q14 or Q15 When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses increase and decrease according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the current pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are
368. f the elapsed time is equal to or longer than 90 minutes e xin the table indicates the elapsed time from the start of PID instruction until the set point is reached x is incremented by 1 every 10 minutes 9 is stored if the elapsed time is equal to or longer than 90 minutes Ifan error code status code value is equal to or greater than 100 is set for the operation status processing for auto tuning and PID control is canceled Set the correct parameters and then turn on the PID instruction input once again 28 10 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZIDEC 28 PID INSTRUCTION Status code Status description Status classification 1X Auto tuning in progress AT is normally executed 2X Auto tuning ended 5x P PI PID control in progress PID is normally executed 6x Set point is reached Changes from 5x to 6x onace the set point is reached Output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value output manipulated 103 R nn PP PID execution stop variable restriction lower limit value was set A value was set for the AT bias that does not satisfy process variable minimum value 104 PID execution stop lt AT bias lt process variable maximum value A value was set for the set point that does not satisfy process variable minimum value 106 PID execution stop lt set point lt process variable maximum
369. f the process variable PV set point SP manipulated variable MV high alarm value and low alarm value with the trend graph Showing hiding values colors the upper limit value and the lower limit value can be configured in the PID Monitor Settings dialog box For details see PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box on page 28 21 Note When plots on the trend graph reach the right edge of the graph the center of the graph moves to the left edge and the new log information is displayed from the center of the graph You can check the past log information by moving the scrollbar The log information retains a maximum of 10 000 items of information When the log information has reached 10 000 items of information the log information is deleted from the oldest items and the new log information is recorded The log information displayed on the trend graph is deleted when the dialog box is closed or when the PID instruction being monitored is changed 11 PID monitor table You can check the function name current value and device address for data registers and internal relays used by the PID instruction The current values displayed in white cells can be changed Showing hiding items can be changed in the PID Monitor Settings dialog box For details see PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box on page 28 21 12 Apply Configured Values By clicking this button you can reflect the PID control parameters adjusted in PID monitor table 11 as the initial setting val
370. figure the day of the week and the time for the WEEK instruction Specify the method on the Device tab with Data register settings e Configuring the day of the week and the time as fixed settings The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings on page 12 2 e Configuring the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see To configure the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers on page 12 5 To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running Device tab WEEK Weekly Timer ea r Data register settings D1 Output Tag Name 2 3 D Device Address Comment 6 4 Pulse Output 53 The number of parametertabs 1 B Preview Week Day ON OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
371. format and the incoming data does not match the constants in the receive format then a user communication error code is stored in the receive status The error code contained in the receive status depends on whether the constants are used as a start delimiter or as constants for verification If used as a start delimiter user communication error code 7 is stored in the receive status and the RXD instruction keeps waiting for valid incoming data On the other hand if used as constants for verification the receive status contains 74 and the RXD instruction finishes the execution To repeat receiving incoming communication turn on the input for the RXD instruction DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 15 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS e Start delimiter of incoming data does not match the receive format Const 02h xxh FFh xxh ODh Const Const Const 05h FFh 0Dh Start Delimiter Incoming Data RXD instruction keeps waiting for valid incoming data and completes data receiving after receiving valid data including a correct start delimiter Receive status 7 Receive Format Receive completion output 0 e Constant for verification of incoming data does not match the receive format Incoming Data Receive status stores 74 64 10 RXD instruction completes data receiving To repeat receiving incoming communication turn on the input for the RXD instruction Receive status
372. from off to on the output state at the current date is judged according to the ON OFF settings and the output is turned on for 1 scan only For pulse output see 6 Pulse Output on page 12 13 or 6 Pulse Output on page 12 17 When the year data is outside the range of 2000 to 2099 the month data is outside the range of 1 to 12 the day data is outside the range of 1 to 31 the week data is outside the range of 1 to 5 and the day of the week data is outside the range of 0 to 6 a user program execution error will occur The YEAR instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 When the yearly setting or monthly setting is enabled and a date that does not exist according to the month or year is set for the ON setting or the OFF setting the output turns on or off on the first day of the next month Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function IQ T C D Constant Repeat Si Sourel Starting dataregister A4 S2 Source 2 Initialization input X S3 Source 3 Number of parameter tabs X D1 Destination 1 Output port X A Special data registers cannot be designated as
373. g Input is specified the minimum value and the maximum value of the analog input settings are used as the minimum value and the maximum value for the input When Data Register is specified The value stored in 51 0 of the control registers is used as the PID control input Store a value in 51 0 that satisfies the condition minimum value 5 lt process variable lt maximum value 4 n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 3 28 PID INSTRUCTION Configure parameters 2 through 5 when data register is selected as the process variable 2 Device Address Shows the start data register S1 0 of the control registers configured on the device tab when Data Register is specified as the process variable 1 3 Data Type Select the process variable 51 0 processing unit Either W word or I integer can be selected 4 Maximum Value 5 Minimum Value When Data Register is specified as the Process Variable 1 configure the range of input settings process variable high alarm value low alarm value and control settings set point AT bias in PID control with the maximum and minimum values The maximum value and minimum value can be configured within the range of the data type 3 When the data type is I integer 32 768 to 32 767 When the data type is W word 0 to 65 535 6 High Alarm Value 51 3 Set the upper limit value of the process variable If the process variable is higher than or equal to the high alarm va
374. g RAMP1 and 1 in dual pulse output mode RAMP2 and ARAMP2 cannot be used PID instruction can be used with FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA only SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 X Note3 When using RAMP1 in single pulse output mode PULS3 and PWM3 cannot be used When using RAMP2 in single pulse output mode IDEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Structure of an Advanced Instruction Opcode The opcode is a symbol used to identify the advanced instruction Source Device Destination Device Repeat Cycles Data Type Specifies word W integer I double word D long L or float F data Source Device MOV W SIR DIR REP Repeat Designation Specifies whether repeat is used for the device or not Repeat Cycles Data Type Repeat The source device specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to be processed Designation by the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two source devices Destination Device The destination device specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to store the result of the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions Specifies the quantity of repeat cycles 1 through 99 require two destination devices Input Condition for Advanced Instructions Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact except NOP no operation LABEL label and LRET label return instructions The input condition can be programmed
375. g data from the master station The incoming data is sent to multiple slave stations 0 through 9 and the local slave station number is 1 Therefore incoming data from the master station must be received only when the incoming data is sent for the slave station 1 Incoming data Incoming data consists of start delimiter STX a slave station number which can be 0 through 9 data 0000 through 9999 and end delimiter CR STX CR 02h 3xh 3xh 3xh 3xh 3xh 13h 1st Data 0000 through 9999 Last character Slave Station Number 0 through 9 character e Single byte start delimiter Only the first byte can be the start delimiter The second byte of the incoming data which is the slave station number has to be stored to data register DO and extra ladder programming is needed to see whether the slave station number of the incoming communication is 1 or not Only when the slave station number is 1 received data stored in D1 is valid for the local PLC STX CR 02h 3xh 3xh 3xh 3xh 3xh 13h Start Stored to D1 End Delimiter Delimiter Stored to DO DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 13 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS e Multi byte start delimiter First two bytes can be configured as a multi byte start delimiter The incoming data is processed according to the receive format only when the first two bytes of the incoming data match the start delimiter Therefo
376. gard to the data type Destination D1 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the device designated by D1 Data registers D0 D998 and D1000 D1998 can be designated as destination D1 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed When data in S2 to S2 S3 does not comply with floating point format the data is skipped to continue the search and the results are stored in D1 and 01 1 The NDSRC instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When S3 is zero or the sum of S2 and S3 is not within the valid data register range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the NDSRC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types
377. ge the month shown in the preview by moving the scrollbar SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 15 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To configure the dates by specifying data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running When the date in the ON OFF settings is modified with the YEAR instruction input turned on the modified data register values are reflected in the ladder program when the current date and time matches 0 00 on the date in the ON OFF settings Device tab YEAR Yearly Timer ex Devices pi 1 V Data register settings 51 First DR S2 Initialization Input D1 Output Tag Name 2 5 Device Address 6 4 Pulse Output 53 The number of parameter tabs 1 E Year 213 MINORE gt 2022 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr 5 EH 4 5 i 2 1 2 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 3 45 6 7 89 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Data Register Allocation 7 Cancel 1 Data register settings This setting selects whether to configure YEAR instruction dates as fixed setti
378. gh 7 Zero is set to the lowest digit after each shift When S2 1 digits to shift S1 S141 Before shift 01112 3 14 5 617 10 Shift to the left After shift 0 lt 111213415670 0 MSD LSD Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Data for BCD shift X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to shift X X X X X X X 1 7 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed The number of digits that can be shifted as S2 are 1 through 7 Make sure that the source data determined by S1 and S1 1 is between 0 and 9999 for each data register If either source data is over 9999 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When S2 is higher than 7 a user program execution error will also result When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The data in S1 and 51 1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word When a word device such as D data register is assign
379. gisters starting with destination device D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 pact 9 925 023 S1 1 Mice S241 ae 1 1 pss S142 1020 S242 ps D1 2 pes Hour data can be 0 through 23 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 When the execution result exceeds 23 59 59 the result is subtracted by 24 hours and stored to the data register designated by destination device 01 turning on special internal relay M8003 carry When any of the hour minute or second data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Mode 1 When mode 1 is selected time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 are added to the date time data year month day day of week hour minute and second stored in 7 data registers starting with source device S1 The results are stored to 7 data registers starting with destination device D1
380. gnated as S1 and only data register can be designated as D1 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data or D1 2N 2 double word long or float data is within the valid device range If the derived destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X or destination 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long X 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used F float X Example NRS F H NRS F N W D25 D26 123 4 gt D30 D31 123 4 10 5 gt 32 033 1234 025 026 D30 through 039 m gt D34 D35 123 4 When input IO is turned
381. gt 78 LC gt 7 8 LCAL 14 3 linear conversion 17 5 list advanced instruction 4 3 basic instruction 4 7 LIMP 14 1 load compare equal to 7 8 greater than 7 8 or equal to 7 8 less than 7 8 or equal to 7 8 unequal to 7 8 LOD and LODN instructions 5 7 LOG10 22 2 logarithm power instructions 22 1 LOGE 22 1 LRET 14 3 MAC Address D8078 D8083 3 13 maintain outputs while CPU stopped M8025 3 6 master control instruction 5 27 MCS and MCR instructions 5 27 memory cartridge information D8003 3 11 Message MSG 13 1 monitor operation 1 8 MOV 6 1 move 6 1 instructions 6 1 not 6 5 MOVN 6 5 MUL 8 2 multi byte start delimiter 25 77 multiple OUT and OUTN 5 2 usage of MCS instructions 5 28 multiplication 8 1 N data repeatset 6 14 search 23 5 set 6 13 natural logarithm 22 1 NDSRC 23 5 no operation 4 14 NOP 4 14 NRS 6 14 NSET 6 13 off delay 100 ms timer 5 10 10 ms timer 5 10 1 ms timer 5 10 1 sec timer 5 10 4 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC FIDEC timer 5 10 opcode 4 9 operation basics 1 1 optional cartridge information D8031 3 12 OR and ORN instructions 5 4 OR LOD instruction 5 5 OR word 9 1 ORW 9 1 OUT and OUTN instructions 5 1 multiple 5 2 overlapping coordinates 17 6 PID Instruction PID 28 1 PLC Selection 1 2 PLC status 5 17 POW 22 4 power 22 4 failure memory protection 5 9 preset values change counter 5 11 change timer 5 8 changing 5 17 restoring 5 17 program
382. gure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings See Preview on page 12 4 12 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Data Register Allocation If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers the settings are allocated to the data registers as follows Storage destination Data size word R Read W Write Setting Start address 0 1 R W Day of the week Start address 1 1 R W P 1tab ON time Start address 2 1 R W OFF time Start address 3 1 R W Day of the week Start address 4 1 R W 2 tab ON time Start address 5 1 R W OFF time Start address 57 1 R W Day of the week Start address 58 1 R W P 20 tab ON time Start address 59 1 R W OFF time Day of the week data register allocation The day of the week for the ON settings and the day of the week for the OFF settings are allocated as bits in 1 data register as follows ON settings day of the week OFF settings day of the week Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Saturday Thursday Wednesday Saturday Thursday Wednesday Sunday N 0 Disabled check box not selected pi 1 Enabled check box selected ieee Example day of the week settings To configure the output to turn on Monday and to turn off Friday Monday is enabled in the ON settings Friday is enabled in the OFF settings
383. h No conversion Verification X XOR A ADD A Binary to ASCII BCC 1 2 0 x ciis C Add 2comp 1 15 M Modbus ASCII M Modbus RTU Skip 1 99 Note Total byte count of the receive format is shown in S1 of RXD instruction on the ladder diagram of WindLDR 25 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source device S1 receive digits and conversion type must also be assigned The received data is divided into blocks of specified receive digits converted in a specified conversion type and stored to the designated data registers Conversion types are available in ASCII to Binary ASCII to BCD and no conversion When repeat is designated received data is divided converted and stored into as many data registers as the repeat cycles starting with the designated data register There can be up to 99 repeat cycles When a data register is designated as source device S1 a delimiter can be included in the data register designation to end receiving communication Data Type Selection 25 Variable Data Register m Type DRNo Conversion Type Constant Character 00000 ASCII to Binary Cancel ASCII to BCD Constant Hexadecimal D0000 0000 No conversion
384. h character 10 Remaining size The amount of free memory the difference between the trace data size and 1 024 bytes is shown 11 The number of scans How many scans of trace data can be accumulated with the current trace settings is shown The number of scans of data that can be accumulated depends on the format of the trace data to output If there is little data to output per scan the data for many scans can be accumulated CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration The CSV file output format is as follows You can change the separating character for each data and the decimal symbol for floating point numbers that are output to the CSV files on the Function Area Settings dialog box Output format Triggered at 2011 09 07 15 40 30 Scan D0010 D0020 D0030 D0040 D0050 D0060 D0070 D0080 Old 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 New 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 When the TRACE instruction is executed and the CSV file for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1 a new CSV file is created and the trace data is output as shown in above output format example When the date changes and the TRACE instruction is executed a new CSV file is created with a new file name DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 11 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS File format co
385. has a selection input to switch the up down gate so the three inputs are required The circuit for a double word up down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input pulse input up down selection input the CUDD instruction and a counter number CO through C198 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 4 294 967 295 The preset value can be designated using a constant or a data register When a data register is used the double word data of two consecutive data registers becomes the preset value For 32 bit data storage setting see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Program List Instruction Data I0 n D C4 100000 B c4 Q2 Ladder Diagram Preset Input CUDD C4 10 100000 Pulse Input U D Selection Timing Chart ON Preset Input IO OFE ON Pulse Input I1 OFF ON U D Selection Input I2 OFF Counter C4 Value 100000 100001 100000 99999 e O 1 100000 100000 ON Counter C4 OFE Valid Pulse Inputs The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input One scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change from off to on ON Reset Preset OFF ON Pulse OFF Valid Invalid Valid More than one scan time is required 5 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Double word
386. he FIFO data file is full and no more data can be stored If an FIEX instruction is executed when the FIFO data file is full no operation is executed and the data file full output D2 0 will be turned on 02 1 Data file empty output When the value stored in the FI pointer D1 0 is equal to the value stored in the FO pointer D1 1 the FIFO data file is empty If an FOEX instruction is executed when the FIFO data file is empty no operation is executed and the data file empty output D2 1 will be turned on 02 2 Pointer out of range output The value stored the FI or FO pointer can be 0 through S2 1 When an FIEX or FOEX instruction is executed while the FI or FO pointer value exceeds the valid range no operation is executed and the pointer out of range output D2 2 will be turned on Note The FIFOF instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 23 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 23 FILE DATA PROCESSING INSTRUCTIONS FIEX First In Execute When input is on the data stored in data registers starting with the device assigned by S1 is stored to the PERUN Pe corresponding FIFO data file Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A
387. he auto tuning execution flag 53 6 when the PID instruction input is on The values for P I and D will be automatically calculated While auto tuning is executing 1 is stored in the operation status 51 2 When auto tuning ends the auto tuning execution flag 53 6 turns off automatically 2 is stored in the operation status 51 2 and the auto tuning completed output S3 7 turns on uTo cancel auto tuning AT execution To cancel auto tuning while it is executing turn off the auto tuning execution flag 53 6 When the auto tuning execution flag S346 is turned off auto tuning stops 2 is stored in the operation status S1 2 and the auto tuning completed output 53 7 turns on If auto tuning is canceled without completing the values for P I and D are restored to the values before auto tuning was executed 28 16 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE e PID Monitor Function Description 28 PID INSTRUCTION While PID instructions are executed you can graphically monitor the PID instruction parameters From the PID monitor dialog box you can directly change the values of data registers and internal relays used by the PID instruction and check the operation of the PID instruction while adjusting the PID control parameters Note The PID monitor operates according to the PID instruction settings in the ladder program displayed on the WindLDR and not according to the settings in the PLC If the device all
388. he connection is disconnected Special internal relays M8130 through M8132 are allocated to connections 1 through 3 respectively These relays are enabled only when user communication client is used These relays have no effect for the user communication server Nothing happens for the 12 I O type SmartAXIS without Ethernet port when these relays are turned on M8144 Timer Interrupt Status When timer interrupt is enabled M8144 is turned on When disabled M8144 is turned off M8150 Comparison Result 1 When the CMP instruction is used M8150 is turned on when the value of device designated by S1 is greater than that of device designated by S2 S1 gt S2 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in on page 7 2 When the gt instruction is used M8150 is turned on when the value of device designated by S2 is greater than that of device designated by S1 S2 S1 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in gt on page 7 6 M8151 Comparison Result 2 When the CMP instruction is used M8151 is turned on when the value of device designated by 51 is equal to that of device designated by S2 S1 S2 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in CMP on page 7 2 When the gt instruction is used M8151 is turned on when the value of device designated by S3 is greater than that of device designated by S2 S3 gt S2 See Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in ICMP gt
389. he original preset values are loaded For data movement when changing confirming and clearing preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices The CUDD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Preset values for timers and counters can be changed by selecting Online gt Monitor gt Monitor followed by Online gt Custom gt New Custom Monitor on WindLDR for transferring a new value to the SmartAXIS RAM as described on preceding pages After changing the preset values temporarily the changes can be written to the user program in the SmartAXIS ROM or cleared from the RAM When the power is off the temporarily changed preset values in the RAM are cleared and the original preset values are loaded Confirm the changed preset values to store them in the ROM The timer counter preset values can be confirmed only when SmartAXIS is stopped To access the PLC Status dialog box from the WindLDR menu bar select Online Moni
390. he range of 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz For operation mode 1 set the frequency in the range of 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 7 Initial pulse frequency This setting specifies the frequency when pulse output starts For operation mode 0 set the frequency in the range of 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz For operation mode 1 set the frequency in the range of 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 8 Frequency change time This setting specifies the time to increase and decrease the pulse frequency Set the time between 10 and 10 000 ms in increments of 10 ms The first digit of the setting is ignored 9 Reversible control enable This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control modes Reversible control enable 0 Reversible control disabled 1 Reversible control single pulse output 2 Reversible control dual pulse output There are two modes for the pulse output mode single pulse and dual pulse They can be combined with reversible control as follows Select this option when using pulse output in a single direction Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently Reversible control disabled Reversible control Single pulse output mode
391. he result of the input being determined at 0 00 on July 2 2012 is to turn on the output for one scan The result of the input being determined at 0 00 on July 4 2012 is to turn on the output for one scan July 2012 Current date E ist 2st 3st 4st 5st ON H Input MO OFF ON Output 00 OFF 1 tab P 2 tab ON settings ON settings When the input turns on exactly on the day specified by the ON settings When the input turns on at 0 00 on July 2 2012 the output turns on for one scan When the input turns on after 0 00 on July 4 2012 the output turns on for one scan m July 2012 Current date 1th 2th 3th 4th 5th ON asa Input MO OFF ON Output is not turned Output 00 OFF Ld 4 1 tab P 2 tab ON settings ON settings 12 22 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Examples YEAR To configure the dates as fixed settings 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on QO from 0 00 on September 1 2011 to 0 00 on June 25 2013 xxx 2011 2012 2013 A 2014 xxx A ON date 2011 09 01 OFF date 2013 06 25 Yearly OFF Monthly OFF Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer Devices P1 ON settings Year 2011 Month and Day Settings Month September p oom 5 Day of the week End of month OFF settings Year 201
392. hen T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 N 1 and the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 are within the valid device range If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer N W or destination 16 points word data are used D double word When word device such as timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source N W L long destination 1 point word data is used F float Special Internal Relay M8024 BMOV WSFT Executing Flag While the BMOV or WSFT is executed M8024 turns on When completed M8024 turns off If the CPU executing BMOV or WSFT M8024 remains on when the CPU is powered up again Example BMOV BMOV W 51 N W D1 D10 5 D10 through D14 D20 through D24 When input IO is turned on data of 5 data registers starting with D10 assigned by source device S1 is moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 assigned by destinat
393. hen this value is increased or decreased the number of parameter tabs displayed on the dialog box increases or decreases 6 bytes of the user program region are used for each parameter tab For the settings see Parameter tab on page 12 3 5 D1 destination 1 Output This setting configures the output for the results when the configured day of the week and time and the current day of the week and time are compared Setting Description Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for each device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited 6 Pulse Output This setting configures the operation for D1 output This setting is applied to all parameter tabs Selected check box When the day of the week and the time configured in the ON settings matches the current day of the week and the time the output is turned on for only one scan E Unselected check box The output is turned on and off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings Parameter tab This tab configures the ON OFF settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for one WEEK instruction Em WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 ON settings Dayofthe week Sunday 7 Monday Tuesday F Wednesday F Thursday Friday Saturday time hh mm aoe z b B p Sets Day of the week Sat
394. hile the reset input is off the counter counts the leading edges Instruction Data of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value e When the current value reaches the preset value the counter turns output on The output stays on until the reset input is turned on Reset When the reset input changes from off to on the current value is reset When the reset input is on all pulse inputs are ignored e The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin When power is off the counter s current value is held and can Timing Chart also be designated as clear type counters using Function Area ON Settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation Reset Input IO occ for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers ON in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Pulse Input I1 OFF Count tand tv l bech ounter preset and current values can be changed using ON WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt ON Monitor then Online Custom New Custom Monitor Input 12 og Change the current value while the counter reset input is off Output 00 ON When the preset or current value is changed during counter OFF operation the change becomes effective immediately When power is off the preset values that were changed are e The preset value 0 through 65535 can be de
395. his example the status of bit R3 is read to output Q3 e Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruction Setting and Resetting Shift Register Bits e Any shift register bit can be turned on using the SET instruction S e Any shift register bit can be turned off using the RST instruction 10 RO e The SET or RST instruction is actuated by any input condition IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 23 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Reverse Shift Register SFRN For reverse shifting use the SFRN instruction When SFRN instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFRN instructions are entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate device addresses The shift register number corresponds to the lowest bit number in a string The number of bits is the second required address after the SFRN instructions The SFRN instruction requires three inputs The reverse shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input and the SFRN instruction followed by the last bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram Last Bit Program List Instruction Data Reset SFRN R20 7 of Bits Last Bit RO to R127 of Bits 1to 128 e The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFRN instruction In this example the status of bit R20 is read to output QO e Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruction
396. his register stores the frequency change time for the step that is currently being executed Set the time between 10 and 10 000 ms in increments of 10 ms The first digit of the setting is discarded Preset value monitor This register stores the preset value for the step that is currently being executed Current value This register stores the number of pulses that have been output for the step that is currently being executed The current value is updated when the ARAMP instruction is executed at each scan Error status If a configuration error occurs when a step starts executing M8004 user program execution error is turned on and this register is set to the error code Error code Status Description 0 Normal 3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100 000 000 4 Steady pulse frequency designation The frequency was not set between 1 to 10 000 in operation mode 0 The error frequency was not set between 20 to 10 000 in operation mode 1 Frequency change time designation 5 pus y 9 9 The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10 000 7 Step options designation error The step options were not set to a valid value Next step number destination error The next step number was not set between 0 and 18 9 Interrupt number destination error The interrupt number was not set between 1 and 18 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 35 19 PULSE OUTPUT INS
397. ial internal relay M8004 turns on and the corresponding error code is stored in special data register D8006 For details about the error codes see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual When a user program execution error occurs instructions operate as follows When the source data is invalid the execution of the advanced instruction is canceled and the data in the destination device is not changed e When the execution result is invalid a value is stored in the destination device For details on stored values see the descriptions of relevant instructions If a user program execution error occurred during a repeat operation the operation is canceled and the next repeat operation is executed M8004 is retained even when no further user program execution errors occur during subsequent repeat operations Example User program execution error during a repeat operation When the source data does not comply with the normal floating point format When the second repeat operation is executed special internal relay M8004 turns on because the source data is not a normal number in floating point format The second repeat operation is canceled and the third repeat operation is executed H MOV F Di R REP D100 3 S1 R DO 00 D1 3 14 F 0100 D101 3 14 D2 D3 Not a normal Lp Not executed D102 D103 Previous value is number M8004
398. imal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data Preset Input 10 Up Pulse Down Pulse 12 13 C1 Q1 Timing Chart ON Preset Input IO OFF ON Up Pulse T1 OFF ON Down Pulse I2 OFF 500 501 502 501 500 499 eee O 1 Counter C1 Value ON Counter C1 OFF 500 500 single counter number cannot be programmed more than once e The preset input must be turned on initially so that the current value returns to the preset value e The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the up pulse and down pulses are simultaneously no pulse is counted e The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 e After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down e After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to 0 on the next up count When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR
399. in the CPU and cannot be output to the output terminals Special internal relays M are internal relays dedicated to specific functions Timers T are relays used in the user program available as 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms and 1 ms timers Counters C are relays used in the user program available as adding counters and reversible counters Shift registers R are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs Data registers D are registers used to store numerical data Special data registers D are dedicated to special functions Device Addresses Available I O numbers depend on the SmartAXIS type FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch Device Device Device Device Device Device Address Points Address Points Address Points Address Points Address Pos 10 17 10 17 10 17 110 117 Input I 10 17 8 16 10 17 ME osi 30 10 17 8 120 127 140 175 140 175 140 175 140 175 qu eon 180 1115 90 180 1115 90 1180 1115 90 180 1115 90 1120 1155 1120 1155 1120 1155 1120 1155 00 Q7 i QO Q7 Output Q Q0 Q3 4 Q0 Q7 8 16 Q10 Qi7 8 00 03 4 Q20 Q21 renee Q40 Q61 Q40 061 Q40 Q61 Q40 Q61 MEMBRE Q80 Q101 54 080 0101 54 Q80 Q101 54 Q80 Q101 54 Q120 0141 Q120 0141 Q120 0141 9120 0141 Relay 7 256 1277 1024 MO M1277 1024 1277 1024 MO M1277 102
400. ined Cleared Read M8177 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read 34 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES 8000 Start Control M8000 is used to control the operation of the CPU The CPU stops operation when M8000 is turned off while the CPU is running M8000 can be turned on or off using the WindLDR Online menu When a stop or reset input is designated M8000 must remain on to control the CPU operation using the stop or reset input M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down When the data to be maintained during power failure is broken after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the CPU restarts operation or not as selected in Configuration Run Stop Control Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error For details on SmartAXIS Pro Lite start control see Chapter 4 Operation Basics Start Stop Operation in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8001 1 Clock Reset While M8001 is on M8121 1 sec clock is turned off M8002 All Outputs OFF When M8002 is turned on all outputs and remote outputs go off until M8002 is turned off Self maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off M8003 Carry Cy and Borrow Bw When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction M8003 turns on M8003 is also used for the bit shift and rotate instructions For the causes of carry CY a
401. ing with M15 O Since destination device D1 is output Q0 and the value of destination Sa VA VAV device 02 is 9 the destination is 3 outputs starting with 011 5th from M10 As a result when input I1 is on the ON OFF statuses of internal relays M15 through M17 are moved to outputs Q11 through Q13 Q17 Q14 Q13 Q7 Qo YV Y W W W YV WV W wW 9th from Q0 Repeat Word Devices Source and Destination If a repeat operation is for word devices such as data register as many bit devices as the repeat cycles in the designated data register are moved D10 5 D20 12 DIR D2 REP Repeat 3 D D20 12 3 Since source device S1 is data register D10 and the value of source 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 54 3 2 10 device S2 is 5 the source data is 3 bits starting with bit 5 of data register D10 010 Bit 5 Since destination device D1 is data register D20 and the value of destination device D2 is 12 the destination is 3 bits starting with bit 12 of data register D20 Biti5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 As a result when input I2 is on the ON OFF statuses of data register D10 D20 bits 5 through 7 are moved to data register D20 bits 12 through 14 Bit 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 6 11 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not H 51 52 NOT gt D1 D2
402. inimum Value are set according to the entered values 3 PID monitor table settings You can show or hide the items on the PID monitor table Select the check box for each item to show it or clear the check box to hide it n DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 21 28 PID INSTRUCTION 28 22 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDE APPENDIX Execution Times for Instructions Execution times for basic and advanced instructions of the SmartAXIS are listed below Repeat is not assigned for any device Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time ps SmartAXIS Pro Lite SmartAXIS Touch 0 85 1 58 LOD LODN Using data register 2 01 2 71 0 81 1 13 OUT OUTN Using data register 1 92 2 17 0 81 1 08 SET RST Using data register 1 96 2 17 0 65 0 81 AND ANDN OR ORN Using data register 1 94 2 46 AND LOD OR LOD 0 57 0 85 BPS 0 94 0 99 BRD 0 94 0 99 BPP 0 94 0 99 SOTU SOTD 1 22 2 16 TML TIM TMH TMS 3 19 5 45 TMLO TIMO TMHO TMSO 3 19 5 45 CNT CDP CUD 3 16 4 33 CNTD CDPD CUDD 24 86 126 1 SFR SFRN N bits 42 7 0 4 CC CC gt 2 06 2 38 DC DC 2 06 2 94 MCS MCR JMP JEND 0 91 END NOP MM 19 36 44 7 MOV MOVN W I DoD 4 16 4 30 MM 19 36 84 5 MOV MOVN
403. initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 5 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS PULS2 instruction pulse counting disabled timing chart PULS2 instruction S1 is specified as D100 D1 is specified as internal relay M200 51 0100 52 D200 D1 M200 PULS2 instruction input PULS2 instruction input HOA frequency f2 i Output pulse Q15 Pulse output ON M200 Pulse output M201 complete f1 f2 f3 2 pulse frequency When the PULS2 instruction input changes from off to on M200 turns on and pulses with the frequency configured by D100 are output If the value of D100 changes during pulse output pulses are output with the frequency based on that value When the PULS2 instruction input changes from on to off M200 turns off and M201 turns on at the same time The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PULS2 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input 19 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Sample program 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS This section describes an example program that outputs 5 000 pulses each at 200 Hz and then 60 000 pulses each at 500 Hz from output Q14 M8120 M101 10 1 Settings
404. instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer or destination 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long 1 point word data or 2 points double word data are used F float 11 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC Examples ATOB W Quantity of Digits 5 E ATOB W S1 D10 Quantity of Digits 4 E ATOB W S1 D10 e Quantity of Digits ATOB W S1 D10 Quantity of Digits 2 E e Quantity of Digits 1 ATOBW S1 D10 ATOBW S1 D10 IDEC D10 Dii 012 013 014 010 Dii D12 D13 D10 Dii 012 010 Dii D10 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BCD ASCII Binary 49 12345 0031h 020 3039h 50 003
405. instructions 5 7 TMLO TIMO TMHO and TMSO instructions 5 10 TRACE 26 8 transmit 25 1 bytes 25 4 completion output 25 6 data 25 2 byte count 25 7 digits 25 4 status 25 6 code 25 6 trigonometric function instructions 21 1 TSUB 24 5 TTIM 20 3 TXD 25 1 U up counter CNT 5 71 up down selection reversible counter CUD 5 13 USB 1 7 user communication constant 25 15 instructions 25 1 multi byte start delimiter 25 11 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC
406. internal memory Another IOREF immediately writes the output QO internal memory status to actual output QO Program execution returns to the main program 15 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 15 REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS HSCRF High speed Counter Refresh When input is on the HSCRF instruction refreshes the high speed counter current values in special data registers in H HSCRF real time The current values of six high speed counters HSC1 through HSC6 are usually updated in every scan The HSCRF can be used in any place in the ladder diagram where you want to read the updated high speed counter current value For the high speed counter function see Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Example HSCRF The following example demonstrates a program that updates the current value of high speed counter HSC1 using the HSCRF instruction For the timer interrupt see Chapter 5 Special Functions Timer Interrupt in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual MOV W 51 Di REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 0 D8036 D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer interrupt i i i The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction While the CPU is running program execution jumps to label 0 repeatedly at interva
407. internal relay S3 is disabled D1 is specified as data register DO D2 is specified as internal relay M50 ARAMP instruction Reversible control Q16 40 1 0 type signal 012 48 I O type input ARAMP instruction input Control direction 0 Forward x 1 Reverse Output pulse 014 Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 When the ARAMP instruction input changes from off to on pulses are output from Q14 according to the settings configured by the data registers The reversible control signal is output from Q16 or Q12 When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses increase and decrease according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the current pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output ends If this input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started Forward and reverse cannot be changed until the pulse output pulse frequency is set to its minimum In mode 1 for
408. ints word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word L long X or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used F float X Example AVRG The following example demonstrates a program that calculates the average values of data register D100 and store the result to data register D200 every 500 scans p When the sampling end input does not turn on While sampling end input 110 is off the average maximum and minimum values are calculated every 500 scans and stored to data registers D200 D201 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is set every 500 scans AVRG W S1 S2 S3 Di D2 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay D100 I10 500 D200 M100 1st scan 2nd scan 500th scan 1st scan 2nd scan Sampling Data D100 512 497 ecc 521 499 478 In operation Special IR M8125 Sampling End Input 110 Sampling Completion Output M100 OFF Average Value D200 500 Maximum Value D201 530 Minimum Value D202 480 Values are set every 500 scans 4 When the sampling end input turns on When sampling end input 110 turns on the average maximum and minimum values at this point are stored to data registers D200 D201 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is also set When sampling end input I10 turns off sampling resum
409. ion NL 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example ASCII data TU TE sean XE d 34h G1h 34h Gh Note On WindLDR Modbus ASCII and Modbus RTU are defaulted to 2 digits u T wu 1 2 digits 1 34h 31h 31h Lower digit Transmit Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q21 or an internal relay MO through M1277 as a device for the transmit completion output Special internal relays cannot be used When the start input for a TXD instruction is turned on preparation for transmission is initiated followed by data transmission When a sequence of all transmission operations is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Transmit Status Designate a data register D0 D1998 as a device to store the transmit status information including a transmission status code and a user communication error code Transmit Status Code Transmit Status Code Status Description Had From turning on the start input for a TXD instruction until the transmit data is 16 Preparing transmission E stored the internal transmit buffer From enabling data transmission by an END processing until all data transmission 32 Transmitting data 9 y 9 is completed From completing all data transmission until the END processing is completed for 48 Data t
410. ion device D1 D10 Dii D12 D13 D14 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2005 is powered down while D20 D21 D22 23 D24 2005 12 25 12 30 6 9 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IBMV Indirect Bit Move H S1 S2 D2 IBMV S1 R S2 D1 R D2 REP When input is on the values contained in devices assigned by 51 and S2 are added together to determine the source of data The 1 bit data is then moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices assigned by D1 and D2 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X 1 1 99 S2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X 0 65535 D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X 0 65535 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current val
411. ion jumps to label 1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay ALT turns on or off the output Q3 internal memory IOREF immediately writes the output Q3 internal memory status to actual output Q3 Program execution returns to the main program Timer interrupt occurs every 100 ms then program execution jumps to label 2 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay ALT turns on or off the output Q4 internal memory IOREF immediately writes the output Q4 internal memory status to actual output Q4 Program execution returns to the main program IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 16 3 16 INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS 16 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The coordinate conversion instructions convert one data point to another value using a linear Y relationship between values of X and Y X2 Y2 X1 Y1 X0 YO XYFS XY Format Set H When input is on the format for XY conversion is set The XY coordinates define the linear relationship between X and Y XYFS Si YO cn Xn Yn No of XY Coordinates 2to 32 lt lt 31 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number 0to7 th
412. ional cartridge installed on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8031 Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 1 0 D8031 olo 000880 A N SD memory card Memory cartridge No optional cartridge is installed Memory cartridge is installed SD memory card is installed Memory cartridge and SD memory card are installed wr DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 13 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8032 D8035 D8037 D8038 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored in these special data registers To use interrupt inputs store the label number that corresponds to the special data register allocated to the interrupt input D8032 10 D8033 12 D8034 13 08035 15 D8037 16 D8038 17 For details on SmartAXIS Pro Lite interrupt inputs see Chapter 5 Special Functions Interrupt Inputs in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on SmartAXIS Touch interrupt inputs see Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions Interrupt Input in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8036 Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is stored in D8036 To use the timer interrupt store the corresponding label number For details on the SmartAXIS Pro Lite timer interrupt see Chapter 5 Special Functions Timer Interrupt in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite U
413. irection 00006 Acceleration deceleration control 00006 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number 00007 2 0 to 3 step OK Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D2 100 100 Hz Frequency change time D3 2000 2 000 ms Preset value D4 D5 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D6 Timing of change D6 Acceleration deceleration later After Next step number D7 2 Step 2 Step 2 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description fe 1 Steady pulse frequency D0008 1000 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz mm Frequency change time D0009 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0010 D0011 4000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0012 Acceleration deceleration control D0012 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0013 3 0 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D8 1000 1 000 Hz Frequency change time D9 2000 2 000 ms Preset value D10 D11 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D12 Timing of change D12 Acceleration deceleration later After Next step number D13 3 Step 3 19 44 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Step 3 settings 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table
414. ivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user does not need to program the AND LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into AND LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List 10 12 Q0 13 ANDLOD OUT Timing Chart ji ON When input 10 is on and either input I2 or I3 is on oe output QO is on ON 12 OFF When input IO is off or both inputs I2 and I3 are off output 00 is off ON D ON Q0 OR LOD Load The OR LOD instruction is used to connect in parallel two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The OR LOD instruction is the equivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user does not need to program the OR LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into OR LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data Timing Chart IO ON When both inputs 10 and 11 are on or both inputs I2 OFF and 13 are on output 90 is on I1 ds When either input IO or I1 is off and either input I2 or I3 is off output QO is off ON D ON D ON Q0 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 5 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP Bit Pop The BPS bit push instruction is used to temporarily save the result of bit logical operation The BRD bit read instruction i
415. j D31 D10 20 D32 Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D Si S2 DiR REP n D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 n D30 D31 010 011 020 021 032 033 010 011 D20 D21 etm 034 035 Repeat Two Source Devices Data Type Word When S1 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW W 518 526 Di n D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 z D30 Dii D21 D30 D12 s D22 D30 Data Type Double Word When 51 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D SiR S2R Di REP n D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 gt 030 031 012 013 D22 D23 030 031 014 015 024 025 gt 030 031 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 9 3 9 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Devices Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 ANDW W SiR S2 DIR REP H A Nm s D10 D20 D30 D11 020 031 012 020 D32 Data Type Double Word When Si source and D1 des
416. k this button to display the Data Register Allocation dialog box As shown below a table of the data registers and their corresponding YEAR instruction settings is displayed on the dialog box 8 Click Allocate Comments 9 and you can configure the comments for the data registers that correspond to the names of the settings This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers Data Register Allocation dialog box Data Register Allocation Hz Year ON Month and Day ON Year OFF Month and Day OFF Year ON Month and Day ON Year OFF y 8 Month and Day OFF Year ON Month and Day ON Year OFF Month and Day OFF Year ON Parameter tab This tab configures the settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR instruction If indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers the settings configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is shared in common with To configure the dates as a fixed setting See Parameter tab on page 12 13 Preview The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs in a calendar This function is shared in common with To configure the dates as a fixed setting See Preview on page 12 15 n DEC SMAR
417. l recognize the beginning of valid communication although a RXD instruction without a start delimiter can also be executed A maximum of 5 consecutive constants that are either character or hexadecimal from the first byte of the receive format are considered a multi byte start delimiter If a RXD instruction with a start delimiter is executed and another RXD instruction with the same start delimiter is executed user communication error code 5 is stored in the data register designated as the receive status of the second RXD instruction When the error occurs the second RXD instruction is canceled and the first RXD instruction executed is kept If a multi byte start delimiter is assigned and the incoming data does not match the entire multi byte start delimiter the SmartAXIS discards the incoming data and waits for the next communication When the first one byte is received a timer is started to monitor the interval between incoming data even when a multi byte start delimiter is assigned If data is not received in the period specified for the receive timeout value after receiving one byte of data a receive timeout error occurs and user communication error code 11 is stored in the status data register DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 11 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Examples Multi byte Start Delimiter Multi byte start delimiter is determined in the structure of the Receive Format The following examples show how
418. l result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 S2 X value Enter a value for the X coordinate to convert within the range specified in the XYFS instruction 17 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 f DEC 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS D1 Destination to store results The conversion result of the Y value is stored to the destination Data Type Word Integer S2 X value 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 D1 Y value 0 to 65535 32768 to 32767 Y Y 65535 32767 Valid Coordinates X 0 65535 32768 0 65535 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as S2 or D1 16 I integer X points are used D double word When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as S2 or D1 1 point is used L long F float Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 Note The CVXTY instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 CVYTX Convert Y to X H Applicable SmartAXIS When input
419. l time derivative time and ARW in PID control can be automatically set with auto tuning Temperature Set point Disturbance Time Auto Tuning AT Optimal temperature control parameters will differ according to the characteristics of the subject to control When performing PID control the proportional band P integral time and derivative time D can be automatically set by executing auto tuning e Perform auto tuning during test operation e When auto tuning is executed near normal temperatures temperature fluctuations cannot be imposed so auto tuning may not end normally In such cases set the values for P I and D manually e When auto turning is executed once so long as the process is not changed it is not necessary to execute auto tuning again mAuto tuning AT In order to automatically set the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D fluctuations must be forcibly imposed on the subject to control to set each value to the optimal value In order to perform optimal auto tuning fluctuations must be imposed when the process variable has reached a value near the set point Fluctuations can be imposed when the process variable is near the set point by setting the AT bias The relationship between the set point AT bias auto tuning start point and fluctuation start point is as follows Process variable PV lt set point SP AT bias setting value When the AT bias setting is se
420. le PV set point SP and manipulated variable MV can be changed in the PID Monitor Settings dialog box For details see PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box on page 28 21 7 PID parameters panel You can check the values of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D 28 18 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE e 28 PID INSTRUCTION 8 Send Command You can send a command to the Touch to execute stop AT for PID control and to switch manual auto mode Click this button to display a popup menu and click the menu to send the command r PID Monitor 9 mtm Target PID lt Main Program Line 1 7 PV 995 002 E x SP I 0 1 ES sec Select Mode 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 A 9 Status indicators You can check the primary statuses for PID control with the colored indicators Indicator name Background color Status mu White PID control stopped Green PID control is executed White AT stopped Green AT is being executed White Auto mode MANUAL Green Manual mode White Normal operation OVER FS Red The process variable has exceeded the upper limit alarm value White Normal operation UNDER The process variable has fallen below the lower limit alarm value 10 Trend graph You can monitor the values o
421. lid Devices Instruction D AND 0 0 1999 15 ANDN 8000 0 8199 15 120 155 120 141 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Data registers can be used as bit devices with the data register number and the bit position separated by a period OR and ORN Or Not The OR instruction is used for programming a NO contact in parallel The ORN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in parallel The OR or ORN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart Instruction Data I0 FF 10 Q0 ug ON OFF ON Q0 ON 10 Qi QL orr I1 When either input IO or I1 is on output QO is on When both inputs 10 and I1 are off output QO is off When either input IO is on or input I1 is off output Q1 is on When input IO is off and input I1 is on output Q1 is off Valid Devices Instruction D OR 0 0 1999 15 ORN 8000 0 8199 15 120 155 120 141 The valid device range depends on the SmartAXIS type For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Data registers can be used as bit devices with the data register number and the bit position separated by a period 5 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 5 51 INSTRUCTIONS AND LOD Load The AND LOD instruction is used to connect in a series two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The AND LOD instruction is the equ
422. ller than that of S3 S1 S3 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used D double word X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word L long X or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used F float X The destination uses only one output or internal relay regardless of the selected data type Special Internal Relays M8150 M8151 and M8152 in ICMP gt Three special internal relays are available to indicate the comparison result of the ICMP gt instruction Depending on the result one of the three special internal relays turns on S1 must always be greater than or equal to S3 S1 gt S3 When S2 S1 M8150 turns on When S2 S3 M8151 turns on S2 Value M8150 M8151 M8152 Status When S1 S2 S3 M8152 turns on 1 52 53 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 S2 S3 OFF OFF OFF ON 3 Si 150 3 53 lt 52 lt 51 Small Large 4 S2 S1 ON Us
423. lly appends the END instruction at the end of a program A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies with respect to program length which corresponds to the address where the END instruction is found During the scan time program instructions are processed sequentially This is why the output instruction closest to the END instruction has priority over a previous instruction for the same output No output is initiated until all logic within a scan is processed Output occurs simultaneously and this is the first part of the END instruction execution The second part of the END instruction execution is to monitor all inputs also done simultaneously Then program instructions are ready to be processed sequentially once again Ladder Diagram Program List Q IO 00 Q 11 Q1 5 30 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Restriction on Ladder Programming Due to the structure of WindLDR the following ladder diagram cannot be programmed a closed circuit block is formed by vertical lines except for right and left power rails and the closed circuit block contains one or more prohibited instructions shown in the table below Left Power Rail Right Power Rail Program Prohibited Program Instruction Vertical Vertical Line A Line B Closed Circuit Block OUT OUTN
424. loat data are used When repeat is D double word X assigned for a bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source 1 point word F float X or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Using Carry or Borrow Signals When the D1 destination data exceeds the valid data range as a result of any binary arithmetic operation a carry or borrow occurs and special internal relay M8003 is turned on Data Type Carry borrow occurs when D1 exceeds the range between W word 0 and 65 535 I integer 32 768 and 32 767 D double word 0 and 4 294 967 295 L long 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 F float 3 402823 1028 and 1 175495x10 38 1 175495x10 and 3 402823 1038 8 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples ADD Data Type Word This example demonstrates the use of a carry signal from special internal relay M8003 to set an alarm signal D2 5005 D2 ADD W Si 52 Di REP D2 200 When carry occurs output 0 is assigned as warning indicator When the acknowledge pushbutton input I1 is pressed the warning indicator is reset Acknowledge M80
425. ls on Pro Lite user program execution error codes see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on Touch user program execution error codes see Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 Troubleshooting in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 08008 08021 Calendar Clock Data D8008 through D8021 are used for reading calendar clock data from the internal clock and for writing calendar clock data to the internal clock D8022 D8025 Scan Time Data D8022 through D8025 are special data registers for checking the scan time and configuring the constant scan time For details on the SmartAXIS Pro Lite scan time see Chapter 5 Special Functions Constant Scan Time in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 3 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8026 Communication Mode Information Port 2 and Port 3 Communication mode information of port 2 and port 3 is stored to D8026 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 4 0 D8026 3 Port 2 0 Maintenance Communication 1 User Communication 2 Modbus RTU Master 3 Modbus RTU Slave D8027 D8028 Slave Number The slave number is stored to D8027 and D8028 when the communication mode for port 2 and 3 is maintenance communication or Modbus RTU slave The slave number can be specified with either a constant or a data register in the function area settings
426. ls selected in the Function Area Settings M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay HSCRF updates the HSC1 current value in data registers D8050 and D8051 gt Si 52 Di When D8050 D8051 exceeds 150000 Q1 is turned on D8210 90009 91 IOREF immediately writes the output Q1 internal memory status to actual output Q1 Each time the interrupt program is completed program execution returns to the main program at the address where timer interrupt occurred T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 15 3 15 REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS 15 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 16 INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The DI or EI instruction disables or enables interrupt inputs and timer interrupt individually DI Disable Interrupt When input is on interrupt inputs and timer interrupt assigned by source device S1 are disabled DI S1 Enable Interrupt When input is on interrupt inputs and timer interrupt assigned by source device S1 are enabled EI S1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Interrupt inputs and timer interrupt 1 127 Interrupt inputs IO through I7 and timer interrupt selected in the Function Area Settings are normally enabled when the CPU starts When the DI instruction is executed interrupt inputs and
427. lse Q15 ZRN1 instruction input Proximity signal I2 Pulse output ON M10 Pulse output complete M11 When the ZRN1 instruction changes from off to on pulses are output at the initial pulse frequency When pulse output starts M10 turns on and M11 turns off When I2 changes from off to on pulses are output at the creep pulse frequency When I2 changes from on to off pulse output stops When pulse output stops M10 turns off and M11 turns on If the ZRN1 instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output stops If the input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ZRN1 instruction starts The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the ZRN1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input 19 30 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Sample program 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS To perform a zero return operation with proximity signal I3 initial pulse frequency 3 kHz and creep pulse frequency 800 Hz M8120 1 Turn on initialization input MO Pulse output ON relay off Pulse output complete relay off When the ZRN1 instruction input turns on pulse out
428. lts X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the HTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer 16 points word data are used D double word When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long 1 point word data is used F float DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 5 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOA Quantity of Digits 4 Binary HTOA W 51 4660 10 D10 D10
429. lue S1 18 on page 28 11 When Analog Output is specified for the output manipulated variable The output manipulated variable 96 stored in 51 1 is linearly converted with the minimum and maximum values configured for AQO to AQ5 and 1419 Output manipulated variable the converted value is stored in S1 19 E Analog value When Data Register is specified for the output manipulated variable The output manipulated variable 96 stored in 51 1 is linearly converted with the minimum and maximum output values and the converted value is stored in 51 19 Set a value between 100 and 100 100 to 100 51 20 Proportional band offset Proportional band offset of 101 or lower operates as 100 and 101 or R W higher operates as 100 Set a value between 1 and 500 0 1 to 50 0 seconds 51 21 Control period Control period of 0 operates as 0 1 seconds and 501 or higher operates as R W 50 0 seconds 2 Reserved Other control registers Output manipulated variable 51 1 Shows the output manipulated variable in the range of 0 to 100 0 to 10096 while the PID instruction is being executed While PID instruction is in manual mode manual mode output manipulated variable is not stored Operation status S1 2 Indicates the PID instruction execution status or error status e Xin the table indicates the elapsed time from the start of AT until the set point is reached X is incremented by 1 every 10 minutes 9 is stored i
430. lue the high alarm output S1 3 turns on If the process variable is lower than the high alarm value the high alarm output S1 3 turns off The high alarm value can be set in the range between the low alarm value and the maximum input value 7 Low Alarm Value 51 4 Set the lower limit value of the process variable If the process variable is lower than or equal to the low alarm value the low alarm output 51 4 turns on If the process variable is higher than the low alarm value the low alarm output 51 4 turns off The low alarm value can be set in the range between the minimum input value and the high alarm value 8 Sampling Period S1 5 Set the cycle to execute the PID instruction If the sampling period is set to a value shorter than the scan time the PID instruction is executed at each scan If the sampling period is set to a value longer than the scan time the interval between the executions of PID instruction exceeds the sampling period Exceeded period of time is deducted from the next sampling period The sampling period can be set from 0 01 to 100 00 seconds in 0 01 second increments Sampling period lt Scan time PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction executed executed executed executed executed Omsec 160 1120msec 1180msec 240msec Scan time 60ms 10msec 80msec i 160 5 1240msec Sampling period 40ms PID control PID control PID control PID control PID co
431. martAXIS Touch User s Manual Note To use an analog output AQO to AQ5 the analog output must be configured in advance For details on analog output settings see Chapter 3 Project 4 14 Analog Output in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual When Data Register is specified The output manipulated variable for PID control is stored in control register 51 19 in the range of minimum value 4 lt output manipulated variable lt maximum value 3 For manual mode the stored value is that the one stored in the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 17 is converted linearly in the range of minimum value 4 and maximum value 3 Configure parameters 2 through 4 when data register is selected as the output manipulated variable 2 Device address Shows the control register 51 19 configured on the device tab when Data Register is specified as the output manipulated variable 1 3 Maximum Value 4 Minimum Value A value that is the PID instruction output manipulated variable having undergone linear conversion in the range of maximum value 3 and minimum value 4 is stored in the set data register 1 DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 7 28 PID INSTRUCTION 5 Output Manipulated Variable Limit Set the output manipulated variable by restricting the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction When Disabled The manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction is the output manipulated vari
432. menu bar select Online Monitor Monitor then Online gt Custom gt New Custom Monitor Change the current value while the counter preset input is off e When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately When power is off the changed preset values are cleared and the original preset values are loaded e For data movement when changing confirming and clearing preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 Preset values can also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and pushbuttons WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices The CDP instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For restrictions on ladder programming of counter instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 Counter Operation after Count out Condition When the counter has counted out either the current value or preset value is changed Counter Output The counter maintains the counted out status Before the counter has counted out the current value is changed to a larger value than
433. msec W 62 5 msec 1 character 8 dots is scrolled in 500 ms SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The program branching instructions reduce execution time by making it possible to bypass portions of the program whenever certain conditions are not satisfied The basic program branching instructions are LABEL and LJMP which are used to tag an address and jump to the address which has been tagged Programming tools include either or options between numerous portions of a program and the ability to call one of several subroutines which return execution to where the normal program stopped LABEL Label This is the label number from 0 to 255 used at the program address where the execution of program instructions LABEL begins for a program branch An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged portion of the program from the main program In this way scan time is minimized by not executing the program branch unless input conditions are satisfied Note A single label number cannot be used more than once Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 40 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat Label number Tag for LJMP and LCAL 0 255 LJMP Label Jump When input is on jump to the addr
434. multi byte start delimiter is determined e Constants are followed by data register skip or BCC Receive Format Start Data register skip or BCC Delimiter Const Const Const DR Receive Format etc Start Delimiter N Data register skip or BCC cr Oo Note Constants following data register skip or BCC are not considered start delimiter even if these are in the first five bytes of the receive format More than 5 constants are specified from the first byte Const Const Const Const Const Const Receive Format Start Delimiter Note Constants that are neither start delimiters or end delimiters are considered constants for verification See Constant for Verification on page 25 15 Example Start Delimiter Duplication Error When input IO is turned on the first RXD instruction is executed and status code 32 is stored in the receive status 0200 indicating the RXD instruction is waiting for the incoming data When input I1 is turned on another RXD instruction is executed but since two RXD instructions have the same start delimiter the second RXD instruction is not executed and user communication error code 5 is stored in the receive status D300 Communication port Port 2 Di D2 10 M20 D200 Receive completion output M20 Receive status register D200 Const DR Const Receive data byte count D201 Receive Format S1 05h
435. n I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First bit to start search X X X X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of bits searched X X X X X X X 1 256 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store quantity of ON bits X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for S2 to designate as the number of bits that can be searched is 1 through 256 Make sure that the search area designated by S1 plus S2 is within the valid value range If the source data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the BCNT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Examples BCNT E When input is on a search begins for the total number of bits that
436. n mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 7 Initial pulse frequency on page 19 18 Starting number 2 Frequency change time 10 to 10 000 ms 8 Frequency change time on page 19 18 Starting number 3 Control direction 0 Forward 1 Reverse 10 Control direction on page 19 18 Starting number 4 Preset value high word Note Starting number 5 Preset value low word Note 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 11 Preset value on page 19 18 Starting number 6 Current value high word Note Starting number 7 Current value low word Note 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 12 Current value on page 19 19 Starting number 8 Error status 0to9 13 Error status on page 19 19 Note The upper and lower data registers change according to the 32 bit data storage method specified For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 19 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input S2 specifies the initialization input When the initialization input S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR RAMP instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers An external input IO to 135 Note or an internal relay MO to M1277 can
437. n the MCS master control set instruction is on 26 8 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS Notes The maximum number of TRACE instructions that can be programmed a user program is three Make sure that the folder name specified by the TRACE instruction is not duplicated by any of the folder names specified by the other TRACE instructions When the folders are duplicated trace data with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file e The number of scans of which the trace data can be saved to the CSV file when the TRACE instruction is executed one time depends on the number of devices specified to trace and the display type for each device For details see 9 Trace data size on page 26 11 e The TRACE instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 e Trace data is not accumulated when the TRACE instruction is skipped by the JMP jump instruction For the JMP jump instruction see JMP Jump and JEND Jump End on page 5 29 e While the input to the TRACE instruction is on the trace data is repeatedly output to the CSV file When you want to output the trace data only one time add a SOTU single output up instruction or SOTD single output down inst
438. n the reverse direction reverse shift register when a pulse input is turned on Forward Shift Register SFR When SFR instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFR instruction is entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate device addresses The shift register number corresponds to the first or head bit The number of bits is the second required address after the SFR instruction The SFR instruction requires three inputs The forward shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input and the SFR instruction followed by the first bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram First Bit Program List Reset SFR RO 4 of Bits First Bit to R127 of Bits 1to 128 Structural Diagram Shift Direction Reset IO aie Ii First Bit RO of Bits 4 Reset Input The reset input will cause the value of each bit of the shift register to return to zero Initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 may be used to initialize the shift register at start up Pulse Input The pulse input triggers the data to shift The shift is in the forward direction for a forward shift register and in reverse for a reverse shift register A data shift will occur upon the leading edge of a pulse that is when the pulse turns on If the pulse has been on and stays on no data shift will occur Data Input The data input is the i
439. ncluded in the received data the byte counts for these codes are also included in the receive data byte count Example Data register D200 is designated as a device for receive status D200 Receive status D201 Receive data byte count User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Special internal relays for user communication receive instruction cancel flag are used to cancel all RXD instructions for each port While the SmartAXIS has completed receive format and is ready for receiving incoming data turning on the user communication receive instruction cancel flag cancels all RXD instructions for each port This function is useful to cancel receive instructions only without stopping the SmartAXIS To make the cancelled RXD instructions active turn off the flag and turn on the input to the RXD instruction again Device Address CPU Stopped PowerOFF R W M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 2 Cleared Cleared M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Port 3 Cleared Cleared R W is the abbreviation for read write When R W it can be read and written When it can only be read When W it can only be written 25 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS ETXD User Communication Transmit over Ethernet H Applicable SmartAXIS The ETXD instruction conv
440. nd EI The following example demonstrates a program that will disable and enable interrupt inputs and timer interrupt selectively For the interrupt input and timer interrupt functions see Chapter 5 Special Functions Interrupt Input and Timer Interrupt in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual In this example inputs I2 and I3 are designated as interrupt inputs and timer interrupt is used with interrupt intervals of 100 ms MOV W Si D1 REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 0 D8033 D8033 stores jump destination label number 0 for interrupt input I2 MOV W Si D1 REP 1 D8034 D8034 stores jump destination label number 1 for interrupt input I3 MOV W 51 Di REP D8036 stores jump destination label number 2 for timer interrupt 2 When input 110 is on DI disables interrupt inputs I2 I3 and timer interrupt then M8071 M8072 and M8144 turn off When input I11 is on and 110 is off EI enables interrupt inputs I2 and I3 then M8071 and M8072 turn on When input 112 is on and 110 is off EI enables timer interrupt then M8144 turns on I12 I10 End of the main program When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 0 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay ALT turns on or off the output Q2 internal memory IOREF immediately writes the output Q2 internal memory status to actual output Q2 Program execution returns to the main program When input I3 is on program execut
441. nd borrow BW see Carry and Borrow on page 4 13 M8004 User Program Execution Error When an error occurs while executing a user program M8004 turns on The cause of the user program execution error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then Online gt Status gt Error Status gt Details For a list of Pro Lite user program execution errors see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting User Program Execution Errors in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8005 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 1 M8005 turns on When the error is cleared M8005 turns off M8006 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 2 M8006 turns on When the error is cleared M8006 turns off M8007 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 3 M8007 turns on When the error is cleared M8007 turns off M8010 In Daylight Saving Time Period When the daylight saving time is enabled M8010 is turned on while in the daylight saving time period When the daylight saving tiem is disabled M8010 is always off M8013 Calendar Clock Data Write Adjust Error Flag When an error occurs while calendar clock data is written or clock data is adjusted M8013 turns on If calendar clock data is written or clock data is adjusted successfully M8013 turns off M8014 Calendar Clock Data Re
442. nditions for Completion of Receiving Data When a specified byte count of data digits x repeat has been received or when an end delimiter is With With or Without received When a BCC exists immediately after the end delimiter the BCC is received before ending data receiving After the last constant including delimiter designated in the RXD instruction has been received data receiving is completed when the subsequent byte count of data has been received Without Without When a specified byte count of data digits x repeat has been received Without With Note Whenever a receive timeout has occurred data receiving stops arbitrarily Data receiving is complete when one of the above three conditions is met To abort a RXD instruction use the special internal relay for user communication receive instruction cancel flag See User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag on page 25 20 Example A RXD instruction does not have an end delimiter and has a delimiter programmed in the receive format for data registers After delimiter FFh has been received data receiving is completed when subsequent 3 bytes are received T REN RN Receive Format DRI FFh BCC DR2 4 bytes max delimiter 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes max Delimiter FFh Delimiter Conversion ASCII to Binary Conversion None Digits 4 Digits 2 Repeat 1 Repeat 1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 19 25 UsER COMMU
443. ned while operations for other instructions continues 8 12 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 i DEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS INC Increment H DEC Decrement H Applicable SmartAXIS Data type W or I S D 1 S D Data type D or L 5 0 5 0 1 1 S D S D 1 INC S D SORTES When input is on one is added to the 16 or 32 bit data assigned by device S D and the result is stored to the same device Data type W or I S D 1 S D Data type D or L 5 0 5 0 1 1 5 0 5 0 1 DEC S D MERE When input is on one is subtracted from the 16 or 32 bit data assigned by device S D and the result is stored to the same device FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S D Source Destination Device to increment data X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the INC and DEC instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the source destination 1 point word or integer I integer X data or 2 points double word or long data are used D double word X L long X F float Increment beyond Limits When the S D value is at its maximum and is incremented by one the value returns
444. new CSV file with a new file name is created and the header and the log data is output File format configuration procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configuration Cartridges 2 Under Data Log and Trace CSV File Output configure the separating character and the decimal symbol The separating characters and the decimal symbols that are contained in the CSV file vary by country and region You can select the symbols to use from the following 1 Separating character comma or semicolon 2 Decimal symbol period or comma 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box Function Area Settings ea Run Stop Control t Configure the cartridges Memory Backup Input Configuration Memory Cartridge Communication Ports Enable Memory Cartridge Download en OE RETE ee EN Device Settings Separating Character Comma 152 1 Program Protection Decimal Symbol Period 2 Self Diagnostic Calendar amp Clock Network Settings Connection Settings Default n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 5 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS Examples DLOG When MO is turned on the decimal values of DO through D5 data type W word and D10 data type F floating point are saved in a CSV file in the RESULT folder on the SD memory card every 10 seconds Output example Time D0
445. nfiguration procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configuration Cartridges 2 Under Data Log and Trace CSV File Output configure the separating character and the decimal symbol The separating characters and the decimal symbols that are contained in the CSV file vary by country and region You can select the symbols to use from the following 1 Separating character comma or semicolon 2 Decimal symbol period or comma 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box Function Area Settings E37 Rapp t 7 Configure the cartridges Memory Backup Input Configuration Memory Cartridge Communication Ports Enable Memory Cartridge Download Data Log and Trace CSV File Format Device Settings Separating Character Comma 1 Program Protection Decimal Symbol Period 2 Self Diagnostic Calendar amp Clock Network Settings Connection Settings Defaut ox j Examples TRACE When MO is turned on the accumulated data of DO through D5 data type W word and D10 data type F floating point are saved as decimal values in a CSV file on the RESULT folder on the SD memory Output sample Triggered at 2012 02 06 10 20 30 Scan D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 Old 12345 2 12345 56789 1 56789 3 402823 38 12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 3 402823 38 12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 3
446. nformation which is shifted into the first bit when a forward data shift occurs or into the last bit when a reverse data shift occurs Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Note The SFR instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For restrictions on ladder programming of shift register instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 5 22 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data Reset Timing Chart ON OFF Reset Input IO One or more scans are required ON Pulse Input I1 OFF ON Data Input I2 OFF ON ON RUQi gg ON R2 Q2 ON OFF R3 Q3 Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data Reset e The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFR instruction In t
447. ng the most significant bits 23 30 contain the 8 bit biased exponent e with bit 23 being the least significant bit of the biased exponent and bit 30 being the most significant and the highest order bit 31 contains the sign bit s 31 30 23 22 0 HEN 8 bit biased exponent 23 bit fraction Sign bit 0 positive 1 negative Single Storage Format The table below shows the correspondence between the values of the three constituent fields s e and f and the value represented by the single storage format bit pattern When any value out of the bit pattern is entered to the advanced instruction or when execution of advanced instructions such as division by zero has produced any value out of the bit pattern a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS Value Exponent field e Fraction field f Representation in WindLDR 0 0 0 0 0 Denormal numbers 0 0 1 175495E 38 to 1 175495E 38 3 402823 38 to 1 175495E 38 Normal numbers 0 e 255 Arbitrary 1 175495E 38 to 3 402823E438 infinities e 255 f 0 INF NaNs Not a number values f 0 NAN Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing When advanced instructions involving floating point data are executed special internal relay M8003 carry and borrow is updated M8003 Execution Result Value 1 0 Overflow exceeds the range between 3 402823 10
448. ng with destination device D1 Source 1 Destination 1 a 0 99 0 99 sra Cum fero 51 2 01 2 nes od Mass Source 2 Bits we S ce 5 S145 jos S241 055 01 5 co S146 ras S242 pas 01 6 pas Note Device 51 3 in source 1 is not used for execution and need not be designated TSUB instruction supports leap years For source 1 Year data can be 0 through 99 Month data 1 through 12 Day data 1 through 31 Hour data 0 through 23 Minute and second data 0 through 59 Year data 0 through 99 is processed as year 2000 through 2099 For source 2 Hour data can be 0 through 65535 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 Destination 1 The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to device D1 3 Day of week data represent 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday and 6 Saturday When source 1 contains invalid day time data a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When the execution result is less than 00 year 1 month 1 day 00 00 00 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user
449. ngs Nipec 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS YEAR Yearly Timer The YEAR instruction compares the specified date with the current date and outputs that result With this instruction you can specify special dates within a one year period 51 52 53 Di When the input is on the output specified D1 is turned on when the date specified by the ON settings matches the current date The output is turned off when the date specified by the OFF settings matches the current date When the ON settings are December 15 2012 and the OFF settings are January 20 2013 output D1 turns on and off as follows Year 2012 2013 Month A Day ON Output 01 OFF mE ON settings Month December OFF settings Month January Day 15th Day 20th Notes A maximum of 10 YEAR instructions can be used in a user program Normally the output is only updated when the current date and the date for the ON OFF settings matches but when the YEAR instruction input changes from off to on the output state at the current date is determined according to the ON OFF settings and the output is turned on or off For details see Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval on page 12 21 When pulse output is enabled output is turned on for one scan at the instant 0 00 the date changes to the ON date When the YEAR instruction input changes
450. ngs Month January Day of the week End of month Specify ON duration B Preview Year January 203 February 2013 March _ 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr S Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa M2345 E i2 6 7 8 9 1 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Cancel When Yearly is selected the Month and Day settings are valid every year At this time you can configure whether or not to make the Month and Day settings valid yearly from a year until another year with Year 2 Monthly The settings for the selected tab are valid each month At this time Month is disabled DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 13 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 3 ON settings This section configures the date to turn on the output The output is turned on at 0 00 on the configured date Setting Description Range Year Specifies the year to turn on the output 2000 to 2099 Month Specifies the month to turn on the output 1to12 Day Specifies the day to turn on the output 1to31 Month and Day Specifies the day as the day of the week to turn on the output Specify the week in Setting Day of the week 1to6 the range of the 1st to the 5th or the last week and set the day of the week
451. ngs or to indirectly specify them with data registers To configure the dates by specifying data registers select this check box Selected check box The date settings are indirectly specified by data registers Configure the dates by using data registers The dates can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For allocating the data register region see Data Register Allocation on page 12 18 The data registers can be initialized with the days of the week and the times configured on the parameter tabs by turning on the initialization input For initialization see 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input on page 12 16 Note When this check box is not selected the dates are fixed settings The dates are configured on the parameter tabs The dates cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For fixed settings see To configure the dates as a fixed setting on page 12 12 2 S1 source 1 Starting data register This setting specifies the start of the data register region to store the dates for the YEAR instruction This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the dates with data registers Setting Description Tag Name Specifies the tag name or the device address for the device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings This item changes when the device address the number Used Data Registers of paramete
452. nication to port 2 RXD2 through port 3 RXD3 Enter the receive format in this area S1 Source 1 The receive format can include a start delimiter data register to store incoming data constants end delimiter BCC and skip 01 Destination 1 Receive completion output can be an output or internal relay D2 Destination 2 Receive status register can be data register The next data register stores byte count of received data Receive Format Receive format designated by source device S1 specifies data registers to store received data data digits for storing data data conversion type and repeat cycles A start delimiter and an end delimiter can be included in the receive format to discriminate valid incoming communication When some characters in the received data are not needed skip can be used to ignore a specified number of characters BCC code can also be appended to the receive format to verify the received data One RXD instruction can receive 200 bytes of data at the maximum S1 Source 1 Receive Receive Conversion BCC Calculation Ski Format Device Digits Repeat Calculation Start B viue Delimiter Bytes Position 1 4 A ASCII to Binary Hex ata D0 D1999 1 5 B ASCII to BCD 1 99 Register ASCII 1 2 No conversion Start No conversion Delimiter 1 to 5 bytes Rc End 00h FFh No conversion Delimiter Constant for 00h FF
453. nput Jump Destination Label No I7 3 14 D8039 SD Memory Card Capacity Megabytes Every 1 sec 3 14 D8040 Analog Input Value AIO Every scan 3 14 D8041 Analog Input Value AI1 Every scan 3 14 D8042 Analog Input Value AI2 Every scan 3 14 D8043 Analog Input Value AI3 Every scan 3 14 D8044 Analog Input Value AI4 Every scan 3 14 D8045 Analog Input Value AI5 Every scan 3 14 D8046 Analog Input Value AI6 Every scan 3 14 D8047 Analog Input Value AI7 Every scan 3 14 D8048 D8049 Reserved IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 9 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device Address Description Updated See Page D8050 High Word g Current Value Frequency Every sta 3 14 D8051 Low Word Measurement Value I0 D8052 High speed High Word D8053 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 14 Group 1 10 OW D8054 High Word Reset Value 3 14 D8055 Low Word D8056 High Word g Current Value Frequency Evesta 3 14 D8057 Low Word Measurement Value I2 08058 High speed High Word D8059 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 14 Group 2 12 SN D8060 High Word Reset Value 3 14 D8061 Low Word D8062 High Word g Current Value Frequency Ey aca 3 14 D8063 Low Word Measurement Value I3 D8064 High speed High Word D8065 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 14 Group 3 13 een D8066 High Wo
454. ns 1 to 24 DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 7 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS 7 Blinking Settings Blink the bar graph when the value of the specified device exceeds the upper or lower limit For the blinking speed see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 Blinking Settings Description Upper limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is larger than the upper limit Lower limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is smaller than the lower limit Maximum minimum upper limit and lower limit values must satisfy the following condition Min Lower limit Upper limit Max MSG Instruction Common Settings The common settings character set scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed for the message to display can be configured The common settings are configured in the WindLDR Function Area Settings dialog box Note The common settings for the MSG instructions are applicable for all MSG message instructions in the user program For the MSG instruction individual settings see MSG Instruction Individual Settings on page 13 2 Function Area Settings dialog box Function Area Settings Le eas Configure thefunctions using LCD FT1A Memory Backup Input Configuration inia n Communication Ports B nim oin sec
455. ns to use an FIFO data file File number 2 Quantity of data registers per record 3 Quantity of records 4 FIFO Data file FIFO status outputs Ladder Diagram MOV W S1 DiR REP M8120 mm 0 D100 2 FIFOF W S1 52 D1 D2 2 3 4 D100 M100 FIEX W S1 2 D10 FIEX W 51 2 D20 FOEX W Dt 2 D50 FIFO Data File D100 through D113 3x4 2 data registers M100 through M102 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts MOV sets 0 to FI and FO pointers and FIFOF initializes FIFO data file 2 When input I0 is turned on the data in D10 through D12 are stored to the FIFO data file 2 When input I1 is turned on the data in D20 through D22 are stored to the FIFO data file 2 When input I2 is turned on the first data is retrieved from the FIFO data file 2 and stored to D50 through D52 The table below shows the data stored in FIFO data file 2 when inputs IO I1 and I2 are turned on in this order Only valid data managed by the FIFOF FIEX and FOEX instructions are shown in the table Function Device Address Input IO Input I1 Input I2 FI Pointer D100 1 2 2 FO Pointer D101 0 0 1 Record 0 D102 through D104 D10 D11 D12 D10 D11 D12 Record 1 D105 through D107 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D22 Record 2 D108 through D110 Record 3 D111 through D113 23 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 23
456. nsert Text with Effect The specified text can be displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD When scrolling is disabled When scrolling is enabled Insert Text with Effect OES insert Text with Effect E3777 1 Display Option o Scroll Display Option A Scroll 101 Blinking 101 Blinking Invert Invert 2 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x24 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x24 3 Input Text Directly 5 6 Input Text Directly 5 6 Text Special Character Insert Tex Special Character Inse 4 f xt Ta 4 Select from Text Table Select a text 1 Display Options Configure the options to scroll blink or invert the specified text For the scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed see MSG Instruction Common Settings on page 13 8 Display Options Description Scroll Scrolls the specified text Blinking Blinks the specified text Invert Invert the display of the specified text 2 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 1 to 24 The occupied area is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used 3 Input Text Directly Directly enter the characters to display A space is also counted as one character If scrolling is disabled the message can be entered
457. nt word data is used F float Example DTDV Before Execution DTDWW Si D1 Di0 020 D10 12345 3039 After Execution gt D20 7 7 pal IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Upper byte S Lower byte 11 21 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS DTCB Data Combine H S1 51 1 gt DTCB W Si D1 When input is on lower byte data is displayed from 2 consecutive sources starting with device assigned by S1 and combined to make 16 bit data The lower byte data from the first source device is moved to the upper byte of the destination assigned by device D1 and the lower byte data from the next source device is moved to the lower byte of the destination Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to combine X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X X X x m For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Source device S1 uses 2 data registers starting with the device assigned by S1 Since the DTCB instruction is exec
458. nter the data to transmit in this area S1 Source 1 Transmit data be constant values character or hexadecimal data registers 01 Destination 1 Transmit completion output can be an output or internal relay D2 Destination 2 Transmit status register can be data register The next data register stores byte count of transmitted data Transmit Data Transmit data is designated by source device S1 using constant values or data registers BCC code can also be calculated automatically and appended to the transmit data One TXD instruction can transmit a maximum of 200 bytes of data S1 Source 1 Transmit Transmit Digits Calculation Data Device Conversion Type Bytes Repeat BCC Calculation Start Position Constant 00h 7Fh FFh No conversion 1 D A Binary to ASCII 1 4 ata 00 01999 B BCD to ASCII 1 5 1 99 Register No conversion 1 2 X XOR A ADD A Bi to ASCII BCC 1 2 C Add 2comp 1 15 No conversion M Modbus ASCII M Modbus RTU Note Total byte count of the transmit data is shown in S1 of TXD instruction on the ladder diagram of WindLDR Designating Constant as S1 When a constant value is designated as source device S1 one byte data is transmitted without conversion The valid transmit data value depends on the data bits selected in the Communication Parameters dialog box These data bits are set in Configuration gt Comm Po
459. ntrol executed executed executed executed executed Sampling period 80 ms scan time 60 mc sampling period gt scan time PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction PID instruction executed executed executed executed executed Omsec 160 120msec 180msec 240msec Scan time 60ms 10msec 80msec 1 160msec 1240 Sampling period 40ms PID control PID control PID control PID control executed executed executed executed The PID instruction is not executed at each scan The PID instruction is executed at the scan immediately after the sampling time has elapsed 28 4 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Control tab This tab configures the control parameters for the PID instruction 28 PID INSTRUCTION Devices Input Control Output Control Mode Control Action PID PID Control Reverse Control Adion 0 ER Set Point SP 1 2 3 4 Proportional Band P 5 Integral Time 0 6 Derivative Time D 7 Derivative Gain 8 ARW Anti Reset Windup ATBias Device Allocation 32768 to 32767 0 01 to 100 00 96 0 1 to 6553 5 s 0 1 to 6553 5 s 0 to 100 0 to 100 32768 to 32767 PID PID Control ENT Input es Control Output PV D0000 1 32768 to 32767 Control Mode PID PID Control MV D0019 32768 to 32767 SP 0 lt Basic 1 Co
460. ntrol Mode 51 6 Select PID PID Control P Proportional Control PI PI Control or PD PD Control according to the characteristics of the target application For details about each control see PID Control on page 28 14 2 Control Action 53 0 Select the control action from Direct Control Action or Reverse Control Action Direct control action operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is higher than the set point Cooling equipment uses this operation Reverse control action operates to increase the output manipulated variable when the process variable is lower than the set point Heating furnaces uses this operation 53 0 is read only Output manipulated Output manipulated variable variable Set Point Set Point 10096 10096 0 0 gt gt lt P Process variable lt gt Process variable Proportional Band Direct control action Proportional Band Reverse control action 3 Set Point 51 7 The set point can be set between the minimum value and the maximum value of the process variable 4 Proportional Band S1 8 The proportional action changes the output proportional to the deviation between the set point and process variable If the process variable is in the range of the proportional band the control output 53 6 turns on or in proportional to the deviation If the process variable is out of the proportional band the control output 53
461. nued For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 11 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS Examples HOUR The following examples demonstrate the HOUR instruction that will measure the input ON duration value in hours minutes and seconds and to compare the value in two different ways Source Device S1 Data Register E DO D1 D2 Source 1 51 DO 50 Hour 35 Minute 55 Second M e Source Device S1 Constant Constant 24 12 Source 1 S1 50 50 Hour SE h Di D100 Di D100 Destination 1 D100 D101 D102 Destination 1 D100 D101 D102 D2 Q2 D3 D1900 3 Hour 25 Minute 45 Second D2 Q2 D3 D1900 3 Hour 25 Minute 45 Second 00 01 02 D100 D101 D102 Q2 While input IO is on the ON duration is measured The measured time value hour minute and second is stored to data registers D100 D101 D102 assigned by destination device D1 and compared with the preset value stored in data registers 00 01 02 assigned by source device S1 When the measured value reaches the preset value output Q2 assigned by destination device D2 is turn
462. o move consecutive blocks of timer counter and data register values The IBMV indirect bit move and IBMVN indirect bit move not instructions move one bit of data from a source device to a destination device Both devices are determined by adding an offset to the device NSET N data set and NRS N data repeat set instructions can be used to set values to a group of devices The XCHG exchange instruction is used to swap word or double word data between two devices The current timer or counter values can be changed using the TCCST timer counter current value store instruction Since the move instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used MOV Move H Applicable SmartAXIS 51 D1 When input is on 16 or 32 bit data from device assigned by S1 is moved to device assigned by D1 MOV Si R FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First device address to move to X dm X X X X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Both internal relays MO through M1277 and special internal relays M8000 thro
463. o the CSV files with the data type F float DLOG Data Logging EN Devices Settings 3 51 Foldername Tag Name Device address Display Type Repeat 4 00000 4 00000 DEC W 2 5 6 00010 D0010 pec t pec w ut Logging data size 38 MAX 1024bytes Remaining size 986 bytes OK Cancel The configuration is now completed Operation Description 10 seconds after MO is turned on the DLOG instruction is executed one time When the DLOG instruction is executed the data of DO through D5 and D10 are output to the CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the current date and time The saved location of CSV files is DATAQ001 DATALOG RESULT The oldest data is saved at the top of the log data and the latest data is saved at the bottom of the log data When the execution of the DLOG instruction is complete the completion output M100 is turned on and the CMP instruction is executed once The CMP instruction compares the status code stored in the execution status D100 with 0 and turns QO on or off QO is turned on when an error occurs in the DLOG instruction While MO is on the log data is appended to the CSV file every 10 seconds Output results Time D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 2012 02 06 10 20 30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 2012 02 06 10 20 40 12345 0 0 56789 0
464. o tuning is terminated if it is turned off while auto tuning is executed AT complete output S347 The auto tuning completion output is turned on when the auto tuning is successfully completed 1 DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 13 28 PID INSTRUCTION PID Control PID control performs adjustment operations to cancel the deviation between a single set point and the process variable that is present in normal temperature control The types of PID control that can be used with the Touch are as follows uProportional control Proportional control outputs the manipulated variable in the proportional band that is proportional to the deviation between the set point and the process variable The output is turned on until the process variable reaches the A point the proportional band and when it exceeds this it enters the proportional band the control output starts to be turned on and off at the control cycle and then when the set point is exceeded the control output is turned completely off Along with the rise in temperature from the A point to the set point the control output on time becomes shorter and the off time becomes longer An offset always occurs with Proportional control The P action is suitable for processes with no wasted time such as gas pressure control and level control When set to Proportional control integral time and derivative time are automatically ignored Temperature Proportional band Offset Set
465. oat TRACE Data Tracing EN Devices Settings 3 3 Folder Name Tag Name Device Address Display Type Repeat 0000 00000 5 6 00010 poo10 F y B Tracing datasize 990 bytes MAX 1024bytes Remaining size 34 bytes The number of scans 17 Scan The configuration is now completed SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 26 13 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS Operation Description When MO is turned on the TRACE instruction is executed one time When the TRACE instruction is executed the data of DO through D5 and D10 in the previous 17 scans is output to a CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the date and time of the execution The saved location of CSV files is DATAO001YTRACEWMRESULT The oldest data is saved at the top of the trace data and the latest data is saved at the bottom of the trace data When the execution of the TRACE instruction completes the completion output M100 is turned on and the CMP instruction is executed once The CMP instruction compares the status code stored in the execution status D100 with 0 and turns 00 on or off QO is turned on when an error occurs in the TRACE instruction Output results Triggered at 2012 02 06 10 20 30 Scan D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 Old 12345 2 1234
466. ocations for the PID instruction in the PLC and the PID instruction in WindLDR are different the PID instruction is not correctly monitored Starting the PID Monitor Operation Procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor The monitor starts Controller pjw WINDLDR Home GO Configuration i Status Custom PID Monitor Batch Power Line 1 Maintenance M Start Stop I Forced 1 0 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt PID Monitor The PID Monitor dialog box is displayed Controller pjw WINDLDR F Custom Ex Batch 1 Forced 1 0 Power Line Port Monitor Simulation Set Up 3 On PID Monitor dialog box click The PID monitor table is displayed r PID Monitor button show hide PID monitor table H Set Up 43 Error ig Dial Up ig Shutdown PID KWo JQ Pv 995 O oy our UB sec Send Command Send Command 100 100 0 50 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 i sec SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 17 28 PID INSTRUCTION PID Monitor Dialog Box r PID Monitor 1 Target PID lt Main Program Line 1 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 5
467. on the ON duration is measured in units of 100 ms and the measured value is stored to a H TTIM Di data register assigned by destination device D1 When the input is off D1 turns off The measured time range is 0 through 6553 5 sec Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant D1 Destination 1 Measured value X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Destination device D1 measured value uses 3 data registers starting with the device designated as D1 Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 can be designated as D1 Subsequent two data registers starting with destination device D1 1 are used for a system work area Do not use these two data registers for destinations of other advanced instructions and do not change values of these data registers using the monitor function on WindLDR If the data in these data registers are changed the teaching timer does not operate correctly The teaching timer instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed The data in D1
468. on and off each time an input button is pressed The CVDT convert data instruction converts data types among W word I integer D double word L long and F float The DTDV and DTCB instructions convert data between two one byte data and one word data The SWAP exchanges upper and lower byte or word data for word or double word data respectively HTOB Hex to BCD H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 HTOB 51 D1 When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 is converted into BCD and stored to destination assigned by device D1 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 for word data and 0 through 9999 9999 for double word data FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 270Fh for word
469. on from the 8th to the 22nd of every month Month 7 Year ON P 1 tab settings OFF P 2 tab settings Output D1 2012 10 ON date 8th of every month e every OFF date 16th of 1 OFF date If the ON date is the 16th of every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 8th of every month and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 2 tab the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the two tabs and the ON settings for the P 1 tab are disabled In this situation the output is on from the 8th to the 16th of every month 12 14 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Preview YEAR Yearly Timer EN Devices P1 ME V Yearly Monthly Year 2000 E Month and Day Settings Month January Day of the week End of month OFF settings Year 2009 H Month and Day Settings Month January Day 28 Specify ON duration 7 Day of the week End of month 28 29 30 Tu We 5 6 2 19 20 26 27 The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs in a calendar The dates that are set to ON are highlighted in orange Three months are shown at one time Setting Year Specifies the year to show in the preview Scrollbar You can chan
470. on in the ANDW ORW and XORW Instructions Source devices S1 and S2 and destination device D1 can be assigned to repeat individually or in combination When destination device D1 is not designated set to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 When repeat is assigned consecutive devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated device are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ANDW AND word ORW OR word and XORW exclusive OR word instructions the following examples use the ANDW instruction Repeat One Source Device Data Type Word When only S1 source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW W SiR 52 Di REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 m D30 Dii D20 D30 D12 D20 D30 e Data Type Double Word When only Si source is assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device 01 01 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D SiR 52 Di REP n D10 D20 030 3 010 011 z 020 021 030 031 012 013 020 021 gt 030 031 014 015 020 021 NES 030 031 Repeat Destination Device Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW W Si S2 DiR REP 11 D10 020 D30 3 D10 D20 CE D30 D10 20
471. on is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used The label number can be 0 through 255 Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a DJNZ instruction is programmed When designating S2 using a data register the value for the label is a variable When using a variable for a label make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in the user program If a matching label does not exist a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 14 5 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example DJNZ and LABEL The following example demonstrates a program to store consecutive values 1000 through 1049 to data registers D100 through 0149 respectively MOV W Si Di REP M8120 1049 DO NEN MOV W Si Di REP 50 D1 IMOV W S1 52 Di D2 REP DO D99 D1 DO DJNZ 51 52 Di 255 1st cycle Di 50 Destination D99 50 D149 2nd cycle Di 49 Destination D99 49 D148 3rd cycle D1 48 Destination D99 48 D147 4th cycle D1 47 Destination D99 47 D146 49th cycle 01 2 Destination 099 2 0101 50th cycle Di 1 Destination D99 1 D100 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay At start up MOV instructions stor
472. onversion Instructions XV ESI OY Format Set m UUEEMRUUEEEIRNRCEMEMMREEMmM CVXTY Convert X to Y CVYTX Convert Y to X Average Instructions AVRG Average EE 18 1 Pulse Output Instructions uU Nur c meudjge 19 1 PWM Variable Duty Cycle Pulse OUtDUL ct rr nennen nrnnnnnnnnnn nnn nnne nnne 19 8 RAMP Trapezoidal Control 5 2 eaaet irpo aree ierra Eins nte cao Ri S a a Re 19 15 KIC mEEH 19 26 Pob EGCuDA DEEP 19 32 Dual Teaching Timer Instructions RU EC edP E EE TTEEEEEEEEEEUUTIMUUEEMT 20 1 DTIM 100 MS Dual O UEUIREULEEUEBMTEMEMT 20 1 DIME Eel SPUR aaaea a E 20 1 DIMMS Glsms NIE EEUU 20 1 Teaching TIMEN TIT EUER 20 3 Trigonometric Function Instructions 00 ee ET 21 1 DEG Radian to D Gree REA 21 2 Sicul 21 3 COS COSINE 21 4 M NUES 21 5 DEC eclp
473. or the pulse frequency 1000 50 20 so the increment is 20 For increments of 2 a value from 1 to 2 entered in Pulse width ratio is rounded up and handled as 2 3 to 4 is rounded up and handled as 4 For increments of 20 1 to 20 is handled as 20 21 to 40 is handled as 40 7 Pulse counting This setting enables or disables pulse counting Supported instruction Pulse counting Pulses are continuously output while the 0 Disable pulse countin P 9 input is on The number of pulses specified by the preset value are output 1 Enable pulse counting 19 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 8 Preset value When counting pulses this setting specifies the number of pulses to output 9 Current value The number of pulses that were output is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the PWM instruction is executed at each scan 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the PWM instruction input changes from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and this register is set to the error code Error code Status Description 0 Normal 1 Pulse frequency designation error The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 1 000 2 Pulse width ratio designation error The pulse width ratio was not set between 1 and 100 4 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 and 1
474. or valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed T timer or C counter is used as D1 and the data is written in as a current value TP or CP Since the TCCST instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types x I integer D double word X L long F float When a bit device such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination 1 point word data or 2 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Example TCCST When input I2 is turned on 99998 is written to the current value of counter C23 Ladder Diagram CNTD 100000 LC D C23 99999 TCCST D S1 99998 Di C23 6 16 C23 Timing Chart ON Reset Input IO OFF di 99998 99999 99998 99999 100000 Pulse Input I1 OFF ON Counter C23 OFF ON Input I2 OFF ON Output QO REP SMARTA
475. osition 1 ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from XOR exclusive OR ADD addition ADD 2comp Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU Example Incoming data consists of 41h 42h 43h and 44h 1 BCC calculation formula XOR Calculation result 41h 42h 43h 44h 04h 2 BCC calculation formula ADD Calculation result 41h 42h 43h 44h 10Ah OAh Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC 3 BCC calculation formula ADD 2comp Calculation result FEh F6h 2 digits without conversion 4 BCC calculation formula Modbus ASCII Calculation result 88 ASCII 5 BCC calculation formula Modbus RTU Calculation result 85h OFh binary DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 17 25 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Conversion Type The BCC calculation result can be converted or not according to the assigned conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 0041h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion wo ut Note On WindLDR Modbus ASCII defaults to binary D0010 0041h Binary to ASCII conversion 34h 31h to ASCII conversion NL 2 digits 2 No conversion
476. ot be used as destinations of advanced instructions Internal relays M300 through M335 are used to read input device status of the IOREF I O refresh instruction Note Do not change the status of reserved special internal relays otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly Special Internal Relay Device Addresses Description Nd d Power OFF Read Write M8000 Start Control Maintained Maintained Read Write M8001 1 sec Clock Reset Cleared Cleared Write M8002 All Outputs OFF Cleared Cleared Write M8003 Carry Cy or Borrow Bw Cleared Cleared Read M8004 User Program Execution Error Cleared Cleared Read M8005 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read M8006 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read M8007 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read M8010 In Daylight Saving Time Period System version 1 10 or later Operating Cleared Read Reserved M8013 Calendar Clock Data Write Adjust Error Flag Operating Cleared Read M8014 Calendar Clock Data Read Error Flag Operating Cleared Read M8015 Reserved M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8017 Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag Operating Cleared Write
477. ote terminal with an RS232C RS485 port D1 D2 51 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch TXD2 TXD2 TXD3 TXD2 TXD3 Valid Devices Device _ Fucton I Q MR T C D Constant Repeat Si Sourcel Tanmitdaa 1 Xx x D1 Destination 1 Transmit completion output D2 Destination 2 Transmit status register X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Transmit data designated by device S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When transmission is complete an output or internal relay designated by device D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the device designated by D2 The transmit status data register D0 D1998 stores the status of transmission and error code The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data The same data registers cannot be used as transmit status registers for TXD2 through TXD3 instructions and receive status registers for RXD2 through RXD3 instructions The TXD instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution
478. ough M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 15 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Settings Device tab RAMP Ramp Pulse Output EN Devices Settings RAMP 1 Q0014 1 9 2 3 4 51 Control Register S2 Initialization Input 01 Operation Status Tag Name m Device Address Comment Camel 1 Select instruction This item selects which RAMP instruction to use RAMP1 or RAMP2 The reversible control mode that can be selected varies based on the instruction For limitations based on the combination of instruction reversible control mode and the pulse output mode see 9 Reversible control enable on page 19 18 2 S1 source 1 Control register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with RAMP1 or RAMP2 instructions Starting from the specified number 9 consecutive 16 bit data registers are used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D991 and D1000 to D1991 Storage destination Starting number 0 Function Steady pulse frequency Setting Operation mode 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz Reference 6 Steady pulse frequency on page 19 18 Starting number 1 Initial pulse frequency Operatio
479. ough M47 M50 through M57 gt D13 113 M60 through M67 M70 through M77 0141 114 M80 through M87 M90 through M97 gt 0151 115 M100 through M107 M110 through M117 Overlapped Devices by Repeat If the repeat operation is set for both the source and destination and if a portion of the source and destination areas overlap each other then the source data in the overlapped area also changes Before Execution After Execution MOV W SiR DIR REP 12 D10 D12 4 Di0 1 D10 1 pul 2 2 Source D10 through D13 Repeat 4 Destination D12 through D15 Repeat 4 Di21 3 D12 1 D13 4 D13 2 014 014 1 015 015 2 6 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC MOVN Move Not H Applicable SmartAXIS MOVN 51 8 Di R REP 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS 51 gt D1 When input is 16 or 32 bit data from device assigned by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to device assigned by D1 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 First device address to move X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First device address to move to X X X X X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on
480. ource device S2 is subtracted from the time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S1 The results are stored to 3 data registers starting with destination device D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 51 52 oe s 51 1 cs S241 cs Dii o S1 2 a S2 2 DN 01 2 pis Hour data can be 0 through 23 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 When the execution result is less than 00 00 00 24 hour is added to the result and stored to the data register designated by destination device D1 turning on special internal relay M8003 borrow When any of the hour minute or second data exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled and the next instruction is executed For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Mode 1 When mode 1 is selected time data hour minute and second stored in 3 data registers starting with source device S2 is subtracted from the date time data year month day day of week hour minute and second stored in 7 data registers starting with source device S1 The results are stored to 7 data registers starti
481. output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the ARAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output ends If the ARAMP instruction input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP instruction is started Forward and reverse cannot be changed until the pulse output pulse frequency is set to its minimum The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the ARAMP1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the ARAMP instruction input 19 42 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC Sample program 19 PuLsE OuTPUT INSTRUCTIONS This section describes an example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function reversible control disabled using the following settings The pulses are output from Q14 10 kHz Preset value 4 000 1 kHz 100 Hz 1 Hz l Frequency change time M8120 10 Basic settings 2 000 ms Preset value 4 000 Frequency change time 2 000 ms Preset value 4 000 l Frequency change time 4 000 ms Initialize the data registers when the PLC starts When the ARAMP inst
482. output remains off E February 2012 Current date uM 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th ON 1 i Input MO i OFF ON Output Q0 Judgment ON settings OFF settings When the input is turned on or off during the interval between the ON and OFF settings On February 15 2012 when the input is turned on the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is within the ON and OFF settings February 15 to February 17 2012 Therefore the output turns on The output turns off when the input is turned off On February 16 2012 when the input is turned on the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is that the output is turned on P February 2012 Current date M 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th ON i Input MO OFF 1 Output QO OFF 4 ON settings Judgment Judgment OFF settings DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 21 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS When pulse output is enabled The input is determined to be on or off at 0 00 on the date of the ON settings and the output is turned on The current date is not compared with the ON settings when the input is turned on Settings Ladder program P 1 tab ON settings July 2 2012 P 2 tab ON settings July 4 2012 Output port QO When the input turns on before the day specified by the ON settings T
483. p eec LS Tom Append T Piin FJ Download Paste Import Basic semi p Set ics vig Invert ross Bi Disable XX Delete 4 Compare 10000 10001 00000 P 10000 10001 90001 10001 M8121 The ladder program can be checked to see if it contains any user program syntax error To insert a new ladder line without creating a new rung press the down arrow key when the cursor is on the last line or press the right arrow key when the cursor is at the right most column of the last line 10 From the menu bar select Home gt Convert above Program When the instruction symbols are connected correctly conversion is completed successfully If any error is found the errors are listed on the screen Then make corrections as necessary Now save the file with a new name Save Project 1 Select the WindLDR application button at the upper left corner of the WindLDR screen followed by Save and type TESTO1 in the File Name field Change the Folder or Drive as necessary SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec 1 OPERATION BASICS Simulate Operation Before downloading the user program you can simulate the operation on the WindLDR screen without connecting the SmartAXIS From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Simulation The Simulation screen appears ui project01 pjw
484. page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long F float x x x gt lt When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source or destination 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used When repeat is set for a bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word or long data are used When repeat is set for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Examples MOVN MOVN W 10 M10 through M17 M20 through M27 NOT 51 M10 Di M50 REP MSB 51 M10 NOT gt M50 When input IO is on the 16 internal relays starting with M10 assigned by source device S1 are inverted bit by bit and moved to 16 internal relays starting with M50 assigned by destination device D1 gt M50 through M57 M60 through M67
485. peat Bit to turn on and off X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the ALT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction must be used For the SOTU instruction and the SOTD instruction see SOTU and SOTD Single Output Up and Down on page 5 26 Example ALT ON Input IO OFF ON Output 00 11 18 When input IO is turned on output QO assigned by device D1 is turned on and remains after input IO is turned off When input IO is turned on again output QO is turned off SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS CVDT Convert Data Type H 51 When input is on the data type of the 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 is converted and stored to the destination assigned by device D1 CVDT Si R DI R Data types can be assigned for the source and destination separately Source S1 5151 1 Destination Di 0101 1 When the same data type is assigned for both source and destination the CVDT instruction has the same function as the MOV instruction Unless F float data is selected for both source and destination only the integral number is moved omitting the fraction When the source data exceeds the range of destination data the destination stores a value closest to the source data within the destination data Applicable SmartAXIS
486. peat Destination Device Only e Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 3 010 011 012 013 014 015 S2 Repeat 0 020 021 020 021 020 021 When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with D1 SOTU ADD W Si S2 DIR REP 11 10 20 D30 3 e Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 0 D10 10 D10 10 D10 10 S2 Repeat 0 D20 25 D20 25 D20 25 gt _ gt _ gt When only D1 destination is assigned to repeat the same result is set to 3 devices starting with 01 01 1 SOTU ADD D Si S2 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 Repeat Two Source Devices e Data Type Word and Integer S1 Repeat 0 010 011 10 011 010 011 S2 Repeat 0 020 021 020 021 020 021 When S1 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device D1 SOTU ADD W SIR 58 Di 11 D10 D20 D30 3 e Data Type Double Word Long and Float S1 Repeat 3 D10 10 Dii 15 D12 20 S2 Repeat 3 D20 25 D21 35 D22 45 When S1 and S2 source are assigned to repeat the final result is set to destination device 01 01 1 SOTU ADD D SIR 58 01 11 D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat
487. pecial internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A H40RC FT1A B40RC Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Control register S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X S2 Source 3 Proximity signal X X D1 Destination 1 Operation status Special data registers cannot designated as S1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot designated as D1 Caution The first digit of the internal relay number must be 0 not 1 to 7 Otherwise the ZRN instruction will not operate correctly 19 26 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Settings Device tab ZRN Zero Return 2 Devices Settings ZRN 109001 2 4 b 51 Register S2 InitializationInput S3 DecelerationInput D1 OperationStatus Tag Name Device Address Comment Cancel 1 Select instruction This item selects which ZRN instruction to use ZRN1 or ZRN2 The output differs by the instruction Instruction Pulse output ZRN1 Q14 ZRN2 Q15 2 S1 source 1 Control
488. peration the change becomes effective immediately When power is off the changed preset values are cleared and the original preset values are loaded For data movement when changing confirming and clearing preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 Preset values can also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and pushbuttons WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices The CUD instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For restrictions on ladder programming of counter instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 13 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CNTD CDPD and CUDD Double Word Counter Three types of double word counters are available adding up counter CNTD dual pulse reversible counter CDPD and up down selection reversible counter CUDD A total of 50 FT1A 12 or 100 other SmartAXIS double word counters can be programmed in a user program Each double word counter uses 2 consecutive devices starting with the allocated device which can be through C198 Once
489. pezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions so that they do not share the same pulse output port However the ZRN zero return instruction can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS pulse output PWM pulse width modulation RAMP trapezoidal control and ARAMP RAMP with table instructions Note The PULS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A BAORC Valid Devices Device gt gt I Q MR T C D Constat Repeat Si Sourcel Conmlrgstr O A4 S2 Source 2 Initialization input X X D1 Destination 1 Operation status A Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 Internal relays through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 The first digit of the internal relay number must be 0 not 1 to 7 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 1 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Settings Device tab PULS Pulse Output EN Devices Settings PULS 1 Q0
490. put starts ZRN Zero Return EN Devices settings ZRN 1 Q0014 gt 51 Control Register S2 InitializationInput S3 DecelerationInput Di OperationStatus Tag Name EI l 5 Device Address Comment ZRN Zero Return E277 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Initial operation mode Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz Creep operation mode Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency 100 1to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz Error status Function Device address Setting value Details Initial operation mode Mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency 00 3000 3 kHz Creep operation mode Mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency Di 800 800 Hz n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 31 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP RAMP with Table The ARAMP instructions output pulses with the frequency change function according to the information in the frequency table When the input is on pulses are output according to the frequency change settings stored in the control register settings specified by S1 The pulse frequency is controlled by combining multiple steps that define the change time and steady pulse speed The pulses change frequency at a constant rate until they reach the steady pulse frequency in the step option settings
491. put manipulated variable Set Point SP Operating status Output Manipulated Variable MV High alarm value High Alarm Value Low alarm value Sampling period Low Alarm Value Control mode SP Set point P Proportional band Scaling Settings E Auto Scaling Maximum Value I Integral time Minimum Value D Derivative time Derivative gain ARW anti reset windup AT bias IST LIST S Default 1 Trace Selection You can show hide and specify the color of the process variable PV set point SP manipulated variable MV high alarm value and low alarm value on the trend graph in the PID Monitor dialog box Select the check box for each item to show it or clear the check box to hide it The color of the button on the right side of each item is the display color for that item Press Y button to display the list of colors and select the color to change the display color The selected color is applied to the primary parameters panel in the PID Monitor dialog box 2 Scaling Settings You can set the scaling for the vertical axis of the trend graph in the PID Monitor dialog box When the auto scaling check box is selected the Maximum Value and the Minimum Value for the vertical axis are automatically adjusted for the values displayed on the trend graph When the check box is cleared the Maximum Value and the M
492. qual To Data type W or I 51 52 Data type D 51 51 1 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 and S2 When S1 data is not equal to S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC LC Load Compare Less Than Data type W or I 51 lt 52 Data type D 51 51 1 lt 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 and S2 When S1 data is less than S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC LC Load Compare Greater Than Data type W or I 51 gt 52 Data type D 51 51 1 gt 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 and 52 When 51 data is greater than S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC gt LC lt Load Compare Less Than or Equal To Data type W or I 51 lt 52 Data type D L 51 51 1 lt 52 52 1 This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data assigned by S1 S2 When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off LC lt
493. quency or it was set to a value larger than the steady pulse frequency Note 2 Notes 1 The number of pulses in the frequency change region calculated by the initial pulse frequency steady pulse frequency and frequency change time has exceeded the total number of output pulses Adjust the settings by decreasing the steady or initial pulse frequency or by shortening the frequency change time Notes 2 Set the initial pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 19 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Examples RAMP RAMP1 instruction reversible control disabled timing chart RAMP1 instruction S1 is specified as D200 D1 is specified as internal relay M50 PAMP instruction input RAMP instruction input 05 Pulse output port Pulse output ON Pulse output complete M51 Pulse output status M52 When the RAMP instruction input is on pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control registers M50 turns on during pulse output M52 turns on or off while increasing or decreasing the pulse frequency Pulses are output according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency The frequency increases or decreases every 10 ms Pulse output stops when the pulses configured by the preset value are output At this time M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the
494. r communication over Ethernet see Chapter 10 User Communication User Communication over Ethernet in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 21 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 25 22 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 26 DATA Loc INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The data log instructions save log data for specified devices to the SD memory card DLOG Data Log H The DLOG instruction saves the values of the specified devices in the specified data format as a CSV file on the SD memory card DLOG 51 Di D2 When the input is on the date and time and the values of the specified devices are output to the CSV file in the folder assigned by S1 When the execution of the instruction finishes the device assigned by D1 is turned on and the execution status is stored to the device assigned by D2 When the folder assigned by S1 does not exist on SD memory card that folder is created The folder path is DATAOO01 DATALOG User specified folder For details on the folder structure see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual The CSV file name is DATE csv The date when the DLOG instruction is turned on is used as DATE Example If the date is September 30 2011 the file name is 20110930 csv When a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the folder design
495. r tabs changes Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited For allocating the data register region see Data Register Allocation on page 12 18 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input This setting specifies the device to initialize the dates stored in the data register region that starts from S1 source 1 The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers by turning on the initialization input This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR instruction with data registers 12 16 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs This setting configures the number of parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with To configure the dates as a fixed setting See 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs on page 12 13 5 D1 destination 1 Output This setting configures the output for the results when the configured dates and the current date are compared This setting is shared in common with To configure the dates as a fixed setting See 5 D1 destination 1 Output on page 12 13 6 Pulse Output This setting configures the operation for D1 output This setting is applied to all parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with To configure the dates as a fixed setting See 6 Pulse Output on page 12 13 7 Data Register Allocation Clic
496. r the JEND instruction More than one JMP instruction can be used with one JEND instruction Corresponding JMP JEND instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding JMP JEND instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON Input IO OFF Input I1 OFF ON Output QO OFF When input IO is on JMP is executed so that the subsequent output status is held When input IO is off JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 29 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Ladder Diagram Program List Instruction Data This jump circuit will give priority to I1 13 and I5 in that order When input I1 is on the first JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of QO through Q2 are held When input I1 is off the first JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When I1 is off and I3 is on the second JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of Q1 and Q2 are held When both I1 and I3 are off the first and second JMPs are not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 END The END instruction is always required at the end of a program however it is not necessary to program the END instruction after the last programmed instruction WindLDR automatica
497. ral D0030 Acceleration deceleration later eno Next step number D0031 0 00 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D26 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D27 8000 8 000 ms Preset value D28 D29 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction D30 Timing of change D30 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D31 0 0 End output 19 52 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Step 6 settings 19 PuLsE OuTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E3757 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0032 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0033 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00034 D0035 2000 1 to 100 000 000 m Control direction D0036 Accelerationideceleration contra D0036 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number D0037 0 0 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D32 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D33 5000 5000 ms Preset value D34 D35 2000 Preset value 2 000 Control direction D36 Timing of change D36 Acceleration deceleration first Before 0 Next step number D37 0 O End output SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 53 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS
498. ram Execution Errors on page 4 13 CVXTY Convert X to Y When input is on the X value assigned by device S2 is converted into the CVXTY 51 52 D1 corresponding Y value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS ik ee ed instruction Device S1 selects a format from a maximum of 8 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the device assigned by D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Fucion I QM R TC D Repeat Si Sourel Fomanumber gt t7 S2 Source 2 X value X X X X X X X 0 to 65535 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X X X X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 7 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed or when XYFS and CVXTY instructions of the same format number have different data type designations a user program execution error wil
499. ransmission complete 9 9 P the TXD instruction 64 Transmit instruction complete All transmission operation is completed and the next transmission is made possible If the transmit status code is other than shown above a transmit instruction error is suspected See Chapter 10 User Communication Instructions User Communication Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 25 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Data Byte Count The data register next to the device designated for transmit status stores the byte count of data transmitted by the TXD instruction When BCC is included in the transmit data the byte count of the BCC is also included in the transmit data byte count Example Data register D100 is designated as a device for transmit status D100 Transmit status D101 F Transmit data byte count RXD Receive H Applicable SmartAXIS When input is on data from an RS232C RS485 remote terminal received by port 2 through port 3 is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format assigned by S1 51 Di 02 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch RXD2 RXD2 RXD3 RXD2 RXD3 Valid Devices Device Furxton L Q MR T C D Constant Repet 751 1 Recivefomat
500. rced off When the input preceding the MCS instruction is on the MCS is not executed so that the program following it is executed according to the actual input statuses When the input condition to the MCS instruction is off and the MCS is executed other instructions between the MCS and MCR are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT All are turned off OUTN All are turned on SET and RST All are held in current status Current values are reset to zero TML TIM TMH TMS Timeout statuses are turned off Current values are held CNT CDP and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are turned off Shift register bit statuses are held SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is turned off Input conditions cannot be set for the MCR instruction More than one MCS instruction can be used with one MCR instruction Corresponding MCS MCR instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding MCS MCR instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON Input IO OFF Input I1 OFF ON Output QO OFF When input IO is off MCS is executed so that the subsequent input is forced off When input IO is on MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses IDEC SMARTAXIS LA
501. rd Reset Value 3 14 D8067 Low Word D8068 High Word C t Val F g urrent Value Frequency 3 14 D8069 Low Word Measurement Value I5 D8070 High speed High Word D8071 Counter EN Noa Preset Value 3 14 Group 4 I5 D8072 High Word Reset Value 3 14 D8073 Low Word D8074 Backlight ON Time Every scan 3 14 D8075 D8076 Reserved D8077 Out of Analog Input Range Status 3 14 D8078 D8079 D8080 MAC Address Read only Every 1 sec 3 14 D8081 D8082 D8083 D8084 D8085 IP Address Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 15 D8086 D8087 D8088 D8089 Subnet Mask Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 15 D8090 D8091 D8092 D8093 Default Gateway Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 15 D8094 D8095 D8096 D8103 Reserved D8104 RS232C Control Signal Status Ports 2 and 3 Every scan 3 15 Whe din D8105 RS232C DSR Input Control Signal Option Ports 2 and 3 ing 3 15 receiving data When sendin D8106 RS232C DTR Output Control Signal Option Ports 2 and 3 n nding 3 15 receiving data D8107 D8109 Reserved D8110 D8111 Connection 1 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 15 D8112 D8113 3 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device Address Description Up
502. re only the incoming data sent to slave station 1 is processed No extra ladder programming is needed to check the slave station number six r CR 02h 31h 3xh 3xh 3xh 3xh 13h Start Stored to D1 End Delimiter Delimiter Designating Constant as End Delimiter An end delimiter can be programmed at the end of the receive format of a RXD instruction the SmartAXIS will recognize the end of valid communication although RXD instructions without an end delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at the end of source device S1 the one byte data serves as an end delimiter to end the processing of the received data End delimiters can be 00h through FFh Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data When using the same RXD instruction repeatedly in a user program assign different end delimiters for each RXD instruction If a character in incoming data matches the end delimiter the RXD instruction ends receiving data at this point and starts subsequent receive processing as specified Even if a character matches the end delimiter at a position earlier than expected the RXD instruction ends receiving data there If a BCC code is included in the receive format of a RXD instruction an end delimiter can be positioned immediately before or after the BCC code If a data register or skip is designated between the BCC and end delimiter correct receiving is not ensured
503. register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with ZRN1 or ZRN2 instructions Starting from the specified number 3 consecutive 16 bit data registers are used The range of available data register numbers is DO to D997 and D1000 to D1997 Storage destination Function Setting Reference M 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz 7 Initial pulse frequency on page Starting number 0 Initial pulse freque 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 19 28 0 1 to 10 000 increments of 1 Hz 9 Creep pulse frequency on page Starting number 1 Cree Ise frequen denda d 1 20 to 10 000 increments of 10 Hz 19 29 Starting number 2 Error status 0 2 10 Error status on page 19 29 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input S2 specifies the initialization input When the initialization input S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR ZRN instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers An external input IO to 135 Note or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To only initialize the values one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU single output up instruction or the SOTD single output down instruction Note For the 40 I O type external inputs IO to I27 can be used DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROG
504. ress and hold Nothing happens Press Moves the cursor up one line When the cursor is on the top line of a rung nothing happens 1 Press and hold Repeats press operation Press Moves the cursor down one line When the cursor is at the last line of the ladder program nothing happens Press and hold Repeats the press operation Press Moves the cursor to the right When the cursor is at the right edge of a line nothing happens eI Press and hold Repeats the press operation Press Moves the cursor to the left When the cursor is at the left edge of a line nothing happens Press and hold Repeats the press operation List of Button Operations when an Item is Selected Details screen OPCODE MOV W S1 D0000 1234 D1 R D0123 1234 REP 03 99 Button Press Hold Basic operation Press Nothing happens 0 Press and hold Press Returns to the ladder program display screen Esg Esc Press and hold Ends the ladder program monitor With the repeat designation R is displayed this button displays the device with 1 added to the currently Press displayed device number eI This operates until the repeat count displayed in REP matches the repeatable range If there is no repeat designation is displayed nothing happens Press and hold Repeats the press operation With the repeat designation R
505. rison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly compare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When a data register comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a data register comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the DC or DC gt instruction a data register number DO through D1999 followed by a preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register through D1999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value For LC Load Compare instructions see LC Load Compare Equal To on page 7 8 Ladder Diagram Program List Data register to compare with Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram DC gt Program List DC gt D3 C D15 Qi The DC and DC instructions be repeated for different preset values The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram DC D5 10 10 Qo 10 MO I0 Program
506. rison results of CMP instructions can be selected from AND or OR operation and the result is output to an output or internal relay Repeat One Source Device When only S1 source is designated to repeat source devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the device designated by S1 are compared with the device designated by S2 The comparison results are ANDed or ORed and set to the destination device designated by D1 e Data Type Word Repeat Logical Operation AND S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt W SIR 52 D1 REP IO AND D10 15 M10 3 D10 10 lt gt 15 03 Dii 15 lt gt 15 gt AND M10 D12 20 lt gt 15 4 Data Word Repeat Logical Operation OR S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt W 51 R S2 D1 REP 10 OR D10 15 M10 3 D10 10 lt lt Dii 15 lt gt 15 OR gt M10 D12 20 gt 15 e Data Type Double Word Repeat Logical Operation AND E Repeat Two Source Devices When S1 source and S2 source are designated to repeat source devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the devices designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are ANDed or ORed and set to the destination device designated by D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0
507. rogrammed Ladder Diagram Program List TIM T5 C 11 D10 Q0 e Countdown from the preset value is initiated when the operation result directly before the timer input is on Note For restrictions on ladder programming of timer instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 e The timer output turns on when the current value timed value reaches 0 e The current value returns to the preset value when the timer input is off e Timer preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor Monitor then Online Custom New Custom Monitor e Ifa timer preset value is changed during countdown the timer remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next time cycle e timer preset value is changed to 0 then the timer stops operation and the timer output is turned on immediately e Ifa current value is changed during countdown the change becomes effective immediately e For data movement when changing confirming and clearing preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 Preset values can also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and pushbuttons WindLDR ladder diagrams show TP timer preset value and TC timer current value in advanced instruction devices e The timer instructions TML TIM TMH TMS and
508. rom off to on pulses are output from Q14 or Q15 according to the settings configured by the data registers When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses increase according to the frequency change time every 10 ms until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the RAMP instruction input turns off during pulse output pulse output is canceled If this input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP instruction is started The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the RAMP1 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input 19 22 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Nipec 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Sample program To output 48 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control disabled from Q14 Turn on initialization input MO M8120 When the RAMP instruction input IO turn
509. rough Xn X value X X X X X X X 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 YO through Yn Y value X X X X X X x 32768 32767 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When T timer or C counter is used as through Xn or YO through Yn the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 7 A maximum of 8 formats for XY conversion can be set Xn X value Yn Y value Enter values for the X and Y coordinates Two different data ranges are available depending on the data type Data Type Word Integer Xn X value 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Yn Y value 0 to 65535 32768 to 32767 IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 17 1 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Y Y 65535 32767 Valid Coordinates 0 65535 32768 0 65535 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as Xn or Yn 16 I integer X points are used D double word When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as Xn or Yn 1 point is used L long F float Note The XYFS instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Prog
510. rts followed by selecting User Protocol in Port 2 through Port 3 list box and clicking the Configure button When 7 data bits are selected as default 00h through 7Fh is transmitted When 8 data bits are selected 00h through FFh is transmitted Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data Constant Character Any character available on the computer keyboard can be entered One character is counted as one byte Constant Hexadecimal Use this option to enter the hexadecimal code of any ASCII character ASCII control codes NUL 00h through US 1Fh can also be entered using this option 25 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 25 UsER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Example The following example shows two methods to enter 3 byte ASCII data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 1 Constant Character Data Type Selection mm Constant Character T Character 123 Constant Hexadecimal Cancel OK Cancel Variable DR BCC 2 Constant Hexadecimal Data Type Selection Constant Hexadecimal Type Hexadecimal Constant Character 313233 adecimal Cancel Variable DR Bcc Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source device S1 conversion type and transmit digits must also be assigned The data
511. ruction to the input conditions For SOTU single output up instruction or SOTD single output down instruction see Basic Instructions SOTU and SOTD Single Output Up and Down on page 5 26 e The data writing process to the SD memory card for the TRACE instruction takes several scans Once a TRACE instruction is executed the process continues until the trace data transfer is complete regardless of any change in the instruction input While the trace data is being written to the SD memory card the instruction is not executed even when the input to the TRACE instructions are turned on To execute the TRACE instruction again confirm that the previous data writing process has finished and then execute the instruction Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch m X X Valid Devices Device Function gt gt I QMR T C D Constant Repet 61 Source 1 Fodenmanm Nt O S D1 Destination 1 Completion output X D2 Destination 2 Execution status A Note Specify the folder name by entering characters Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Special data registers cannot be designated as 02 Settings TRACE Data Tracing EN TRACE Data Tracing 9 Devices Settings Devices Settings 2 3 1 D1 Completion Output D2 Execution Status 51 Foldername Tag
512. ruction input I0 turns on pulse output starts ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table 9 e Devices Settings Ramp Table ARAMP1 Q0014 e 51 Control Register S2 Initialization Input S3 Interrupt Input 01 Monitor Register 02 Operation Status Tag Name M0000 E Device Address poooo Moooo D0020 Comment ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EE Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description lOperation mode Mode 0 1 Hzto 10 kHz 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Reversible control enable Disabled Number of steps 3 1 to 18 steps Start step number 1 1103 step Interrupt step number D0000 1 1 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Reversible control enable Disable The number of steps 3 Start number 1 Step 1 Interrupt number 00 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 43 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Step 1 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0002 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Step3 Frequency change time D0003 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0004 D0005 4000 1 to 100 000 000 Control d
513. ructions MOV MOVN IMOV IMOVN IBMV IBMVN move instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV INC DEC ROOT SUM binary arithmetic instructions However programs with a number of columns that exceeds 11 cannot be displayed Arithmetic operation instructions are all counted as one column Programs with blocks circuits of instructions that start with LOD LODN CC gt DC gt LC LC lt gt LC LC LC lt LC gt instructions and end with OUT OUTN SET RST and arithmetic instructions exceeding four lines cannot be displayed Ladder logic program that cannot be monitored example 1 12 or more columns of instructions laid out 1 4 4 M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 M0005 006 M0007 M0010 0011 M0012 00001 Ladder logic program that cannot be monitored example 2 Blocks circuits of instructions that start with LOD LODN CC CC2 DC2 LC LC lt gt LC lt LC LC lt LC gt instructions and end with OUT OUTN SET RST and arithmetic instructions that exceed 4 lines END Fi DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 2 3 2 LADDER PROGRAM MONITORING ON THE SMARTAXIS Using the Ladder Program Monitor This section describes how to monitor the following ladder program 00001 10000 SOTU 00002 FF m M _it M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 M0005 M0006 M0007 M0010 M0011 00003 m 4 FH M0012 M0013 M0014 M0015 00004 00005
514. rwise damage or malfunction of the SmartAXIS will result Wiring must use lead sizes that are appropriate for the applied voltage and current Terminal screws must be tightened with the prescribed tightening torque Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the SmartAXIS housing Put a cover on the SmartAXIS modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction Use a power supply of the rated value Use of the wrong power supply may cause fire hazard Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside SmartAXIS This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe e Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the output circuit This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe Use an EU approved circuit breaker This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe e Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS or when operating the SmartAXIS to force outputs on or off Incorrect operation of the SmartAXIS may cause machine damage or accidents Do not connect the ground wire directly to the SmartAXIS Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing the SmartAXIS using M4 or larger screw This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe Do not disassemble repair or modify
515. s e For details of reset pulse and data inputs see Forward Shift Register SFR on page 5 22 Structural Diagram Shift Direction Reset 10 12 Last Bit R20 of Bits 7 Ii Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Note The SFRN instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Note For restrictions on ladder programming of shift register instructions see Restriction on Ladder Programming on page 5 31 5 24 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 j DEC 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Bidirectional Shift Register A bidirectional shift register can be created by first programming the SFR instruction as detailed in the Forward Shift Register section on page 5 22 Next the SFRN instruction is programed as detailed in the Reverse Shift Register section on page 5 24
516. s omitting the figures below the second place of decimals and multiplied by 100 Data type F 51 51 1 DLDi i When input is on the square root of the device assigned by 51 51 1 is extracted and is stored to the destination assigned by 01 01 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X m For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When F float data is selected and source device S1 contains a negative value a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS When a user program execution error occurs the execution of the instruction is canceled The value of D1 is left unchanged and the next instruction is executed For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the ROOT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types x When a word device such as D data register is assigned as the source or destination
517. s define overlapping coordinates for X That is for each value of Y within the designated range there would be two X values assigned M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal XYFS I S1 relay 0 At startup XYFS specifies three points CVXTY I S1 52 D1 CVXTY converts the current value in C10 and 0 C10 090 stores result in D90 CVYTX T S1 S2 S1 CVYTX converts the value in D95 and stores 0 D95 D30 the result in D30 X0 YO X2 Y2 300 100 D90 75 D95 40 ET 100 0 D30 100 C10 300 x 60 250 The first line segment defines the following relationship for X to Y conversion Y 100 The second line segment defines another relationship for X to Y conversion ly_ Y 5 50 For X to Y conversion each value of X has only one corresponding value for Y If the current value of counter C10 is 250 the value assigned to D90 is 75 For Y to X conversion the XYFS instruction assigns two possible values of X for each value of Y The relationship defined by the first two points has priority in these cases The line between points X0 YO and X1 Y1 that is the line between 0 100 and 100 0 has priority in defining the relationship for Y to X conversion X Y 100 Therefore if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 60 not 180 Exactly the same two line segments might also be defined by the XYFS instruction except that the point 300 1
518. s designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are set to destination devices as many as the repeat cycles starting with the device designated by D1 e Data Type Word S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 CMP gt W SIR S2 R DIR IO D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 lt gt 020 0 M10 turned on Dil 20 lt gt 021 20 Mili turned on D12 30 lt gt 022 100 12 turned off Data Type Double Word SIR S2R DIR S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 CMP gt D 10 D20 D30 M50 3 D20D21 gt 30 031 M50 022 023 gt D32D33 M51 D24 D25 gt D34D35 M52 Comparison Output Status The comparison output is usually maintained while the input to the data comparison instruction is off If the comparison output is on the on status is maintained when the input is turned off as demonstrated by this program ON CMP gt W Si S2 Di REP Input I0 ofr 10 Qo Comparison 010 gt 1 Result D10 lt C1 Comparison ON Output QO This program turns the output off when the input is off ON CMP gt W Si S2 Di REP FF D10 C1 MO Input IO Comparison D102 C1 Result D10 lt C1 ON Output QO OFF IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 7 5 7 DATA COMPA
519. s fesshiadacadaasdacepesshedeaasubaededgcandtehalnaas 9 1 ei ZA EIE 9 1 XORW Excl usive OR WOFG 2 25 22 iaisecdcotlacerendhdimaasedendoccuesdtecetesanasdiccusstatuassneaiindhant decdadectsnanasanndecuccnetn 9 1 Shift Rotate Instructions cundi p 10 1 SFIR tsipiss n 10 3 BCDES BCD heft SHIRE MEME 10 5 WSET SHIP S 10 7 enMotri iioi 10 8 esto cbim M M M HRR 10 10 Data Conversion Instructions HTOB Hex to BCD e a PP aan Ta a ERR RARE EFE Era E Na BTOH BCD to Hex HTOA Hex to ASCII ATOH ASCII to Hex BTOA BCD to ASCII ATOB ASCII to BCD SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC Carrer 12 Carrer 13 Carrer 14 Carrer 15 Carrer 16 Carrer 17 Carrer 18 Carrer 19 Carrer 20 Carrer 21 TABLE OF CONTENTS ENCOEMCOUE t 11 15 DECO DECOdE 11 16 egimus PEUT 11 17 ALT Alternate Output 2225 53i xni ett tu rar
520. s on pulse output starts IO RAMP Ramp Pulse Output es Devices Settings RAMP 1 00014 51 Register 52 Initialization Input 01 Operation Status D0000 0000 M0100 f Device Address D0000 000 100 B Comment L RAMP Ramp Pulse Output Eg Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency 00000 600 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 30 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable Disabled Control direction D0003 Preset value D0004 D0005 48000 1 to 100 000 000 Current value D0006 D0007 1 to 100 000 000 Error status D0008 Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency 00 600 6000 Hz Initial pulse frequency Di 30 300 Hz Frequency change time D2 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Disable Control direction D3 Preset value 04 05 48000 Preset value 48 000 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 23 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS To output 100 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control by single pulse output from Q14 When the RAMP instruction input I0 changes from off to on pulse output starts When I1
521. s these devices When source device S1 is designated by a constant the preset value can be 0 through 65535 in hours then minutes and seconds are set to 0 Special internal relays cannot be designated as destination device D2 Destination device D3 requires two data registers reserved for system work area Hour data can be 0 through 65535 Minute and second data can be 0 through 59 When the measured input ON duration value in destination device D1 reaches the preset value designated by source device S1 the comparison output designated by destination device D2 turns on As long as the input remains on the measured input ON duration value continues to increase When the measured input ON duration value exceeds 65535 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds the value returns to 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds to repeat another measuring cycle with the comparison output remaining on When any of the hour minute or second data of source device S1 exceeds the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS but the input ON duration is measured When any of the hour minute or second data of source device S1 is changed to an invalid value after the comparison output has turned on the comparison output is turned off Then a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS but the input ON duration measurement is conti
522. s to three different portions of the program depending on the input When input IO is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments M8122 is the 100 ms clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 ms increments M8123 is the 10 ms clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 ms increments Using the Timer Instruction with Program Branching When the timer start input of the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction is already on countdown begins immediately at the location jumped to starting with the timer current value When using a program branch it is important to make sure that timers are initialized when desired after the jump If it is necessary to initialize the timer instruction set to the preset value after the jump the timer s start input should be kept off for one or more scan cycles before initialization Otherwise the timer input on will not be recognized Using the SOTU SOTD Instructions with Program Branching Check that pulse inputs of counters and shift registers and inputs of single outputs SOTU and SOTD are maintained during the jump if required Hold the input off for one or more scan cycles after the j
523. s used to read the result of the temporarily saved bit logical operation The BPP bit pop instruction is used to restore the result of the temporarily saved bit logical operation When using WindLDR the user does not need to program the BPS BRD and BPP instructions The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into BPS BRD and BPP when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram BPS IO It 01 BRD I2 Q2 BPP B Timing Chart 10 1 12 I3 Qi Q2 Q3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Program List Instruction Data When both inputs IO and I1 are on output Q1 is turned on When both inputs IO and I2 are on output Q2 is turned on When both inputs 10 and 13 are on output Q3 is turned on 5 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Four types of on delay timers are available 1 sec timer TML 100 ms timer TIM 10 ms timer TMH and 1 ms timer TMS A total of 100 FT1A 12 or 200 other SmartAXIS on and off delay timers can be programmed in a user program Each timer must be allocated to a unique number TO through T199 Timer Device Address Range Increments Preset Value TML 1 sec timer TO to T199 0 to 65535 sec 1 sec Constant 0 to 65535 TIM 100 ms timer TO to T199 0 to 6553 5 sec 100 ms Data registers DO to D1999 TMH 10 ms timer TO to T199 0 to 655 35 s
524. sage EN Options Priority 0 4 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character Insert Word Device 0000 Bit Device BarGraph eT __________ Configuring the word device 9 Select the area at the ninth column on the second line and click Word Device MSG Message ax Options Priority 0 4 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character Insert m Cc The Insert Word Device dialog box opens Bit Device Text with Effect BarGraph 10 Set Device to D0002 Data Type to I Integer and Conversion to Decimal Under Display Options disable all of the options Insert Word Device ea D0002 Data Type Integer I Display Option O Blinking E Invert Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x6 ok cama 13 12 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area 00007 HER om as Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Specialcharacter Word
525. see Parameter tab on page 12 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 5 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 3 S2 source 2 Initialization input This setting specifies the device to initialize the days of the week and the times stored in the data register region that starts from S1 source 1 The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers by turning on the initialization input This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs This setting configures the number of parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings See 4 S3 source 3 Number of parameter tabs on page 12 3 5 D1 destination 1 Output This setting configures the output for the results when the configured day of the week and time and the current day of the week and time are compared This setting is shared in common with To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings See 5 D1 destination 1 Output on page 12 3 6 Pulse Output This setting configures the operation for D1 output This setting is applied to all parameter tabs and is shared in common with To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings See 6 Pulse Output on page 12 3 7 Data Register Allocation Click this button to displa
526. ser s Manual For details on the SmartAXIS Touch timer interrupt see Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions Timer Interrupt in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8039 SD Memory Card Capacity The capacity of the inserted SD or SDHC maximum size 32 GB memory card in megabytes is stored to D8039 D8040 D8047 Analog Input Value The analog input values 0 to 10 VDC to the analog input terminals are converted to digital values 0 to 1000 and stored to the corresponding special data registers D8040 AI0 D8041 AI1 D8042 AI2 D8043 AI3 D8044 AI4 D8045 AI5 D8046 AI6 D8047 AI7 D8050 D8073 D8134 D8145 High speed Counter and Frequency Measurement These special data registers are used with the high speed counter function and the frequency measurement function For details on the SmartAXIS Pro Lite high speed counter see Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on the frequency measurement see Chapter 5 Special Functions Frequency Measurement in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on the SmartAXIS Touch high speed counter see Chapter 3 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual For details on the frequency measurement see Chapter 3 4 10 Frequency Measurement in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8074 Backlight ON Time The backlight ON time is stored The backlight ON time can be configured by changing the value in D8074 betw
527. shift the data string starting with source device S1 to the left or right by 1 to 15 bits as designated The data string can be 1 to 65535 bits The result is set to the source device S1 and special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow The LSB or MSB is filled with 0 or 1 as designated Bit shift and rotate instructions are used to shift the 16 or 32 bit data string in the designated source device S1 to the left or right by the quantity of bits designated The result is set to the source device S1 and special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow The BCD left shift instruction shifts the BCD digits in two consecutive data registers to the left The word shift instruction is used to move 16 bit data to a destination data register and shifts down the data of subsequent data registers as many as designated SFTL Shift Left CY S1 SFTL 51 52 Bits When input is on data string starting with source device S1 is shifted mE ud MN de to the left by the quantity of bits assigned by device Bits The result is set to source device S1 and the last bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Zero or 1 assigned by source device S2 is set to the LSB e S2 0 N_B 16 Bits 1 cY MSB S1 LSB 52 Before shift lt 14100110101111010110 1 0 M8003 Shift to the left cY M
528. signated using a data cleared and the original preset values are loaded register DO through D1999 then the data of the data register For data movement when changing confirming and clearing becomes the preset value preset values see Changing Confirming and Clearing Preset e Directly after the CNT instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML Values for Timers and Counters on page 5 17 Preset values can TIM TMH or TMS instruction can be programmed also be changed and confirmed using the LCD screen and pushbuttons e WindLDR ladder diagrams show CP counter preset value and CC counter current value in advanced instruction devices e The CNT instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 11 5 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter The dual pulse reversible counter CDP has up and down pulse inputs so the three inputs are required The circuit for a dual pulse reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input up pulse input down pulse input the CDP instruction and a counter number through C199 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a dec
529. signed by source device S1 The result is set to destination device D1 and internal relay M8003 carry or borrow S1 x 52 Di Di i 5151 1 x 2 S2 1 gt 0101 1 Data type W or I Data type D L or F When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source device S1 is multiplied by 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source device S2 The result is set to destination device D1 When the result exceeds the valid range for data types D or L the ERR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are turned on Data type W or I Data type D or L S1 S2 5 D1 quotient D1 1 remainder 1 S1 1 52 52 1 gt 01 01 1 quotient 01 2 01 3 remainder Data type 51 51 1 52 52 1 gt D1 D1 1 quotient When input is on 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source device S1 is divided by 16 or 32 bit data assigned by source device S2 The quotient is set to 16 or 32 bit destination device D1 and the remainder is set to the next 16 or 32 bit data Data type F does not generate a remainder When S2 is 0 dividing by 0 the ERR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are turned on A user program execution error also occurs in the following division operations Data type I 32768 1 Data type L 2147483648 1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 8 1 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X
530. specified internal relay 3 sequential internal relays are used The range of available internal relays is to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Storage destination Function Setting This relay turns on during pulse output Starting Pulse output ON 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops number 0 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output ends Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output is complete number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay turns off when pulse output starts Starting Overflow 0 None When pulse counting is enabled this relay turns on when a pulse is number 2 1 An overflow has occurred output that exceeds the configured preset value Setting tab PULS Pulse Output Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation mode 5 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Output pulse frequency 6 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Pulse counting 7 Disable pulse counting PULS 1 and PULS 2 instructions only Preset value 8 1to 100 000 000 Current value 9 1to 100 000 000 Error status 10 5 Operation mode This setting selects the frequency range to output from two operation modes Only PULS3 and PULS4 support operation mode 0 Operation mode 1 Hz to
531. specifying data registers 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS To turn on M100 from 0 00 on September 1 2011 to 0 00 on June 25 2013 ON date 2011 09 01 ON OFF date 2013 06 25 OFF Yearly OFF xxx 2011 2012 A 2013 9 1 6 25 Monthly OFF Device tab Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer E3777 YEAR Yearly Timer Devices pa Devices P1 ON settings Porth V Data register settings Me en E 51 First DR 52 Initialization Input D1 Output Month and Day Settings Tag Name D0000 voooo MO100 Month September 9o Device Address D0000 100 5 Day of the week D0000 D0003 2 End of month Comment OFF settings yer os H Month and Day Settings Month Pune e 253 Day of the week End of month E Specify ON duration il C Pulse Output S3 The number of parameter tabs 1 Preview Preview Year wsk Year ri 2013 2013 June 2013 Apri 2013 May 2013 June 201 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Bil um 4 251 Data register allocation The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers DO to D3 as shown in the table below The settings configured on the P 1 tab are stored in DO to D
532. sters I integer D double word L long F float X Example LOG10 E When input I1 is on the common logarithm of the binary data of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 LOG10 F Si Di D10 D20 109 0 0000278 4 555955 51 Di 010 011 0 0000278 20 021 4 555955 22 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 f DEC 22 LOGARITHM POWER INSTRUCTIONS EXP Exponent e 0101 1 HF EXP F Eon Ran When input is on e is raised to the power 51 51 1 assigned by source device S1 and is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 e base of natural logarithm 2 7182818 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data of exponent X X 01 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the operation result is not within the range between 3 402823 x 108 and 1 175495 x 10738 or between 1 175495 1038 and 3 402823 1038 special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow is turned on except when the result is 0 For details see Carry and Borrow in Floating Point Data Processing on page 4 11 When the operation r
533. store results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Source device S1 occupies 2 consecutive data registers to store double word data starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D998 and D1000 D1998 can be designated as source device S1 Destination device D1 occupies 3 consecutive data registers starting with the designated device Data registers D0 D997 and D1000 D1997 be designated as destination device D1 Second data for source device S1 can be 0 through 4 294 967 295 When the conversion result exceeds 65535 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds special internal relay M8003 carry is turned on For example when the conversion result is 65537 hours 0 minute 0 second destination 1 stores 1 hour 0 minute 0 second turning on special internal relay M8003 carry Since the STOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Examples STOH The following examples demonstrate the STOH instruction that will convert time data in seconds into hours minutes and seconds and store the results to three consecutive data registers E 51 05 Di D100 Destination 1 Source 1 D190 dicus ES DG P D102 Destination 1 Source 1 Hout 006 Second _ D101 cuire
534. t cycles starting with the device designated by S1 are moved to the destination As a result only the last of the source devices is moved to the destination Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 MOV W Si R D1 REP H D10 D20 3 D10 110 D20 112 D11 111 D21 D12 112 D22 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 MOV D Si R D1 REP P D10 D20 3 D10 110 D20 114 D11 111 D21 115 D12 112 D22 D13 113 D23 D14 114 D24 D15 115 D25 Repeat Destination Device When the D1 destination is designated to repeat the source device designated by S1 is moved to all destination devices as many times as the repeat cycles starting with the destination designated by D1 Data Type Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W 51 DIR REP P D10 D20 3 D10 110 D20 110 Dii 111 m gt 021 110 D12 112 gt 22 110 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV D 51 DIR REP H D10 D2
535. t from the preset value the current value is decremented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time As described above when a timer is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction the current value or the remaining time of the timer is read as source data Adding counters CNT start counting at 0 and the current value is incremented up to the preset value Reversible counters and CUD start counting at the preset value and the current value is incremented or decremented from preset value When any counter is designated as a source device of an advanced instruction the current value is read as source data Using Timer or Counter as Destination Device As described above when a timer or counter is designated as a destination device of an advanced instruction the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter Timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 65535 When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register the timer or counter cannot be designated as a destination of an advanced instruction When executing such an advanced instruction a user program execution error will result For details of user program execution error see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Note When a user program execution error occurs the result is not set to the destination DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER P
536. t need to be designated The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to D203 of destination 1 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 3 IDEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS When the result exceeds 23 59 59 the resultant hour data is subtracted by a multiple of 24 and the day data is incremented D8008 D8009 D8010 D8011 D8012 D8013 D8014 Source 1 7 Year 8 Month 23 Day 4 D of W 20 Hour 30 Minute 40 Second Note D100 D101 D102 Source 2 30 Hour 35 Minute 15 Second Destination 1 D200 D201 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 7 Year 8 Month 25 Day 6 D of W 3 Hour 5 Minute 55 Second Note D8011 in source 1 is not used for execution and does not need to be designated The day of week is calculated automatically from the resultant year month and day and stored to D203 of destination 1 24 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 TIDEC 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS TSUB Time Subtraction H Applicable SmartAXIS S1 52 D1 CY When input is on time data assigned by source device S2 is subtracted from date time data assigned by source
537. t to 20 fluctuations will start when the process variable PV reaches a temperature 20 lower than the set point SP 1 Measuring PID constants Temperature ff Proportional band 2 Calculate PID constants 3 Control with the PID constants set with AT 4 AT bias setting value 20 AT When the AT execution bit is turned on AT Time gt gt 1 2 3 Set point SP AT bias setting value lt process variable PV lt set point SP AT bias setting value Fluctuations will start when the process variable PV reaches the set point SP 1 Measuring PID constants Temperature ff Proportional band 2 Calculate PID constants 3 Control with the PID constants set with AT 4 AT bias setting value 20 SP 20 When the AT execution bit is turned on AT Time gt Fi DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 15 28 PID INSTRUCTION Process variable PV gt set point SP AT bias setting value When the AT bias setting is set to 20 fluctuations will start when the process variable PV reaches a temperature 20 higher than the set point SP 1 Measuring PID constants Temperature 2 Calculate PID constants 3 Control with the PID constants set with AT 4 AT bias setting value 20 5 20 AT When AT execution bit is turned on SP execute auto tuning AT To execute auto tuning turn on t
538. tAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Folder name Note LI D1 Destination 1 Completion output X A D2 Destination 2 Execution status A Note Specify the folder name by entering characters Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Special data registers cannot be designated as D2 Settings DLOG Data Logging ex DLOG Data Logging ex Devices Settings Devices Settings 2 3 1 Di Completion Output D2 Execution Status 51 Foldername Tag Name E CJ 5 6 7 8 Tag Name Device address Display Type Repeat Device Address Comment gt 4 yt 9 Logging data size 0 bytes 1024bytes Remaining size 1024 bytes 10 b Cancel 1 S1 source 1 Folder name Specify the folder name on the SD memory card to store the log data with a desired text up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Notes e The following single byte characters cannot be used in the folder names lt gt 4 08 e Consecutive periods cannot be used in folder names A period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name Single byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted 26 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 2 D1 destination 1 Compl
539. tAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 S2 Y value Enter a value for the Y coordinate to convert within the range specified in the XYFS instruction Two different data ranges are available depending on the data type r IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 17 3 17 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS D1 Destination to store results The conversion result of the X value is stored to the destination Data Type Word Integer S2 Y value 0 to 65535 32768 to 32767 D1 X value 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Y Y 65535 32767 Valid Coordinates X 0 65535 32768 0 65535 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as S2 or D1 16 I integer X points are used D double word When word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as S2 or D1 1 point integer L long data is used F float Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 Note The CVYTX instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 174 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC
540. tage of using constant for verification The incoming data contains a constant value 1 in the middle and that constant value needs to be verified to see whether the incoming data is valid Using Data Register The incoming data including the constant value needs to be stored in data registers When the RXD instruction completes receiving the incoming data the receive status contains 64 meaning the RXD instruction has completed without errors even if the constant value is not an expected value Extra ladder programming is needed to see whether the constant value in the incoming data is correct or not STX M CR 02h 3xh 3xh 31h 3xh 3xh 13h Start Stored to D1 through D5 End Delimiter Delimiter e Using Constant for Verification A constant to verify the constant value in the incoming data is designated in the receive format If the constant value is not an expected value when the RXD instruction completes receiving the incoming data the receive status contains 74 meaning the RXD instruction has completed but user communication error code 5 occurred No extra ladder programming is needed to see whether the constant value in the received data is correct or not STX ME CR 02h 3xh 3xh 31h 3xh 3xh 13h Start Constant End Delimiter Delimiter Stored to D3 and D4 Stored to D1 and D2 Note When configuring constants which are either characters or hexadecimal values in the receive
541. tarts operation the MOV move instructions set M8120 65535 and 0 to data registers D10 and D11 respectively MOV W S1 D1 REP Each time input IO is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 0 011 and 011 is shifted to the right by 1 bit as assigned by device Bit D10 is the low word and D11 is the high word The last bit status shifted out is set to special internal relay M8003 carry or borrow Ones are set to the MSB Bits to shift 1 Before shift 52 MSB D11 D10 LSB 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 Shift to the right M8003 After shift MSB 011 010 011 010 LSB CY 1 0 000 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M8003 10 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS BCDLS BCD Left Shift When input is on the 32 bit binary data assigned by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits shifted to the left by the quantity of digits assigned by S2 and converted back to 32 bit binary data Valid values for each of S1 and 51 1 are 0 through 9999 The number of digits that can be shifted is 1 throu
542. ted 2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full 3 SD memory card writing error Writing trace data to the SD memory card fails 4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB 5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected 6 SD memory ard access rror The TRACE is executed while another DLOG instruction TRACE instruction is being executed 7 Characters conversion error Converting trace data to numeric characters fails 8 Folder creation error Creating the folder fails 9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails 32 Executing TRACE instruction Writing trace data to SD memory card fails 4 Settings The following is a list of the device and display types that can be set as the data to be output to the CSV files Display type Valid Devices DEC W TC TP CC CP D DEC I D DEC D CC CP D DEC L D DEC F D HEX W TC TP CC CP D HEX D CC CP D BIN B I Q M R T 5 Tag Name Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices to the CSV files 6 Device Address When the devices are specified as tag names the corresponding device addresses are shown 7 Display Type Select the display type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file Display type Range Maximum characters DEC W 0 to 65 535 5 DEC I 32 768 to 32 767 6 DEC D 0 to 4 294 967 295 10 DEC L 2 147 483 64
543. tep 1 Function DR Setting Description ISteady pulse frequency 00008 1000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz change time D0009 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0010 D0011 100000 1 to 100 000 000 dli Control direction D0012 eps Accelerationdeceleration contral D0012 Acceleration deceleration later sient ncm D0013 3 Oto6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D8 1000 10 kHz Frequency change time D9 5000 5 000 ms Preset value D10 D11 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction D12 Timing of change D12 Acceleration deceleration later m Next step number D13 3 Step 3 Step 3 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E3757 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 ISteady pulse frequency 00014 5000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz qmm 3 Frequency change time D0015 8000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0016 D0017 1000000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00018 ces Acceleration deceleration contral D0018 Acceleration deceleration later ph D0019 4 Oto6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D14 5000 50 kHz Frequency change time D15 8000 8 000 ms Preset value D16 D17 1000000 Preset value 1 000 000 Control direction D18 Timing of change D18 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D19 4 Step 4
544. ter Counter Comparison Data Register Comparison Y Y v Y oY YY Program Flow 2 Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact and click the left mouse button Note Another method to insert a NO or NC contact is to move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the contact and type A or B The Normally Open dialog box appears 1 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 1 OPERATION BASICS 3 Enter IO in the Tag Name field and click OK f A Normally Open 9 Type Normally Open Tag Name 10 B Normally Closed Device Address 10000 Comment A NO contact of input IO is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line Next program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input I1 4 From the WindLDR menu bar select Home Basic B Normally Closed 5 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact and click the left mouse button The Normally Closed dialog box appears 6 Enter I1 in the Tag Name field and click OK A NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line At the end of the first ladder line program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output QO 7 From the WindLDR menu bar select Home gt Basic gt OUT Output 8 Move the
545. ter D999 or D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so internal relay M1241 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1 8 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC 8 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DIV Data Type Word p Note Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of word data data register D999 or D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so M1241 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1 D10 50 D20 7 D30 7 D31 1 Quotient Remainder DIV W 51 52 Di D10 D20 D30 When input I2 is on D10 data is divided by D20 data The quotient is set to D30 and the remainder is set to D31 Data Integer E Note Since the destination uses two word devices in the division operation of integer data data register D999 or D1999 cannot be used as destination device D1 When using a bit device such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so M1241 or a larger number cannot be used as destination device D1 D10 50 D20 7
546. ternal relays is to M1270 Caution The first digit of the internal relay number must be 0 not 1 to 7 Otherwise the ZRN instruction will not operate correctly Storage destination Function Setting This relay turns on during pulse output This relay turns off when Starting pulse output ON 0 Pulse output OFF ZRN output RA the signal turns off number 0 relay 1 Pulse output ON P 9 and pulse output ends This relay turns on when the proximity signal turns off and pulse output end Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete number 1 complete rela 1 Pulse output complete P J P This relay turns off when ZRN instruction output starts Setting tab ZRN Zero Return E37 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Initial operation mode 6 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency 7 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz Creep operation mode 8 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency 9 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Error status 10 OK Cancel 6 Initial operation mode This setting selects the range of frequencies to output from the two modes Initial operation mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz increments of 1 Hz 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz increments of 10 Hz 7 Initial pulse frequency This setting specifies the initial pulse frequency to output Initial operation mode 0 Set between 1 Hz and 10 kHz in increments of 1 Hz Initial opera
547. the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC Breakdown of END Processing Time APPENDIX The END processing time depends on the SmartAXIS settings and system configuration The maximum values for the END processing time are as follows END processing Item Instruction Bytes 640 us The byte quantities for basic and advanced instructions are listed below Basic Instruction LOD Qty of Bytes When not using data registers 4 Using data registers 8 LODN Basic Instruction TMLO Processing Time Qty of Bytes When not using data registers 8 Using data registers OUT TIMO OUTN TMHO SET TMSO RST CNT AND CDP ANDN CUD OR CNTD ORN CO O CO CDPD AND LOD CUDD OR LOD SFR BPS SFRN BRD cc BPP gt SOTU DC SOTD DC TML MCS TIM MCR TMH JMP TMS IDEC w S HB ALATA JEND END A BR A BY BR GC GW GW SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 5 APPENDIX
548. the execution time Execution status Numeric value Status Error cause 0 Normal termination 1 Arithmetic error Division by zero floating point format error 2 Script ID error The specified script does not exist 3 Device access error Invalid device specified device boundary exceeded If any error occurs other than the script ID error script processing is canceled and the execution of the SCRPT instruction is terminated If the script ID error occurs Di and 01 1 are updated and execution of the SCRPT instruction terminates Execution time The execution time from when the execution of the specified script is started until it is completed is stored in 100 us increments For example when it takes 1 45 ms to execute the specified script 15 is stored as the execution time When it takes 6553 5 ms or longer to execute the specified script 65535 is stored as the execution time The SCRPT instruction execution time is affected by interrupt processing or other processing that occurs during the execution If any error occurs other than the script ID error the script execution time from when the script execution is started until the error occurs is stored as the execution time If the script ID error occurs zero is stored as the execution time Script selection To specify a registered script ID for S1 in WindLDR click Refer button on the SCRPT instruction dialog box to open Script Manager dialog box Choose the script ID to execute
549. the instruction is canceled the data in D1 and D1 1 is left unchanged For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Since the HTOS instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Examples HTOS The following examples demonstrate the HTOS instruction that will convert time data in hours minutes and seconds into seconds and store the results to two consecutive data registers E 51 DO Di D100 Source 1 2 Hour Destination 1 10 7840 PI Minute ene Second DO 40 Second Source 1 40 Hour Destination 1 30 145820 EL Minute ee Second DO 20 Second DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 24 9 24 CLOCK INSTRUCTIONS STOH Sec to HMS H Seconds gt Hours minutes seconds S1 Di EM When input is on time data in seconds assigned by source device S1 is converted into hours minutes and seconds The result is stored to destination device D1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Time data in seconds X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to
550. the source or destination F float X 1 point word data or 2 points double word or float data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments 6 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 6 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Example IMOV Data Type Word IMOV W Si 52 D1 D2 REP 10 D20 C10 D10 D25 D20 D20 C10 gt D10 025 Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device Source device S2 and destination device D2 Er are the offset values to determine the source and destination devices D23 If the current value of counter C10 assigned by source device S2 is 4 the source data is determined by adding the D24 6450 offset value to data register D20 assigned by source device S1 D25 20 D 20 4 024 LAT If data register D25 contains a value of 20 the destination is determined by adding the offset value to data register D30 6450 lt D10 assigned by destination device D1 LE D 10 20 030 C10 4 As a result when input IO is on the data in data register D24 is moved to data register D30 e Data Type Float D20 IMOV F S1 52 D1 D2 REP 10 D20 D50 D10 D51 D21 D22 D23 2 73 020 D50 D10 D51 If data register D50 contains a value of 2 the source data is
551. time response is needed to execute an interrupt the IOREF instruction can be used When the input to the IOREF instruction is turned on the status of the designated input or output is read or written immediately When the IOREF instruction is executed for an input the filter does not take effect and the input status at the moment is read to a corresponding internal relay The actual input status of the same input number is read to the internal input memory when the END instruction is executed as in the normal scanning then the filter value has effect as designated in the Function Area Settings See Chapter 5 Special Functions Input Filter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual T IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 15 1 15 REFRESH INSTRUCTIONS Example IOREF The following example demonstrates a program that transfers the input IO status to output QO using the IOREF instruction Input I2 is designated as an interrupt input For the interrupt input function see Chapter 5 Special Functions Interrupt Input in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV W 22 Di REP D8033 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for interrupt input I2 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 0 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay IOREF immediately reads input IO status to internal relay M300 M300 turns on or off the output QO
552. timer interrupt designated as source device S1 are disabled even if the interrupt condition is met in the user program area subsequent to the DI instruction When the EI instruction is executed disabled interrupt inputs and timer interrupt designated as source device S1 are enabled again in the user program area subsequent to the EI instruction Different interrupts can be selected for the DI and EI instructions to disable and enable interrupt inputs selectively For Interrupt Input and Timer Interrupt see Chapter 5 Special Functions Interrupt Input and Timer Interrupt in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Make sure that interrupt inputs and timer interrupt designated as source device S1 are selected in the Function Area Settings Otherwise when the DI or EI instruction is executed a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS The DI and EI instructions cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Special Internal Relays M8070 M8075 and M8144 Interrupt Status Special internal relays M8070 through M8075 and M8144 are provided to indicate whether interrupt inputs and timer interrupt are enabled or disabled Interrupt Lite Pro To
553. tination are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 Di 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 ANDW D SiR 52 DiR REP 11 D10 D20 030 3 010 011 E 020 021 030 031 012 013 020 021 LII D32 D33 014 015 020 021 LI D34 D35 Repeat All Source and Destination Devices Data Type Word When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 ANDW W SiR S2R DiR REP n D10 020 D30 3 D10 020 E D30 Dii D21 D31 012 D22 032 Data Type Double Word When all devices are assigned to repeat different results are set to 3 devices starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 ANDW D SiR S2R DiR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 010 011 020 021 030 031 012 013 022 023 lt gt 032 033 014 015 024 025 3 034 035 Note When user program error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operations for other instructions continues For an advanced instruction that has caused a user program execution error due to an error in the source devices results are not set to any destination 9 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 10 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Bit shift instructions are used to
554. tion 16 points word data or 32 points double word data are used When repeat is set for a bit D double word X device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination F float 1 point word data or 2 points double word data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Example IMOVN D10 4 IMOVN W Si 52 D1 D2 REP L 10 C10 D10 D30 020 NAT D19 C10 D10 NOT 5 D30 D20 D20 15 Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device Source device S2 and destination device D2 are the offset values used to determine the source and destination devices D21 If the data of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 4 then the source data is determined by adding the offset value to counter C10 assigned by source device S1 045 59085 10 4 C14 046 1225 2 If data register 020 assigned by destination device 02 contains a value of 15 then the destination is determined by adding the offset value to data register D30 assigned by destination device D1 C13 D 30 15 045 C14 6450 As a result when input IO is on the current value of counter C14 is inverted and moved to data regist
555. tion input When the initialization input S2 is turned on the initial values configured in the WindLDR PWM instruction dialog box on the Setting tab are stored in the control registers An external input IO to I35 Note or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To only initialize the values one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU single output up instruction or the SOTD single output down instruction Note For the 40 I O type external inputs IO to I27 can be used SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 9 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 4 D1 destination 1 Operation status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with PWM instructions Starting from the specified internal relay 3 sequential internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Storage destination Function Setting This relay turns on during pulse output Starting 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when the PWM instruction output stops Pulse output ON m number 0 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output ends Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when puls
556. tion mode 1 Set between 200 Hz and 100 kHz in increments of 10 Hz 19 28 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 ZI DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS 8 Creep operation mode This setting selects the range of frequencies to output from the two modes Creep operation mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz increments of 1 Hz 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz increments of 10 Hz 9 Creep pulse frequency This setting specifies the creep pulse frequency to output Creep operation mode 0 Set between 1 Hz and 10 kHz in increments of 1 Hz Creep operation mode 1 Set between 200 Hz and 100 kHz in increments of 10 Hz 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the ZRN instruction is being executed M8004 user program execution error is turned on and this relay is set to the error code Description 0 Normal The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in initial pulse operation mode O creep operation mode 0 The pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in initial pulse operation mode 1 operation mode 1 2 Pulse frequency designation error IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 29 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Examples ZRN ZRN1 instruction timing chart ZRN1 instruction S1 is specified as data register D200 S3 is specified as external input I2 D1 is specified as internal relay M10 ZRN nstruction input Initial speed Creep speed Output pu
557. tor Monitor then Online Status After pressing the Clear or Confirm button the display changes to Unchanged PLC Status E3771 Network connection System Information PLCType FT1A 48 System Software Version 1 82 Operation Status Run Stop Status Running Scan Time Current 1 ms Na Maximum 91 yi TIM CNT Change Status Unchanged Clear lt lt Calendar 10 10 2012 10 10 10 Write Protection Unprotected Read Protection Unprotected Error Status jt Clear Details Data movement when changing a timer counter preset value When changing a timer counter preset value using Custom Monitor on WindLDR the new preset value is written to the SmartAXIS RAM The user program and preset values in the ROM are not changed Note The LCD screen and pushbuttons can also be used to change preset values and confirm changed preset values WindLDR User Program Data movement when confirming changed preset values When the Confirm button is pressed before pressing the Clear button the changed timer counter preset values in the SmartAXIS RAM are written to the ROM When uploading the user program after confirming the user program with changed preset values is uploaded from the SmartAXIS ROM to WindLDR WindLDR User Program Confirm Data movement when clearing changed preset values to restore original values Ch
558. tput manipulated variable Output manipulated variable manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction x output manipulated variable scaling factor 7 Output manipulated variable lower limit S1 15 When Enable upper and lower limits Set the lower limit value of the output manipulated variable for the control output When the manipulated variable calculated by the PID instruction is lower than or equal to the output manipulated variable lower limit value the set lower limit value is set as the output manipulated variable for the control output When setting the output manipulated variable lower limit value you must set the output manipulated variable lower limit value so that it satisfies output manipulated variable lower limit value output manipulated variable upper limit value The output manipulated variable lower limit value can be set from 0 to 100 in 1 increments When Enable percentage The output manipulated variable lower limit is disabled 8 Manual Mode Output MV 51 17 Set the output manipulated variable for manual mode To enable this function Auto manual mode S3 1 must be turned on The manual mode output manipulated variable is enabled for the output manipulated variable the output manipulated variable digital value and the control output For switching between auto manual mode see Auto manual mode S3 1 on page 28 12 The manual mode output manipulated variable can be set from 0 00 to 100 00 in
559. truction input PWM2 instruction input Output pulse Q15 Pulse output ON M200 Pulse output complete M201 w1 w2 w3 pulse width ratio When the PWM2 instruction input changes from off to on M200 turns on and pulses with the width ratio configured by D101 are output If the value of D101 changes during pulse output pulses are output with the width ratio based on that value When the PWM2 instruction input changes from on to off M200 turns off and M201 turns on at the same time The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PWM2 instruction input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the input n IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 13 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Sample program This section describes an example program that outputs a pulse with the pulse width ratio of 30 when 10 is off and a pulse with the pulse width ratio of 6090 when 10 is on MOWW Si D1 30 Di MOWW Si D1 60 Di REP Turn on initialization input MO Set pulse width ratio D1 to 30 3090 ON Set pulse width ratio D1 to 60 6090 ON When PWM1 instruction input I1 turns on start output of a pulse with the pulse width ratio of 30 or 6096 Settings PWM Pulse Width Modulation EN Devices Settings 1 00014
560. ts 6 BCD Binary ASCII 1234567890 53 010 011 499602D2h gt 020 0035h BTOA D _ 51 D10 54 021 9936h 55 D22 9937h 56 D23 0038 57 024 999p 48 025 0030h Quantity of Digits 3 BCD Binary ASCII 1234567890 56 00 01 499602021 gt 020 0038h BTOA D S1 D10 57 D21 0039h 48 D22 0030h IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 11 11 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ATOB ASCII to BCD H Word data S1 S1 1 S142 S1 3 S144 gt D1 Double word data S1 S1 1 S142 S149 gt 1 01 1 ATOB 51 52 D1 When input is on the ASCII data assigned by S1 as many times as the quantity of digits assigned by S2 is converted into BCD and converted into 16 or 32 bit binary data The result is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through 39h The number of digits that can be converted is through 5 for word data and 1 through 10 for double word data Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat 751 1 ASCIdaatocmnvet a 5 x S2 Source 2
561. ts or internal relays as many as the repeat cycles are used Three special internal relays are available to indicate the comparison result of the CMP instruction Depending on the result one of the three special internal relays turns on When S1 gt S2 M8150 turns on When S1 S2 M8151 turns on S2 Value M8150 M8151 8152 eu When S1 S2 M8152 turns on 1 51 gt 52 ON OFF OFF OFF S1 2 S1 52 OFF ON OFF ON 3 51 lt 52 OFF OFF ON OFF Small Large LEAD lt gt When repeat is designated the comparison result of the last repeat cycle 52 1 2 3 turns on one of the three special internal relays When more than one CMP or ICMP gt instruction is used M8150 M8151 or M8152 indicates the result of the instruction that was executed last Examples CMP gt The following examples are described using the gt instruction Data comparison operation for all other data comparison instructions is the same for the gt instruction Data Type Word E CMP gt W 7 2 S1 D10 52 020 51 010 127 Di 00 010 42 lt gt 020 52 50 56 SMARTAXTS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 Di Q0 turned on Q0 turned off TIDEC Data Integer
562. tus Description 0 Normal PULS1 The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 Pulse frequency designation PULS2 The pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 2 error PULS3 PULSA The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 5 000 in operation mode 0 4 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 and 100 000 000 19 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS Examples PULS PULS1 instruction pulse counting enabled timing chart PULS1 instruction S1 is specified as D200 D1 is specified as internal relay M50 PULS1 instruction input PULS1 instruction input frequency ni n2 fi f2 i Output pulse Q14 Pulse output ON M50 Pulse output complete M51 f1 f2 frequency n1 n2 n3 output pulse count When the PULS1 instruction input changes from off to on M50 turns on and pulses with the frequency configured by D200 are output When the number of pulses configured by D202 and D203 are output pulse output stops If the value of D200 changes during pulse output pulses are output with the frequency based on that value When the PULS1 instruction input changes from on to off M50 turns off and M51 turns on at the same time The changes from the initialization input are not reflected while the PULS1 instruction input is on If you wish to
563. uch Interrupt Enabled Interrupt Disabled Group 1 10 M8070 ON M8070 OFF Group 2 I2 I2 M8071 ON M8071 OFF Group 3 13 13 M8072 ON M8072 OFF Group 4 15 14 M8073 ON M8073 OFF Group 5 16 15 M8074 ON M8074 OFF Group 6 17 M8075 ON M8075 OFF Timer Interrupt M8144 ON M8144 OFF IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 16 1 16 INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS Programming WindLDR In the Disable Interrupt DI or Enable Interrupt ET dialog box select the check box on the left of Interrupt Groups 1 through 6 or Timer Interrupt to select source device S1 The example below selects interrupt groups 2 3 and timer interrupt for the DI instruction and a 22 will be shown as source device S1 DL Disable Interrup The total of selected interrupt inputs and timer interrupt DI Si is shown as source device S1 Type 51 22 Enable Interrupt Group 1 Interrupt Input I0 DI Disable Interrupt Group 2 Interrupt Input I2 Interrupt Lite Pro Touch S1 Value Group 3 Interrupt Input I3 Group 4 Interrupt Input I5 Group 1 10 0 Group 5 Interrupt Input I6 Group 2 12 12 2 H Group 6 Interrupt Input 17 Group 3 13 13 4 4 Timer Interrupt ms Group 4 15 14 8 1 96 mat Group 5 16 15 32 Group 6 17 64 Timer Interrupt 16 16 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC 16 INTERRUPT CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS Example DI a
564. ue TC or CC is displayed Make sure that the last source data determined by 51 52 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid device range If the derived source or destination device exceeds the valid device range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Source device S2 or destination device D2 does not have to be assigned If S2 or D2 is not assigned the source or destination device is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Examples IBMV soru H IBMV S1 S2 D1 D2 REP EG Pile USE Ge 10 M10 010 Qo c5 Source device S1 and destination device D1 determine the type of device Source device S2 and destination device D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination devices If the value of data register D10 assigned by source device S2 is 5 the M27 M20 M17 M15 M10 source data is determined by adding the offset value to internal relay M10 L assigned by source device S1 WWW 5th from M10 If the current value of counter C5 assigned by destination device D2 is 12 Q17 Q14 Q10 Q7 Qo the destination is determined by adding the offset value to output QO assigned by destination device D1 WWW YY W W W Y W W 9 12th from Q0 As a
565. ues for the PID instruction selected in PID instruction list 1 To store the reflected initial setting values in the module you must end the monitor and download the program to the module un DE SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 19 28 PID INSTRUCTION Changing PID Monitor Settings Operation Procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor The monitor starts Controller pjw WINDLDR Custom PID Monitor Batch Port Monitor Set Up 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt PID Monitor The PID Monitor dialog box is displayed Controller pjw WINDLDR Port Monitor Simulation y Set Up 3 In the PID Monitor dialog box click button PID monitor settings The PID Monitor Settings dialog box is displayed PID Monitor 9 Target Program gt Line dv 7 E Pv E gt C mgs SP E 1 00s gg D sec Send Command por 41 1 5 FP jJ j 1 1 1 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 28 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 n DEC 28 PID INSTRUCTION PID Monitor Settings Dialog Box n PID Monitor Settings Parameter Settings Chart Show Hide No Function Z Process Variable PV PV Process variable Out
566. ugh M8177 can be designated as source devices When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value TC or CC is displayed When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value TP or CP which can be 0 through 65535 When F float data is selected only data register and constant can be designated as S1 and only data register can be designated as D1 When F float data is selected and S1 does not comply with the normal floating point format a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the source I integer X or destination 16 points word or integer data or 32 points double word or long data are used When repeat is D double word X assigned for a bit device the quantity of device bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments L long X When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination F float X 1 point word or integer data or 2 points double word long or float data are used When repeat is assigned for a word device the quantity of device words increases in 1 or 2 point increments DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRA
567. ump for the rising or falling edge transition to be recognized Although normally the SOTU instruction produces a pulse for one scan when used in a program branch the SOTU pulse will last only until the next time the same SOTU instruction is Q1 Internal executed Memory OFF In the example on the left the program branch will loop as long Q1 Output as internal relay remains on However the SOTU produces a OFF pulse output only during the first loop END END Since the END instruction is not executed as long as MO remains on output Q1 is not turned on even if input I1 is on 14 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 i DEC 14 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS LCAL Label Call When input is on the address with label 0 through 255 assigned by S1 is called When input is off no call H LCAL S1 takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine and returns to the main program after the branch is executed LRET instruction see below must be placed at the end of a program branch which is called so that normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction Note The END instruction must be used to separate the main program from any subroutines called by the LCAL instruction A maximum of four LCAL instructions can be nested When more than four LCAL instructions are nested a user program ex
568. unters cannot be used more than once in a user program 10 100000 10 While the reset input is off the counter counts the leading edges n of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value CO When the current value reaches the preset value the counter 100000 turns output on The output stays on until the reset input is D turned on e When the reset input changes from off to on the current value is 12 Q0 reset When the reset input is on all pulse inputs are ignored Timing Chart The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin ON When power is off the counter s current value is held and can Reset Input I0 also be designated as clear type counters using Function Area 99998 199999 100000 Settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation Pulse Input I1 9 for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data N Registers in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Counter CO 4 Counter preset and current values can be changed using ON WindLDR without downloading the entire program to the CPU Input I2 o again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt ON Monitor then Online gt Custom gt New Custom Monitor To Output Q0 OF change a counter preset value select DEC D in the pull down list box The preset value 0 through 4 294 967 295 can be designated e When the preset or current value is changed during counter using a data register DO through
569. up to 24 single byte characters However you cannot enter a number of characters that exceeds the occupied area If scrolling is enabled the message can be entered up to 48 single byte characters 4 Select from Text Manager Select the text to display from the text manager This can be selected only when the scroll is enabled 5 Special Character Enters a special character at the cursor position Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed For the special characters see 8 Special Character on page 13 3 6 Insert Overwrite Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters 13 6 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DE 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Insert Bar Graph The value of the specified device can be displayed as a bar graph on the SmartAXIS LCD Insert Bar Graph 9 1 Device i H 2 Data Type Word W d Maximum 0 4 Minimum oF 5 Origin 6 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x24 Blinking Settings Upper Limit 7 Lower Limit 1 Device Enter the device to display as a bar graph Valid Devices I integer D D double word CC CP D L long D F float 2 Data Type Selects the data type for the specified device Data Type W word I integer D double word L long F float
570. urday Sunday Monday F Tuesday Wednesday F Thursday F Friday OFF time hh mm LET Preview Week Day S N 4 40 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Cancel 1 ON settings This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn on the output The output is turned on at the specified time for the specified day of the week Setting Description Range Day of the week Specifies the days of the week 0 23 ON time Used to enter the time Set the time in a range from 00 00 to 23 59 Minute 0 to 59 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 3 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS 2 OFF settings This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn off the output The output is turned off at the specified time for the specified day of the week Setting Description Range Day of the week Specifies the days of the week Hour 0 to 24 OFF time Used to enter the time Set the time in a range from 00 00 to 24 00 Minute 0 to 59 Note When the time is duplicated in the settings on other tabs the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid For example if ON time is 8 00 and OFF time is 9 00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 9 00 and OFF time is 10 00 on the P 2 tab the 9 00 setting is duplicated on the two tabs and OFF time for the P
571. urned on or off e When pulse output is enabled output is turned on for one scan at the ON settings time For pulse output see 6 Pulse Output on page 12 3 or 6 Pulse Output on page 12 6 e When the ON time is set to a value larger than 2359 the OFF time is set to a value larger than 2400 or the lower 2 digits of ON OFF time is set to a value larger than 59 a user program execution error will occur e When the day of the week is not specified a user program execution error will occur e The WEEK instruction cannot be used in an interrupt program If used a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERR LED on the SmartAXIS For details about the user program execution errors see User Program Execution Errors on page 4 13 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Funton I QM T C D Constant Repeat Si Sourel Starting dataregister A4 S2 Source 2 Initialization input X S3 Source 3 Number of parameter tabs X D1 Destination 1 Output port Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 Internal relays MO through M1277 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 1 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Settings There are two methods to con
572. urned on simultaneously the one at the smallest address is executed and the corresponding completion output is turned on Example 1 When a RXD instruction without a start delimiter is executed Incoming Data When D100 is designated as the first data register 0 1 2 3 EN 010 30h 31h 32h 33h T 9 E D101 ist character 0100 h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to receive format 2 When RXD instructions with start delimiters STX 02h and ENQ 05h are executed Incoming Data six 1 3 02h 31h 32h 33h ENQ w 05h 41h 42h 43h A RXD Instruction 1 STX 02h gt D101 h When D100 is designated as the first data register 0100 h D100 h Compare D200 h RXD Instruction 2 ENQ 05h gt D201 When D200 is designated as the first data register 0200 h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format Start delimiters are not stored to data registers Multi byte Start Delimiter A start delimiter can be programmed at the first bytes in the receive format of a RXD instruction the SmartAXIS wil
573. ursor moves to the CUD instruction 00005 hs button once 10001 00004 0002 0003 00006 H k Sl 0004 0005 0006 M0007 M0010 M0011 10002 M0014 M0015 2 With the cursor at the position of the CUD instruction press the ok OK button The details screen is displayed OPCODE CUD W C C 000 ON 5 CUR CCO00 0 3 After you check the details press the 4 ESC button Returns to the ladder program display screen 00005 SOTU 10001 Q0004 0001 0002 M0003 00006 1 jd J J T 1 F 1 t 1 187 1 F 0004 0005 0006 M0007 M0010 M0011 10002 0013 0014 0015 Note Monitoring ladder program of FT1A Touch using WindLDR You can monitor ladder programs and change device values of FT1A Touch using WindLDR There is a limitation when you use bit devices out of the control devices as 16 32 bit data and change its device values When you monitor bit devices such as internal relays or shift registers you can monitor values of those bit devices starting from any addresses However when you change values of those devices device addresses must be 16 bit aligned For example you can change 16 32 bit valu
574. used to control the DTR data terminal ready signal to indicate the SmartAXIS operating status or transmitting receiving status Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 3 2 1 0 D8106 0 4 s 3 Port2 00 DTR is on off while SmartAXIS is stopped 01 DTR is off 10 DTR is on while SmartAXIS can receive data auto switching 11 Same as 00 D8110 D8121 Connection 1 through 3 Connected IP Address The IP address of the remote host accessing the connection 1 through 3 is stored in special data registers Example Connection 1 Connected IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd D8110 aaa D8111 bbb D8112 ccc D8113 ddd DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 3 15 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8130 D8132 Connection Connected Port Number When connections are established with other network devices the port numbers of the connected network devices are stored in these special data registers D8130 Connection 1 Connected Port Number D8131 Connection 2 Connected Port Number D8132 Connection 3 Connected Port Number D8133 Data Register ROM Backup Execution Status This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup Stores the execution status for writing and reading 1 Processing 2 Normal termination 3 Cannot access ROM 4 Invalid values are stored in D8184 starting address to read and D8185 number of registers to read 5 Valid data could not be rea
575. ut Q15 Q17 Note Q15 Q13 Dual pulse mode cannot be used Note When using single pulse mode on the 40 I O type 016 017 are used Therefore PULS3 PWM3 or PULS4 PWM4 cannot be used 9 The number of steps This setting specifies the number of steps The maximum is 18 10 Start number When the input changes from off to on pulse output starts with the settings for the step configured as the start number 11 Interrupt number When the interrupt input changes from off to on the pulse output process for the running step is aborted and pulse output restarts with the settings for the step configured by the interrupt number IDEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 19 37 19 PULSE OUTPUT INSTRUCTIONS ARAMP step settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency 13 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz M 4 change time 14 100 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 15 100000000 1 100 000 000 Step 4 Control direction 1214 contra 16 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number 17 1 0 to 18 step Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 12 Step numbers This option selects the step number to configure 13 Steady pulse frequency
576. uted in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types W word X When a bit device such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is assigned as the I integer destination 16 points word data are used D double word When a word device such as T timer C counter or D data register is assigned as the source or destination L long 1 point word data is used F float Example DTCB Before Execution After Execution DTCB W Si Di T2345 D10 D20 2 n D10 0030h Upper byte gt 020 3039h 57 Dil 0039h Lower byte 11 22 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 11 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS SWAP Data Swap H Applicable SmartAXIS 51 101 When input is on upper and lower byte or word data of a word or double word data assigned by S1 are exchanged and the result is stored to destination assigned by D1 SWAP 51 8 Di R REP 1 12 1 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data to swap X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion result X 1 99 For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Since the SWAP instruction
577. utput Up Rising edge differentiation output 5 26 TIM 100 ms Timer Subtracting 100 ms timer 0 to 6553 5 sec 5 7 TIMO 100 ms Off delay Timer Subtracting 100 ms off delay timer 0 to 6553 5 sec 5 10 TMH 10 ms Timer Subtracting 10 ms timer 0 to 655 35 sec 5 7 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 4 1 IDEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE 42 Symbol Name Function See Page TMHO 10 ms Off delay Timer Subtracting 10 ms off delay timer 0 to 655 35 sec 5 10 TML 1 sec Timer Subtracting 1 sec timer 0 to 65535 sec 5 7 TMLO 1 sec Off delay Timer Subtracting 1 sec off delay timer 0 to 65535 sec 5 10 TMS 1 ms Timer Subtracting 1 ms timer 0 to 65 535 sec 5 7 TMSO 1 ms Off delay Timer Subtracting 1 ms off delay timer 0 to 65 535 sec 5 10 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 IDEC Advanced Instruction List Group NOP Move Data Comparison Binary Arithmetic Boolean Computation Shift and Rotate IDEC 4 INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE Valid Data Type Symbol Name See Page No Operation 4 14 MOV Move X X X XX 6 1 MOVN Move Not X XXX 6 5 IMOV Indirect Move X X X 6 6 IMOVN Indirect Move Not X X 6 8 BMOV Block Move X 6 9 IBMV Indirect Bit Move X 6 10 IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not X 6 12 NSET N Data Set X X X Xx 6 13 NRS N Data Repeat Set X X X Xx 6 14 XCHG
578. value Process variable process variable maximum value or process variable process 109 P p PID execution stop variable minimum value was set 120 The control mode was set to a value other than 0 to 3 PID execution continues 121 The sampling period was set to 0 or 10 001 or greater PID execution continues 122 The proportional band was set to 0 or a value of 10 001 or greater PID execution continues 123 The derivative gain was set to 0 or a value of 101 or greater PID execution continues 124 The integral start factor ARW was set to a value of 101 or greater PID execution continues 125 A value was set for the upper limit alarm value that does not satisfy lower limit alarm PID execution continues value lt upper limit alarm value lt process variable maximum value A value et for the lower limit alarm value that does not sati iable 126 ue was si r imit alarm value tha 5 satisfy process BID execution continues minimum value lt lower limit alarm value lt upper limit alarm value The output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value was set to a value 127 PID execution continues between 101 to 10 000 or 10 100 to 65 535 The output manipulated variable restriction lower limit value was set to a value of 101 128 d B SS PID execution continues or higher PID execution continues 129 The output manipulated variable rate of change was set to a value of 101 or higher PID e
579. values for timers and counters 5 17 clear button 5 17 clearing changed preset values 5 17 clock data adjust flag M8021 3 5 write flag M8017 3 5 instructions 24 1 CMP lt 7 1 CMP lt 7 1 CMP lt gt 7 1 CMP 7 1 CMP gt 7 1 CMP gt 7 1 CNT CDP and CUD instructions 5 11 CNTD CDPD and CUDD instructions 5 14 common logarithm 22 2 communication adapter information D8030 3 12 error M8005 3 5 mode information port 2 and port 3 D8026 3 11 compare equal to 7 1 greater than 7 1 or equal to 7 1 less than 7 1 or equal to 7 1 unequal to 7 1 Comparing BCC Codes 25 18 comparison result 1M8150 3 7 2 M8151 3 7 3 M8152 3 7 M8150 M8151 M8152 7 2 7 6 confirm button 5 17 confirming changed preset values 5 17 constant 25 15 Constant for Verification 25 15 conversion linear 17 5 type 25 3 25 9 convert 2 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 m DEC datatype 11 19 XtoY 172 YtoX 173 coordinate conversion instructions 77 1 COS 21 4 cosine 21 4 counter adding up counter 5 71 and shift register in master control circuit 5 28 comparison instructions 5 78 double word adding up 5 14 dual pulse reversible 5 15 up down selection reversible 5 76 dual pulse reversible 5 72 up down selection reversible 5 23 CPU module type information D8002 3 11 CSV 26 5 26 11 current value change counter 5 71 timer 5 8 CVDT 11 19 CVXTY 172 CVYTX 173 data combine 11 22 comparison instructions 7 7 conversion error 17 3
580. vice Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited 1 S1 source 1 Control Register Specify the device to store the PID instruction parameters A data register can be specified 40 words are used starting from the specified data register For allocating the data registers see 5 Device Allocation on page 28 3 The data registers are initialized with the values configured on the input tab control tab and output tab by turning on the initialization input For initialization see 2 S2 source 2 Initialization Input on page 28 2 2 S2 source 2 Initialization Input Specify the device to initialize the control registers You can specify either an input or an internal relay The values configured on the input tab control tab and output tab are stored in the control registers and control relays when the initialization input turns on For tag names device addresses and comments see 1 S1 source 1 Control Register on page 28 2 3 S3 source 3 Control Relay These relays perform control of PID control and output the control results of the PID instruction You can specify an internal relay 16 bits are used starting from the specified device The role of each bit is different You can switch between auto and manual mode for the PID instruction and execute auto tuning by turning the bits on and off The PID instruction control result
581. while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used Valid Data Types 7 Since floating point data is used the source and destination devices use two consecutive data registers I integer D double word L long m F float X Example COS When input I1 is turned on the cosine of the radian value of data registers D10 and D11 assigned by source device S1 is stored to data registers D20 and D21 assigned by destination device D1 3 926991 rad 57 4 rad COS F 51 D1 Dio D20 cos 57 4 0 7071068 51 Di 010 011 3 926991 p20 D21 0 7071068 21 4 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 DEC 21 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS TAN Tangent H Applicable SmartAXIS tan 51 51 1 gt D1 D1 1 TAN F Si Di When input is on the tangent of the radian value assigned by source device S1 is stored to the destination assigned by device D1 FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Valid Devices Device Function I Q M R T C D Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Radian value to convert into tangent value X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X For valid device address ranges see Device Addresses on page 3 1 When the conversion result is not within the range between 3 402823 x 1028
582. wledgment LCD Display Settings M0000 BE 2 The Special Data List window is up 18 Double click on the Current date Special Data Occupied Area Row x Column Current date Current time Date when input of MSG instruction is tumed on 1x10 Time when input of MSG instruction is tumed on 19 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area sw ___ i y y EE Options Priority 0 E Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Insert YYYY MM DD WorkArea mcd d aeo This concludes configuring the settings LCD display When M0000 is on the room temperature stored in D0002 IDEC room temp is is displayed as the numeric value and bar graph p Now 28 When M0000 is off the outdoor temperature stored in D0002 is displayed as the numeric value and bar graph n DEC SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 13 15 13 DISPLAY INSTRUCTIONS Modifying Device Values on the SmartAXIS The values of the word devices displayed on the SmartAXIS LCD can be
583. xecution continues The manual mode output manipulated variable was set to a value that does not satisfy 130 output manipulated variable restriction lower limit value manual mode output PID execution continues manipulated variable lt output manipulated variable restriction upper limit value 131 The proportional band offset value was set to a value that is not between 100 to 100 PID execution continues 132 The control cycle was set to 0 or a value of 501 or greater PID execution continues Output manipulated variable value S1 18 Shows the output manipulated variable in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 327 68 to 327 67 while the PID instruction is being executed The output manipulated variable 90 value is unstable while auto tuning is executed In manual mode the manual mode output manipulated variable value is not stored S2 Initialization Input When the initialize input is on the control registers data registers are overwritten with the values configured on the WindLDR input tab control tab and output tab If you want the initialization to be performed just one time please use a SOTU shot up or a SOTD shot down instruction SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 28 11 28 PID INSTRUCTION S3 Control Relay Device Function Setting details R W 5340 Cental anion 0 OFF control action R 1 ON Direct control action 0 OFF Auto S34
584. y 1572 decimal When configured to turn on the output on the Final Final Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting Bit 15 14 13 12 11 Bit Bit Bit 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 po o o o o j1jopops ojo zj o o Month setting 0110 6 June Week setting 110 6 final Day of the week setting 100 4 Thursday The value of the data register is 11000110100 binary 1588 decimal 12 20 SMARTAXIS LADDER PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1382 12 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Timing Chart when the Input Turns On during the Configured Interval When the input turns on or off during the interval between the ON settings and the OFF settings and when the input turns on or off after 0 00 on the date configured by the ON settings when pulse output is enabled the timing chart is as follows When pulse output is disabled When the input is turned on the current date and the ON and OFF settings are compared and the output turns on or off Settings Ladder program ON settings February 15 2012 OFF settings February 17 2012 Output port 90 When the input is on before the day specified by the ON settings On February 13 2012 when the input is turned on the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is not within the ON and OFF settings February 15 to February 17 2012 Therefore the
585. y the Data Register Allocation dialog box As shown below a table showing the data registers and their corresponding WEEK instruction settings is displayed on the dialog box 8 Click Allocate Comments 9 and you can configure the comments for the data registers that correspond to the names of the settings This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers Data Register Allocation dialog box Data Register Allocation Description P1 Day of the week ON and OFF P1 0N Time P1 OFF Time P2 Day of the week ON and OFF P2 0N Time P2 OFF Time 8 P3 Day of the week ON and OFF P3 0N Time OFF Time P4 Day of the week ON and OFF ON Time P4 9 OFF Time Parameter tab This tab configures the ON OFF settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 WEEK instruction If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK instruction with data registers the settings configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is shared in common with To configure the day of the week and the time as fixed settings See Parameter tab on page 12 3 Preview The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart This function is shared in common with To confi
586. y the integral action If the integral time is too short the integral action becomes too large which causes hunting of a long cycle Conversely if the integral time is too long the processing until the set point is reached will take time The integral execution range is proportional band to proportional band If the process variable goes out of the proportional band due to a change in the set point or a disturbance the integration calculation stops As a result the response of the output manipulated variable against the change in set point improves and undershoot and overshoot can be reduced When auto tuning is used the appropriate integral time can be automatically set for the target application For details see Auto Tuning AT on page 28 15 The integral time can be set from 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments 6 Derivative Time 51 10 When the set point changes or when the difference between the set point and the process variable increases due to a disturbance the derivative action quickly brings the process variable close to the set point by increasing the manipulated variable When the derivative time is decreased the derivative action becomes weaker and the response to rapid temperature changes becomes slower The action to control rapid temperature increases also becomes weaker so the time to reach the set point will become shorter but overshoot will occur more easily When the derivative time is increased the derivativ
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Descarregar Samsung Galaxy Grand Neo Duos Uživatelská přiručka SOLAERA Solarheizsystem User Guide ezManual International v 6 1 1 Bedienungsanleitung MT-5110 3 1/2 Capacitance Meter International - MEDEF Lyon 資料ー -2 Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file